New Holland - D350 - EN PDF

Copyright New Holland
D350
CRAWLER DOZER
Workshop Manual
Print No. 604.13.532.00 English
THIS ALERT SYMBOL SIGNALS IMPORTANT MESSAGES INVOLVING YOUR SAFETY.

Read and heed carefully the safety instructions listed and follow the precautions recommended to avoid
potential risks and to safeguard your health and your safety.
You will find this symbol in the text of this Manual referred to the following key words:
WARNING - Cautions directed to avoid improper repair interventions involving potential consequences for
the safety of the personnel performing the repairs.
DANGER - These warnings qualify specifically potential dangers for the safety of the operator or other
persons directly or indirectly involved.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
All maintenance and repair interventions explained in this Manual must be performed exclusively by the Service
Organisation of the Manufacturer, observing strictly the instructions explained using, whenever necessary, the
recommended specific tools.
Whoever performs the operations reported without following exactly the precautions is responsible on his own,
for the damages that may result.
Neither the Factory nor any Organisations in its Distribution Network, including but not limited to national, regional
or local distributors, are responsible for any liability arising from any damage resulting from defects caused by parts
and/or components not approved by the Factory for use in maintaining and/or repairing products manufactured
or merchandised by the Factory.
In any case, no warranty of any kind is made or shall be imposed with respect to products manufactured or
merchandised by the Factory, when failures are caused by the use of parts and/or components not approved by
the Factory.
AVOID ACCIDENTS
Most accidents, whether they occur in industry, on the
farm, at home or on the road, are caused by the failure
of some individuals to follow simple and fundamental
safety rules and precautions. For this reason MOST
ACCIDENTS CAN BE PREVENTED by recognising
the real cause and doing something aboiut it before the
accident occurs.
Regardless of the care used in the design and construction of any type of equipment, there are many conditions
that cannot be completely safeguarded against without
interfering in the reasonable accessibility and efficient
operation.
A carefull operator is the best insurance against an
accident. The complete observance of one simple rule
would prevent many serious accidents.
The rule is simple: never attempt to clean, lubricate or
maintain a machine while it is in motion.
WARNING
Prior to engaging in any maintenance, adjustment
or repair operation on machines having hydraulically, mechanically, and/or cable controlled equipment (such as shovels, loaders, dozers, excavators
etc.) be certain the equipment is lowered to the
ground.
If it is necessary to have the equipment partially or
fully raised to gain access to certain items, be sure
the equipment is suitably supported by means
other than the devices used for controlling the
equipment.
SUMMARY
GENERALITIES
SECT. 0
ENGINE
SECT. 1
TRANSMISSION
SECT. 2
FINAL DRIVES
SECT. 3
BRAKES AND STEERING DIFFERENTIAL
SECT. 4
UNDERCARRIAGE
SECT. 5
DOZING EQUIPMENT
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SECT. 6
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECT. 7
2
D350M0001
SECTION 0
GENERALITIES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT
PAGE
SAFETY RULES ................................................................................................................. III-X

TABLE OF TECHNICAL DATA ...................................................................................................
Identification data .............................................................................................................. 0-3
Table of capacities ............................................................................................................. 0-4
Main dimensions D350 ...................................................................................................... 0-5
Specifications D350 ........................................................................................................... 0-6
CONTROL DATA ON THE MACHINE ................................................................................... 0-19
LIST OF WEIGHTS FOR MAIN SERVICE COMPONENTS ................................................ 0-20
STABILITY .......................................................................................................................... 0-21
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................................................ 0-22
TROUBLESHOOTING ......................................................................................................... 0-26
UNITS OF MEASURE......................................................................................................... 0-27
TABLE OF TIGHTENING TORQUES ................................................................................... 0-29
II
SAFETY RULES
WARNING
Study carefully this Manual before starting, operating, maintaining, fuelling or servicing the
machine.
Read and heed all safety rules before any intervention.
SAFETY RULES
- Check brakes, steering and attachment controls before

moving. Advise the proper maintenance authority of any
malfunctioning part or system.
- Do not allow unauthorised personnel to operate service

or maintain this machine.
- Be sure all protective guards or panels are in place, and

all safety devices provided are in place and in good
operating conditions.
- Do not wear rings, wrist watches, jewellery, loose or

hanging apparels, such as ties, torn clothing, scarves,
unbuttoned or unzipped jackets that can catch on moving parts. Wear proper safety equipment as recommended for the job. Examples: hard hat, heavy gloves,
ear protection, safety glasses or goggles, reflector vests,
respirator. Consult your employer for specific safety
equipment requirements.
- Be sure exposed personnel in the area of operation are

clear of the machine before moving it or its attachments.
WALK COMPLETELY AROUND the machine before
mounting. Sound horn.
- Before starting machine, check, adjust and lock the
operator's seat for maximum comfort and control of the
machine.
- Keep operator's compartment, stepping points, grabrails and handles clear of foreign objects, oil, grease,
mud or snow accumulation to minimise the danger of
slipping or stumbling. Clean mud or grease from shoes
before attempting to mount or operate the machine.
- Fasten your seat belt (when provided).

- Obey all flag signals and signs.
- Do not jump on or off the machine. Keep two hands and

one foot, or two feet and one hand in contact with step
grab rails and handles at all times.
- Due to the presence on the machine of flammable fluids,

never check or fill fuel reservoirs or batteries near open
flames, smoking materials or sparks.
- Do not use controls or hoses as hand holds when

climbing on or off machine. Hoses and controls are
movable and do not provide a solid support. Also,
controls may be inadvertently moved causing accidental machine or equipment movement.
- REMEMBER THAT STARTING FLUID IS FLAMMABLE.

Follow strictly the recommendations printed on containers and in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
- Never attempt to operate the machine or its tools from

any position other than seated in the operator's seat.
- Containers must be stored in fresh, well ventilated

places, out of reach of unauthorised persons. Follow
strictly the instructions provided by the Manufacturer.
- DO NOT PUNCTURE OR BURN CONTAINERS.
- Keep head, body, limbs, hands and feet inside operator's compartment at all times, to reduce exposure to
hazards outside the operator's compartment.
- Never use these products near open flames, smoking

materials or sparks.
- Be careful of slippery conditions on stepping points,

hand rails, and on the ground. Wear safety boots or
shoes that have a high slip resistant sole material.
- Do not leave the machine until it is completely stopped.
OPERATION
- Check the seat safety belt at least twice a year. If there

are signs of wear or fraying or other signs of weakness
that could lead to failure, replace it.
- Do not run the engine of this machine in closed areas

without proper ventilation to remove deadly exhaust
gases.
- Roll Over Protective Structures are required on loaders,
dozers, graders, excavators. NEVER OPERATE machines without ROPS.
STARTING
- Make sure the Operator's compartment is free of foreign

objects, especially if not firmly secured. Never use the
machine to transport objects, unless proper securing
points are provided.
- NEVER START NOR OPERATE AN UNSAFE MACHINE. Before operating a machine, always ensure that
any unsafe condition has been satisfactorily remedied.
III
SAFETY RULES
- Check monitoring instruments at start-up and frequently
during operations. in case the brake pressure gauge
shows a pressure lower than the minimum operating
pressure, stop immediately the machine .
- Avoid kinking chains or cables. Do not pull through a

kinked chain or cable to the high stresses and possibility
of failure of the kinked area. Always wear heavy gloves
when handling chains or cables.
- DO NOT CARRY RIDERS ON MACHINE
- Be sure chains and cables are anchored and the anchor

points are strong enough to handle the expected load.
Keep exposed personnel clear of anchor points and
cables or chains.
- Study and familiarise with escape routes alternate to

normal exit routes.
- Seat belts are required by current regulations to be
provided with Roll Over Protection Structures or cabs.
Keep safety belts fastened around you during operation.
- DO NOT PULL UNLESS OPERATOR's COMPARTMENT OF MACHINES INVOLVED ARE PROPERLY

GUARDED AGAINST POTENTIAL CABLE OR CHAIN
BACKLASH.
- For your personal protection, do not climb on or off

machine while machine is in motion.
- Be alert to soft ground conditions close to newly constructed walls. The fill material and weight of the machine
may cause the wall collapse under the machine.
- Make sure that exposed persons in the area of operation

are clear of the machine, before starting the engine and
operating the equipment. Sound horn. Obey all indications provided by flags and signals.
- In darkness, check area of operation carefully before

moving in with machine. Use all lights provided. Do not
move into area of restricted visibility.
- NEVER COAST the machine down grades and slopes

with the transmission in neutral or neutralised.
- If engine has a tendency to stall for any reason under

load or idle, report this for adjustment to proper maintenance authority immediately. Do not continue to operate
machine, until condition has been corrected.
Choose and shift into the most appropriate gear to keep

the speed required, thus preventing any loss of control.
- Do not operate machinery in a condition of extreme
fatigue or illness. Be especially careful towards the end
of working shift.
- On machines supplied with suction radiator fans, be sure

to periodically check engine exhaust parts for leaks, as
exhaust fumes are dangerous to the operator.
- Do not operate machine with brakes out of adjustment.

- In case of closed type cabs, always keep an opening with
the outside, to ensure a constant air circulation.
- Operate the machine at speeds slow enough to ensure

complete control at all times.
- Operators must know thoroughly the performances of

the machine they are operating. When working on
slopes or near sudden level drops of the terrain, avoid
areas where ground is loose or soft since rolling-over or
loss of control of machine could result.
- Travel slowly over rough terrain, on slopes or near dropoffs, in congested areas or on ice or slippery surfaces.
- When backing, always look to where the machine is to
be moved. Be alert to the position of exposed personnel.
DO NOT OPERATE if exposed personnel enter the
immediate work area. STOP THE MACHINE.
- Where noise exposure exceeds 90 dBA for 8 hours, wear

approved ear protection.
- Maintain a safe distance from other machines. Provide

sufficient clearance for ground and visibility conditions.
Yield right-of-way to loaded machines.
- When counterweights are provided, do not work machine if they have been removed.
- Overtaking manoeuvres must be performed only when
absolutely necessary and unavoidable. Beware of possible uneven terrains, poor visibility conditions, the presence of other machinery or persons out of sight.
- Maintain clear vision of areas of travel or work. Keep cab

windows clean and repaired.
- When machines are operating in tandem, the pusher
(rear) must be equipped with the appropriate deflectors
to protect the unit in front from the air stream coming from
the radiator.
- Operate the machine at a speed adequate to the working

conditions in the site and slow enough to ensure complete control at all times.
- When pulling or towing through a cable or chain, do not

start suddenly at full throttle; take-up slack carefully.
- Never use the machine as a work platform or scaffolding,

nor other inappropriate operations (i.e. pushing railway
cars, trucks or other machines).
Inspect carefully for flaws or troubles before using.
IV
SAFETY RULES
- Be alert of people in the operating area of the machine.
- NEVER DRIVE OVER THEM or other surface irregularities that brake traction with the ground, especially when
on slopes or near drop-offs.
- When operating a machine, know in advance what

clearances will be encountered, overhead doors, cables, pipes, bearing load limitations of ground, bridges,
floors or ramps.
- Be alert to avoid changes in traction conditions that could

cause loss of control. DO NOT DRIVE on ice or frozen
ground conditions when working the machine on steep
slopes or near drop-offs.
- When roading, find-out what conditions are likely to be

encountered, clearances, traffic congestion, type of road
surfacing, etc. Beware of fog, smoke or dust elements
that obscure visibility.
- Working in virgin and rough terrains is characterised by

the presence of all the perils and risks listed above. In
these conditions, it is emphasised the danger represented by large tree limbs (possibly falling on the machine), large roots (acting as a leverage under the
machine when up-rooted causing the roll-over of the
unit) etc.
- When crossing gullies or ditches, move at an angle with

reduced speed after ensuring ground conditions will
permit a safe traverse.
- Explore the working area to identify potential risks such
as: slopes, overhangs, pits, demolition rubble, fires,
ravines, ditches, soft terrain, heavy traffic, crowded parking areas, closed ambients. In such conditions, proceed
with extreme care.
STOPPING
- When the machine is stopped for whatever reason,
follow the instructions of chapters "Stopping the machine" and "Stopping the engine" of the Operation and
Maintenance Instruction Manual.
- Whenever possible, avoid going over obstacles such as

rough terrain, rocks, logs highly irregular ground, steps,
ditches, railroad tracks. When obstructions must be
crossed, do so with extreme care at an angle, if possible.
Reduce speed, shift-down. Ease up to the break over
point, pass the balance point slowly on the obstruction
and ease down on the other side.
- Always remember to position the transmission drive

control in neutral and engage the control lock to secure
the machine.
- In steep down-hill operation, do not allow engine to overspeed. Select proper gear before starting down grade.
- The parking brake is automatically set, when the transmission safety lever is lowered.
- Avoid side hill travel, whenever possible. Drive up and

down the slope. Should the machine slipping sideways,
turn it immediately downhill.
- NEVER LEAVE THE MACHINE UNATTENDED with the

engine running.
- Always, before leaving the operator's seat and after
making sure all people are clear of the machine, slowly
lower the attachments or tools flat to the ground in a
positive ground support position.
- The grade of slope you should attempt will be limited by

factors such as condition of the ground, load being
handled, type of machine, speed of machine and visibility.
- Return the controls to rest position. Place the gearshift

lever in neutral. Disconnect the master switch and extract the key.
- There is no substitute for good judgement when working

on slopes.
- Park in a non- operating and no-traffic area or as instructed. Park on firm level ground if possible. Where not
possible, position machine at a right angle to the slope,
making sure there is no danger of uncontrolled sliding
movements.
- Avoid operating equipment too close to an overhang or

high wall, either above or below the machine. Be on the
look-out for caving edges, falling objects and slides.
Beware of concealment by brush and undergrowth of
these danger.
- If parking in traffic lanes cannot be avoided, provide

appropriate flags, barriers, flares and signals as required. Also provide advance warning signals in the
traffic lane of approaching traffic.
- When pushing-over trees, the machine must be

equipped with proper overhead guarding. Never allow
a machine to climb up on the root structure particularly
while the tree is being felled. Use extreme care when
pushing over any tree with dead branches.
- Keep head, body, limbs, feet, fingers or hands away from

bucket, blade or ripper when in raised position.
- Always disconnect the master switch before any intervention (i.e. cleaning, repairing, maintaining, refuelling
- When pushing trees with dead limbs, proceed with

extreme care. Avoid brush piles, logs or rocks.
SAFETY RULES
etc.). Do the same when parking for prolonged periods
of time to avoid accidental or unauthorised starting.
- Keep operator's compartment, stepping points, grabrails and handles clear of foreign objects, oil, grease,
mud or snow accumulation to minimise the danger of
slipping or stumbling.
- Never lower attachments or tools other than seated in

operator's seat. Sound horn. Make sure area near the
attachment is clear. Lower the attachment slowly. DO
NOT USE FLOAT POSITION of hydraulic system.
Clean mud or grease from shoes before attempting to

mount or operate the machine.
- Keep shoes free of mud or grease before climbing or
driving the machine.
- Place master switch in OFF, securely block the machine

and lock it every time you leave it unattended. Return
keys to authorised security. Heed all shut-down operations of the Operation and Maintenance Instruction
Manual are followed.
- Never attempt to operate the machine or its tools from

any position other than seated in the operator's seat.
- When maintenance operations require moving hydraulically operated attachments by means of machine's
hydraulic system remember that all manoeuvres must
be made only when seated in the operator's seat. Before
starting machine or moving attachment or tools, set
brakes, sound horn and call for an all clear. Raise
attachment slowly.
MAINTENANCE
GENERALITIES
- Always block booms or parts of the machine which must

be raised to perform interventions under them with
external devices. Do not allow persons to move into the
vicinities nor standing under equipment not being
blocked. Unless you are totally sure about your safety,
avoid staying under raised equipment, even in case it is
blocked.
- Before operating or performing any intervention on the

machine:
read carefully all the rules contained by this Manual;
read and obey all safety related plates and instructions located on the machine.
- Do not allow unauthorised personnel to perform any
maintenance operation. Do not perform maintenance
operation without prior authorisation. Follow all recommended maintenance and service procedures.
- Do not place the body, limbs or fingers into sharp

articulation uncontrolled openings of the machine and
without proper protections, unless they are blocked in a
safe manner.
- Keep operator's compartment free of all loose objects

that are not properly secured.
- Never perform interventions with engine running, except as called for in a Manual. Do not wear loose clothing
or jewellery near moving parts.
- Do not wear rings, wrist watches, jewellery, loose or

hanging apparels, such as ties, torn clothing, scarves,
unbuttoned or unzipped jackets that can catch on moving parts. Wear proper safety equipment as recommended for the job. Examples: hard hat, heavy gloves,
ear protection, safety glasses or goggles, reflector vests,
respirator. Consult your employer for specific safety
equipment requirements.
- When servicing or maintenance require access to areas

that cannot be reached from the ground, use a ladder or
step platform that meet local and national regulations, to
reach the service point. If such ladder or platform are not
available, use the machine hand holds and steps as
provided. Perform all service or maintenance carefully.
- Shop and/or field service platforms or ladders must be
constructed and maintained in accordance with local
and national regulations.
- Do not use controls or hoses as hand holds when

climbing on or off machine. Hoses and controls are
movable and do not provide a solid support. Also,
controls may be inadvertently moved causing accidental machine or equipment movement.
- Disconnect batteries and tag all controls according to

current regulations to warn that work is in progress. Block
machine and all attachments that must be raised according to current regulations.
- Do not jump on or off the machine. Keep two hands and

one foot, or two feet and one hand in contact with step
grab rails and handles at all times.
Due to the presence of flammable fluids, never check or

fill fuel tanks, batteries, nor use starting fluid near lighted
smoking materials or open flames.
- Do not perform any service operation on the machine

with a person seated in the operator's compartment,
unless he is an authorised operator co-operating in the
operation to be performed.
- BRAKES ARE INOPERATIVE when manually released

for servicing. Provisions must be made to maintain
control of the machine by blocking or other means.
VI
SAFETY RULES
- The fuel filling nose must be kept constantly inside the
filling neck. Keep this contact from the beginning to the
end of the fuelling operation to avoid the possibility that
sparks due to static electricity are generated.
- Move with extreme care when working under the machine, its attachments and or on or near them. Always
wear protective safety equipment as required, such as
hard hat, goggles, safety shoes, ear plugs.
- Use only designated towing or attaching points. Use

care in making attachments. Make sure pins and/or locks
are secure before pulling. Stay clear of drawbars, cables
or chains under load.
- When performing operations requiring running of the

engine, have a qualified operator in the operator's seat
at all times with the mechanic on sight. Place the transmission in neutral and set the brakes and safety lock.
- To move a disabled machine, use a trailer or a low-boy,

if available. In case towing is needed , use all necessary
signals required by local and national regulations, and
follow the directions provided in this Manual.
- KEEP HANDS AND CLOTHING AWAY FROM MOVING

PARTS.
- For field service, move machine to level ground, if
possible, and block it. If work on an incline is absolutely
necessary, first block machine and its attachments securely, than move it to level ground as soon as possible.
- To load/unload a machine from transporter, choose a

level surface ensuring firm support to the wheels of truck
or trailer. Use strong access ramps, with adequate
height and angle. Keep surface free of mud, oil or
slippery materials.
- Do not trust worn and /or kinked chains and cables: do

not use them for lifting or pulling operations. To handle
them, always use heavy gloves.
- Anchor the machine securely to the bed of truck or trailer

and block wheels or tracks with appropriate wedges.
- Be sure chains and cables are anchored and the anchor

points are strong enough to handle the expected load.
Keep exposed personnel clear of anchor points and
cables or chains.
- Never align holes with fingers or hands; always use

appropriate aligning tools.
- Eliminate all sharp edges and burrs from re-worked
parts.
- No bystanders are allowed near the hooking points,

chains or cables.
- Use only approved grounded auxiliary power sources

for heaters, chargers, pumps and similar equipment to
reduce the hazards of electrical shocks.
- DO NOT PULL UNLESS OPERATOR's COMPARTMENT OF MACHINES INVOLVED ARE PROPERLY

GUARDED AGAINST POTENTIAL CABLE OR CHAIN
BACKLASH.
- Lift and handle heavy parts with a lifting device of proper

capacity. Be sure parts are supported by proper slings
and hooks. Use lifting eyes if provided. Watch-out for
people in the vicinity.
- Keep the area where maintenance operations are performed CLEAN and DRY. Eliminate immediately all
water and oil spillages.
- Never pour gasoline or diesel fuel into open, wide and

low containers. Never use gasoline, solvent or other
flammable fluid to clean parts. Use exclusively qualified,
non-flammable, non-toxic commercial solvents.
- Do not pile oily or greasy rags; they represent a fire

hazard. Store in closed metal container.
- Before starting machine, check, adjust and lock the
operator's seat for maximum comfort and control of the
machine. Be sure exposed personnel in the area of
operation are clear of the machine before moving it or its
attachments. Sound horn.
- When using compressed air for cleaning parts, use

safety glasses with side shields or goggles. Limit pressure to 2 bar (29 psi), in accordance with local and
national regulations.
- Rust inhibitors are volatile and flammable Use only in

well ventilated areas. Keep open flames away - DO NOT
SMOKE - Store containers in a cool well ventilated place,
secure against unauthorised personnel.
- Do not run the engine in closed areas without proper

ventilation to remove deadly exhaust fumes.
- Do not smoke or permit any open flames or spark near
when re-fuelling or handling flammable materials.
- Do not carry loose objects in pockets that might fall

unnoticed into open compartments.
- Do not use an open flame as a light source to look for

leaks or for inspection anywhere on the machine.
- Wear proper protective equipment such as safety goggles or safety glasses with side shields, hard hat, safety
shoes, heavy gloves when metal or other particles are
apt to fly or fall.
- Make sure that all mechanic's tools are in good conditions. NEVER USE tools with mushroomed heads or
frayed. Always wear eye protections.
VII
SAFETY RULES
- Wear welders protective equipment such as dark safety
glasses, helmets, protective clothing, gloves and safety
shoes, when welding or burning. Wear dark safety
glasses near welding zones.
- Do not run engine when refuelling and use care if the

engine is hot due to the increased possibility of a fire if
fuel is spilled.
- Never attempt to check or adjust fan belts when engine
is running.
DO NOT LOOK AT ARC WITHOUT PROPER EYE PROTECTION.
- Do not adjust engine fuel pump when machine is moving.
- Know your jacking equipment and its capacity. Be sure

the jacking point used on the machine is appropriate for
the load to be applied. Be sure the support of the jack at
the machine and under jack is appropriate and stable.
- Do not lubricate the machine with engine running.

- Do not run the engine with air intakes, door or protections
open.
- The load lifted by jacks is always dangerous: it is necessary to transfer loads to appropriate blocking as a safety
measure, before proceeding with service or maintenance work, according to local or national regulations.
- Steel cables are frayed after prolonged use; always
wear appropriate protections (heavy gloves, goggles
etc.).
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
- Handle all parts carefully. Keep hands and fingers away

from structures, gears or moving parts. Use and wear
always the appropriate protections
- Disconnect batteries prior to any intervention on machine or electrical system (cleaning, repair, maintenance).
- Compressed air systems can have water deposits created by moisture condensation due to changes of atmospheric conditions. If required, discharge deposits, as
instructed.
- Should booster batteries be used, remember to connect

both ends of the booster cables in the proper manner (+)
with (+) and (-) with (-). Avoid short-circuits of the terminals. Follow thoroughly the instructions of this Manual.
- Before any intervention, make sure that the main switch
is OFF.
- BATTERY GAS IS HIGHLY FLAMMABLE. Leave battery
box open to improve ventilation when recharging batteries. Never check charge by placing metal objects across
the posts. Keep sparks or open flames away from batteries. Do not smoke near battery to guard against the
possibility of causing an explosion.
STARTING
- Do not run the engine in closed areas without proper
ventilation to remove deadly exhaust fumes.
- Before any intervention, make sure that there are no fuel

or electrolyte leakages; eliminate them before proceeding with further work. When recharging batteries in
closed ambients, make sure that there is appropriate
ventilation to prevent possible accidental explosions
due to the accumulation of gases generated during the
recharge.
- Do not place head, body, limbs, feet, hands or fingers,

near rotating fans or belts. Be especially alert near
pusher fans.
ENGINE
- Loosen the radiator cap very slowly, to release pressure
from the system, before removing it. All coolant level topups must be performed with engine OFF.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
- Avoid that flammable materials touch exhaust parts.

Should this be possible, provide the necessary protections.
- Fluid escaping under pressure from a very small hole

can be almost invisible and can have sufficient force to
penetrate the skin. Use a piece of cardboard or wood to
search for suspected pressure leaks. DO NOT USE
VIII
SAFETY RULES
HANDS. If injured by escaping fluid, see a doctor at once.
Serious infection or reaction can develop if proper medical treatment is not administered immediately.
- In case equipment on the machine must be operated by

hydraulic systems, remember to proceed only after seating in the operator's compartment. Make sure that there
are no persons in the operating area of the machine.
Alert people before operating using the horn and by
voice. Move the equipment very carefully.
- Stop the engine and release all pressures in the system

before removing panels, housings, plugs or covers.
- In case pressures must be measured, use instruments
of adequate capacity. Always follow the recommended
procedures.
- Do not use machine to transport loose objects, unless

proper devices for this purpose are provided.
- Clutches and brakes of this machine and eventual
auxiliary equipment and attachments (such as operating cylinder or winches control valves) must always be
properly adjusted in accordance with the instructions
provided by the Manuals of the Manufacturer.
- Never perform adjustments with engine running, except
when called for by the above instructions.
TOOLS
- Keep head, body, limbs, feet, fingers or hands away from
bucket, blade or ripper when in raised position.
When changing work shift, check that wheel or rim

securing screws and brackets are not loosen; if necessary, retighten to the prescribed torque.
Prior to any intervention, install all safety devices according to current rules and regulations.
WARNING
On machines having hydraulically, mechanically, and/or cable controlled equipment (such as shovels,
loaders, dozers, excavators etc.) be certain the equipment is lowered to the ground before servicing,
adjusting and/or repairing. If it is necessary to have the hydraulically, mechanically, and/or cable controlled equipment partially or fully raised to gain access to certain items, be sure the equipment is suitably
supported by means other than the hydraulic lift cylinders, cable and/or mechanical devices used for
controlling the equipment.
IX
SAFETY RULES
SAFETY RULES FOR SEALS

VITON SEALS (FLUOROELASTOMER)
Seals, especially VITON O-Rings, (normally coloured red)

are used in systems operating at high temperatures, since
this materials resists the effects of heat. However, in the
event this material is subject to heat exceeding 315 C (599
F) (in practice, only in case of fire or when using welding
flames) fluoridic acid is generated. This acid is highly
corrosive and could cause severe burns, if in contact
with the skin.
Every time it is necessary to intervene on components
equipped with VITON rings, for which an exposure to
excessive temperatures is suspected, the following procedures must be applied:
black and tacky;

2) identify the type of material of the seals, if they are
VITON, performing the test illustrated below, on the
spare parts;
3) in case it is verified, or there is a reasonable doubt that
the components are made of VITON, the contaminated
area MUST be decontaminated before proceeding with
further operations;
4) wear neoprene rubber or PVC gloves and protection
goggles or face screen, and wash accurately the contaminated zone with a solution of hydraulic lime (found
at building stores) and water, so that a milky liquid is
obtained. Rinse carefully with steam or running water;
5) dispose of the materials removed and the protective
gloves in a safe manner, without burning them.
1) inspect visually, without touching them, all seals showing signs of damage due to high temperature. They look
TEST FOR THE DISCRIMINATION OF RUBBER (BUNA N) MATERIALS

AND "VITON" (FLUOROELASTOMER) MATERIAL
WATER
WATER
TRICHLOROETHYLENE
"VITON"
FLUOROELASTOMER
NITRILIC/BUNA N RUBBER
FLOATS
SINKS

D350
GENERALITIES
D350
DOZERS
TABLE OF TECHNICAL DATA
Carefully read personal and machine SAFETY PRECAUTIONS at the beginning of this Manual
0-1
0 -2
GENERALITIES
D350

D350
GENERALITIES
0-3
IDENTIFICATION DATA
A. Engine data plate
The data plate can be seen opening the left side panel
of the engine compartment, containing the identification data and other important information on the engine.
1. Serial number of the engine
(E.S.N. Engine Serial Number Cummins)
1
Engine No.
Family
35048946
FR
Date of Mfg.
11/01
QSM11-C
Ref. No.
S052008
Model
Advert. Power HP/KW
at
330/246 2100
RPM
650 - 1000 NOx FEL

PM FEL
661/10.8
Idle Speed RPM

CID/L
1CEXLO661AAC
Fuel rate at Advert. Power
Inj. Set IN/mm
Valve Lash Cold IN/mm
155
mm 3
stroke
CPL
.025 LASH
.025 / .356
Inj. Timing
Int.
KV
2828
.027/.686
m
Cu
s
min
2001
Warranty Start Date
Exh.
Cummins Engine Company, Inc.

Assembled in the U.S.A.
IMPORTANT ENGINE INFORMATION :

This engine conforms to
U.S. EPA and California Tier 2 and EU
Stage II regulations for heavy
duty nonroad compression ignition diesel cycle
engines as applicable.
THIS ENGINE IS CERTIFIED TO
OPERATE ON DIESEL FUEL.
4060493
WARNING; Injury may result and warranty is voided if

fuel rate, RPM, or altitudes exceed published maximum
values for this model and application.
D350M0002
D350R0411
B. Machine identification plate

The identification plate contains the main data of the
machine and it is visible under the operator's seat.
D350M0134
D350R0464
C. Marking and serial number of frame

The MARKING of the machine is seen on the left
side of the transmission housing.
In the lower side it is readable:
- manufacturer code (the first 3 digits) FNH;
- the machine code 35000;
- check letter "N";
- year of production "5" for 2005;
- manufacturing plant H (Lecce Plant);
- product line "C" (Dozer);
- the serial number (last 5 digits).
MODEL
D350
MARKING
* FNH35000N5HC30001 *
D350M0005
37 (9.8)
675 (178.3)
35 (9.2)
70 (18.5)
175 (46.2)
145 (38.3)
51 (13.5)
-
Cooling system
Fuel tank
Engine
Torque converter - Transmiss.
Steering / brakes
transmission housing
Hydraulic system
Final drives (each)
Various grease fittings
AMBRA - MG2
AMBRA - Hypoide 90
HI-TECH 46
AMBRA - Super Gold
AMBRA - Hydropower
AMBRA - Super Gold
AMBRA - Agrifl
Fluids and lubricants
NLGI2 Consistency
SAE 80W - 90
ISO 46
SAE 10W - 30
SAE 15W - 40
API GL5 or
MIL-L-2105
DIN 51524 PART - 1

DIN 51524 PART - 2
ISO VG 46
API CF-4/SG or
CCMC D4 or
MIL-L-2104 E
ATF Type A Suffix A
API CF-4/SG or
CCMC D4 or
MIL-L-2104 E
DIESEL FUEL ASTM No. 2D

Grade TT of reputable quality and make
50 -50 mixture of water and antifreeze. The mixture has anti-oxidation, anti-corrosion, anti-scaling,
anti-foaming properties and antifreezing down to -35 C (-31 F).
International
classification
Periodic change
Half the normal interval
One quarter the normal interval
Up to 0.5 % S
from 0.5 to 1 %
Over 1 %
If the content of sulphur exceeds 0.5%, change the

engine oil as follows:
All season
All season
-20 to 50 C (5 to 104 F)
-25 to 20 C (-13 to 68 F)
-15 to 40 C (5 to 104 F)
All season
-25 to 20 C (-13 to 68 F)
SAE 10W - 30
SAE 10W
-15 to 40 C (5 to 104 F)
Down to - 35 C
(- 31 F)
Ambient temperature
of reference
SAE 15W - 40
Agrifl mixed 50%

with water ensures
anti-freezing down
to - 35 C (-31 F)
VISCOSITY
GRADE
0 -4
Note: The quantities of fluids indicated are the ones required for periodic changes.
Q.TY
Litres (gal.)
ITEM
TABLE OF CAPACITIES
GENERALITIES
D350

D350
GENERALITIES
0-5
MAIN DIMENSIONS D350
3375
(132.9)
(*)
3500
(137.8)
520 (20.5)
3243 (127.7)
2134 (84)
2744 (108)
5282 (207.9)
8234 (324.2)
(*) 610 mm (24 in) shoes or 711 mm (28 in) shoes
Blade
width
mm (in)
Blade
height
mm (in)
Semi-U (HSU)
3975 (156.5)
1700 (66.9)
Angolable (HA)
4620 (181.9)
Full-U (HU)
4295 (169.1)
BLADE TYPE
Blade
capacity
m3 (ft3)
Tilt
D350M0006
Pitch
Digging
depth
mm (in)
Blade lifting
from ground
mm (in)
9.1 (321.3) 900 (35.4)
13
600 (23.6)
1220 (48)
1145 (45.1)
4.5 (158.9) 470 (18.5)
10
685 (26.9)
1140 (44.9)
1650 (64.9)
11.4 (402.6) 975 (38.4)
13
600 (23.6)
1220 (48)
mm (in)
Maximum angle: 25.

GENERALITIES
0 -6
D350
SPECIFICATIONS D350
SPECIFICATIONS
DATA
Max. speeds
FORWARD
1 st
Km/h (mph)
3.8 (2.4)
nd
Km/h (mph)
6.1 (3.8)
rd
Km/h (mph)
10.3 (6.4)
1 st
Km/h (mph)
4.4 (2.7)
2 nd
Km/h (mph)
7.0 (4.3)
rd
Km/h (mph)
11.4 (7.0)
REVERSE
Max Trazione alla Barra

FORWARD
1 st
daN
58172
2 nd
daN
33144
rd
daN
16300
REVERSE
1 st
PERFORMANCES
Km (mile)
48590 (30192.4)
nd
Km (mile)
27515 (17097.0)
3rd
Km (mile)
13332 (8284.1)
Bearing pressure on ground

Under work conditions
bar (psi)
0.90 (13.0)
Under work conditions + single shank ripper
bar (psi)
0.98 (14.2)
Climbing capacity (FWD)

3
rd
nd
Maximum speed
10%
Km/h (mph)
8.5 (5.3)
30%
Km/h (mph)
4.4 (2.7)
1st 60%
km/h (mph)
2.7 (1.7)
Front equipment cycle times (ref. semi-U blade)

Raising time (from ground to max. height)
sec
2.7
Controlled lowering
sec
1.6
Floating
sec
Noise
Inner LwA
dB(A)
83
Outer LwA
dB(A)
118
Outer with sound suppression option
dB(A)
113
Back-up alarm.
SAFETY DEVICES
Left safety lever.

It blocks the equipment, cuts-off the transmission and engages the parking brake.
Right safety lever.
It blocks the equipment, cuts-off the transmission and engages the parking brake.

D350
GENERALITIES
0-7
cont.ed SPECIFICATIONS D350
Engine manufacturer
Cummins
Engine model
QSM11-330/365 HP
mm (in)
125 x 147 (4.9 x 5.8)
lt (gal.)
10.82 (2.8)
Engine type: direct injection, turbocharged,

after-cooled, 4-stroke diesel.
Bore and stroke
Total displacement
Number of cylinders
D350
Net power
kW
HP
nom. @ 2100 rpm max. @1800 rpm nom. @ 2100 rpm max. @1800 rpm
DIN 6270
224
257
300
345
SAE J1349
221
253
296
339
ISO9249
223
255
299
342
EEC 80/1269
224
257
300
345
Max. torque
daNm (lb.ft.)
Fuel consumption (MAX. POWER)
KG/h (lb/h)
167.4 (1234.2)
50 (110.2)
Starting capacity
ENGINE
AND
ACCESSORIES
Standard configuration
C (F)
-12 (10)
With cold starting system
C (F)
-17 (1.4)
Electrical system
System voltage
Volt
Capacity of starter motor
kW (HP)
Capacity of alternator
24
9.5 (12.7)
Amp
70
Radiator
Dimension of transmission heat exchanger
2
Dimension of core (water) dm 64.4 (6.9 ft )
mm (in) 114 x 1180 x 540 (4.5 x 46.4 x 21.2)
Material of core
brass
No of tube rows
Fin pitch
Cap pressure
mm (in)
3.5 (0.1)
bar (psi)
1.0 (14.5)
mm (in)
600 (23.6)
Air/air radiator
Fan diameter
No. of tubes
Pitch
Radiator surface
Operating pressure
Water pump flow (at normal speed)
37
mm (in)
2.8 (0.1)
42.5 (4.6)
dm (ft )
bar (psi)
lt/min (gpm)
2 (29)
438 (115.7)

GENERALITIES
0 -8
D350
Sound suppressed fan (blowing)/fan

(sucking)
Fan diameter
mm (in)
Blade angle pitch
deg
Number of blades
TRUFLO
TECNOVENT
1066.8 (42)
1067 (42)
45
30
Dimension of blade
mm (in)
Drive ratio (fan/engine)
12
203 x 2.3 x 375

(7.9 x 0.1 x 14.8)
0.67 : 1
0.57 : 1
Air cleaner
Brand
Donaldson
Type
ENGINE
AND
ACCESSORIES
FRG15-0092
Dry type, two stages with safety element

and centrifugal separator.
Setting of clogging indicator
bar (in H 2O)
0.06 (25)
Initial clogging (@ 15 cum /min, 529.7 ft3/min) Cummins limit: 0.04 bar (15 in H2O)
bar (in H2O)
0.02 (10.8)
Dust containment capacity (@ 13 cum /min, 459.1 ft /min) Cummins limit : 25 gr./CFM
gr/CFM
Dimensions
19.2
mm (in)
381 (15)
Rain protected pre-filter
Donaldson
Silencer
Donaldson
Horizontal type. Under hood.

Dimensions
mm (in)
275 x 813 (10.8 x 32)
Max. counter-pressure (Cummins limit: 76 mmHg, 1.5 psi) mmHg (psi)

FUEL TANK
TORQUE
CONVERTER
AND
HOUSING
TRANSMISSION
40 (0.8)
Total volume
lt (gal.)
675 (178.3)
Specifications of filler cap
lt (gal.)
670 (176.9)
Brand:
Twin disc
Model:
8F-1600 MS-480
Type:
Single stage, dual phase.
Stall ratio
Nominal diameter
mm (in)
Setting of pressure relief valve delivery @ 10 lt/min (2.6 gpm)bar (psi)

Transmission pump nominal flow @ 16 bar
2.3 : 1
406.4 (16.0)
10 to 11 (0.19 to 0.21)
lt/min (gpm)
101 (26.7)
Transmission scavenge @ 1 bar (14.5 psi)
lt/min (gpm)
194 (51.2)
Tc pump nominal flow @ 3.5 bar (50.8 psi)
lt/min (gpm)
89 (23.5)
Tc scavenge pump @ 1 bar (14.5 psi)
lt/min (gpm)
37 (9.8)
Type:
POWER SHIFT
Model:
TM400
Brand:
CNH
Specifications:
3+3 speeds, speed and direction modulating valves

Electronic control + automatic mode
Integrated CPU and TM control.

D350
GENERALITIES
0-9
PTO capacity
Max. torque @ 0 rpm
daNm (lb.ft.)
Max. speed @0 torque
294.3 (17326.5)
rpm
2350
Specifications
Clockwise rotation (from rear of machine) driven by Torque Converter.
Shaft specifications
Number of teeth
24
Module
mm (in)
2.58 (0.1)
Outer diameter
mm (in)
63.68 (2.5)
Filters
Intake:
TRANSMISSION
Metal mesh + magnetic rod (Q.ty 2)
mesh
100
Micron
30 abs.
In-line
Spin-on
By-pass valve setting
bar (psi)
Transmission pressure relief valve setting @ 10 lt/min (2.6 gpm) bar (psi)
Aluminium made oil radiator core
2 (29)
10 to 11 (145 to 159.5)
mm (in) 500 x 1170 x 150 (19.7 x 46 x 5.9)
Controls
Fingertip type, FNR pivoting control, neutral switch.
Safety lever.
Description of auto mode
AS Allows the operator to pre-select the 1st speed in froward and the 2nd in reverse at
direction changes.
PROPELLER
SHAFT
Dimension of shaft
Mechanical 8.5 C (47.3F)
Nominal length
mm (in)
452.2 (17.8)
Gleason type, modular pinion assembly.

BEVEL
GEAR
GROUP
Forced lube pinion bearings.

Ratio:
Module:
STEERING
SYSTEM
D350
23/35
M
10
The machine uses a differential steering system; this consists of a hydraulic pump, a hydraulic
motor, controls, two planetary modules and a steering gear train.
The rear transmission has two power inlets. One from the bevel gear for the speed and
Forward reverse, the other from the motor, to turn.
The steering system is actuated by two "finger tip" potentiometric levers, located on the left
side of the operator's seat.
The levers send an electric signal to the microprocessor controlling the two proportional
solenoid valves; these valves convert the electric signal into a hydraulic one, piloting the
steering section of the main valve.
This section controls the pump flow to the hydraulic motor that through the steering gear train,
actuates the two planetary modules and the right track chain.

GENERALITIES
0 - 10
D350
The open hydrostatic circuit includes:

- Main pump
The same of the equipment
(see hydraulic system)
cm3/rev (in3/rev)
190 (11.6)
- Hydraulic motor
Bent axis design, axial pistons, fixed
displacement motor
(with bolt-on movement control valve)
Displacement
cm3/rev (in3/rev)
Max. operating pressure
bar (psi)
180 (10.9)
350 (5076.3)
- Steering control valve.

Closed centre.
This section is included in the implement control valve.
- Steering control.
Electro-Hydraulic control
with two proportional valves.
Integrated CPU for steering and TM control.
- Priority valve.
It provides priority to the steering
over the equipment control.
STEERING
SYSTEM
D350
- Make-up valve.
t provides pressure to both equipment
control pilot valves
and to the proportional solenoid valves
bar (psi)
30 (435.1)
- Oil radiator
Aluminium body
By-pass setting
mm (in)
bar (psi)
865 x 602 x 63 (34 x 23.7 x 2.5)

5 (72.5)
Planetary modules
See "power train" diagram
Gear ratio straight travel conditions
1.52
244
Steering line
See "power train" diagram.
Gear ratio.
Hydraulic motor to sprocket
Performance
Min. steering radius
m (ft)
2.0 (6.6)
Max. differ. track chain speed, no load condition Km/h (mph)
2.8 (1.7)
Max. differ. track chain torque at 350 bar (5076.3)
KNm
124
The steering system is controlled by two levers installed on the left side of the operators seat.
When the lever is moved, a modular pressure is forwarded through the controller and the
proportional solenoid valves to the steering control valve.
The service brakes system is negatively controlled by the brake pedal or when pulling the two
levers at the same time.
The actuation of the pedal cuts with a modulation the backpressure of the brake piston so that
the springs apply a braking load.

D350
GENERALITIES
0 - 11
Steering/brakes filters
Suction, spin-on
Micron
150
Micron
25
In-line filters
Spin-on
bar (psi)
3.44 (49.9)
Multiple-disc, spring actuated,

released by oil, oil-cooled
No. of clutch discs
BRAKES
Outer diameter
mm (in)
407.98 (16.1)
Inner diameter
mm (in)
320.92 (12.6)
Total friction area
cm (in )
8046 (1247.1)
Friction material
No. of springs
16
Max. braking torque
daN
Steering pump flow
lt/min (gpm)
System pressure
STEERING/BRAKES
COMPARTMENT
bar (psi)
2116
350 (5076.3)
Welded housing.
Countershaft single reduction,
plus one planetary reduction.
FINAL
DRIVE
Total ratio
15.6
27
Segments. 3 Elements
SPROCKET
No. of teeth
Pitch diameter
mm (in)
936.62 (36.9)
mm (in)
215.9 (8.5)
Tubular, torsion
and flexion resistant fabricated structure.
TRACK
FRAME
Sealed track tensioner compartment.

Link pitch
No. of links
Link height
mm (in)
Shoe height
Weight of shoes per metre
mm (in)
Kg/m (lb/m)
44
150 (5.9)
84 (3.3)
28.4 (62.6)
Width of standard shoe
mm (in)
610 (24)
Width of optional shoes
mm (in)
711 (28)
UNDERCARRIAGE
No. of track rollers (2 twin rim and 5 single rim)
Sequence from sprocket
SF-DF-SF-SF
-DF-SF-SF
Diameter of rollers
No. of support rollers
mm (in)
242 (9.5)
Roller diameter (support)
mm (in)
191 (7.5)
Idler diameter
mm (in)
813 (32)

GENERALITIES
0 - 12
D350
Sliding idler guides with replaceable wear strips.

Grease piston to track adjuster.
Single spring.
TRACK TENSION
SYSTEM
Nominal load of spring assembly
daN
28910
Outside diameter of spring
mm (in)
285 (11.2)
Diameter of wire
mm (in)
63.5 (2.5)
Diameter of grease piston
mm (in)
101.5 (4.0)
Setting of relief valve
KPa (psi)
68.95 (10.0)
Pivot shaft (near sprocket) and fixed frond cross-member.

TRACK
SUSPENSION
SYSTEM
Al joints permanently lubricated

Pivot shaft diameter
mm (in)
189 (7.4) - 149 (5.9)
Thickness of crossbar
mm (in)
125 (4.9)
Oscillation stroke (track)

Stroke of idler (total)
deg
mm (in)
1030'
480 (18.9)
Fabricated structure with two boxed beams, centrally connected by the suspension crossmember support, frontally to the radiator and hood support and at the rear to the transmission
housing.
MAIN
FRAME
Frame length
mm (in)
1314 (51.7)
Width of beam
mm (in)
114.3 (4.5)
Pin diameter
mm (in)
50.8 (2.0)
Fork opening
mm (in)
95 (3.7)
Bolted to rear transmission housing.

TOWING
HOOK
Load sensing system, flow partition with piloted variable displacement pump.
System pressure
Setting of dual pressure relief
valve (equipment/steering)
bar (psi)
200/350 (2900.7/5076.3)
Pressure of piloting line
bar (psi)
30 to 32 (435.1 to 464.1)
Main pump: axial pistons

HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM
variable displacement
Regulators:
Constant power control
kW (HP)
90 kW@ 1950 rpm

(120.7 HP@ 1950 rpm
CUT-OFF pressure
bar (psi)
350 (5076.3)
Load sensing
Brand
bar (psi)
20 to 21 (290.1 to 304.6)
Rexroth
Model
max. displacement
Pump speed at engine max. speed
Max. pump flow
A11VL0 190 LRS/11

cc/rev
rpm
l/min (gpm)
192.7
2003
386 (101.9)

D350
GENERALITIES
0 - 13
Min displacement
Stand-by pressure
cc/rev
bar (psi)
15
33 to 37 (478.6 to 536.6)
Equipment control valve:

Piloted, Closed centre, flow partition,
with discharge valve
4-spool
Brand
Rexroth
Model
4M7 - 22
Nominal dimensions
mm (in)
1st spool
Ripper (lift, lowering)
at max. flow
22 (0.8)
l/min (gpm)
350 (92.5)
l/min (gpm)
100 (26.4)
l/min (gpm)
350 (92.5)
nd
2 spool
Blade tilt (left, right) at max. flow
rd
3 spool
Blade (lift, lowering,
floating w/detent)
th
4 spool
Steering motor
Pilot valve
HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM
Blade and tilt

Brand
Rexroth
Model
5THF6Z97
Auxiliary lever
Single lever for ripper spool
Brand
Rexroth
Model
2TH6-L97
Cylinders:
Blade q.ty 2 cylinders
Bore
mm (in)
120 (4.7)
Rod diameter
mm (in)
70 (2.8)
Stroke
mm (in)
1255 (49.4)
Bore
mm (in)
180 (7.1)
Rod diameter
mm (in)
90 (3.5)
Stroke
mm (in)
180 (7.1)
Bore
mm (in)
180 (7.1)
Rod diameter
mm (in)
90 (3.5)
Stroke
mm (in)
533 (20.9)
Tilt (bulldozer blade)
Ripper (lift) q.ty 2 cylinders

GENERALITIES
0 - 14
D350
Ripper (pitch) q.ty 2 cylinders

Bore
mm (in)
160 (6.3)
Rod diameter
mm (in)
80 (3.1)
Stroke
mm (in)
622 (24.5)
l (gal.)
205 (54.1)
Hydraulic tank
HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM
Total capacity of tank

Oil tank volume
l (gal.)
145 (38.3)
Capacity of oil circuit
l (gal.)
310 (81.9)
Return filter
Filtering capacity
micron (absolute)

Surface
25
mPa (psi)
200 to 15 (29007 to 2175.6)
7392 (1145.8)
cm (in )
Canopy rops fops:

Standard with 2-beam rigid structure.
Cab:
Fully enclosed, modular, fops cab.
Two doors, two side windows, 4 resilient supports.
Description of cab arrangement
Left console:
With fully adjustable armrest (satellite) including the Steering and Transmission controls.
The console holds: Auto T/M switches, left safety lever, Conditioning dashboard.
Right console:
Support for hydraulic pilot valve and 3rd function lever, adjustable armrest, starter key, horn,
ashtray.
DRIVER'S
COMPARTMENT
Front control module:

Monitor, control switches, manual throttle (RH).
Pedal support:
Brake central pedal, decelerator pedal (RH) footrest (2).
Cab accessories:
Rear mirror.
Front wiper, door window wipers.
Rear window wiper.
Ashtray and cigarette lighter.
Ceiling light (2).
Radio FM-AM (12 Volt).
Drink holder.
Fridge 12 Volt socket.
No. of air ducts
Seat
Brand
Bostrom

D350
GENERALITIES
0 - 15
Model
Viking 301K
Adjustment range
mm (in)
150 (5.9)
Adjustment height
mm (in)
100 (3.9)
Other features
Cloth lining, with safety belt and connections
Heater group
Heating capacity (air inlet temp. - 10 C - 14 F;
air flow 600 cum/h, water inlet temp. 85 C - 185 F,
water flow 800l/h, 211.3 gal./h)
kW (HP)
10.4 (13.9)
Filter:
Glass paper, inorganic fibre
Efficiency
Capacity
Dimensions
> 65
micron
cm2 (in2)
0.3
19600 (3038)
Re-circulation percentage:
Q.ty of fans (type: SPAL 006-839-22 3 speed-total free flow 1160 cum/h)
No. of fan speeds
Max. cab airflow

(total air free flow 1160 cum/h)
Max. pressurisation
DRIVER'S
COMPARTMENT
m3/h (ft3/h)
500 (17657.3)
Pa (psi)
20 (0.003)
Air conditioner group

Max. gas charge
gr (lb)
Cooling capacity (air inlet temperature + 30C-86 F,

air flow 600 cum/h) air humidity 55%)
kW (HP)
Re-circulation percentage
1600 (3.5)
6 (8.0)
na
Compressor
Brand
Sanden
Model
SD7H1SMD7948
Total displacement (max. allowable speed 700 rpm) cuc/rev

Setting of thermostat valve
160
+1C (33.8F) open: setting of
diff. temperature 3.5C (38.3F)
Pressure switch (2 lever model):

LOWER LEVER: open 2 bar (29 psi), closed 2.1 bar (30.4 psi)
LOWER LEVER: open 25 bar (362 psi), closed 19 bar (275.5 psi).
Expansion valve
2 TON - 6000kcal/h
Condenser
Dimensions (front surface)
no. of fans (model SPAL VA14-BP7/C-34A)
Fan diameter
Fan dimensions
mm (in)
690 x 200 (27.2 x 7.9)
mm (in)
kW (HP)

GENERALITIES
0 - 16
D350
Alternator
Brand
Delco-Remy
Model
22SI 350/355
Capacity
24V - 70A
Starter motor
Brand
Delco-Remy
Model
42MT - TYP0400
Capacity
24V - 9.5 KW (12.7 HP)
Batteries
No. of elements
Connections
series
Brand
Capacity
Discharge
Multi-brand,
maintenance free
Ah
180 - 12V
770
Lighting system
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
No. of elements
2 front lights + 2 side work lights
W (HP)
60 (0.08)
2 rear work lights
W (HP)
60 (0.08)
Other main components

Main switch
Link fuses
manual
A
Fuse boxes
50 & 80
2 x 11 fuses
4-position starter key

Dashboard
24 V
Engine revolution counter
digital
Hourmeter
digital
Fuel level
level indicator
Coolant temperature
Digital temperature gauge
Transmission/steering display
digital
Steering valve (q.ty 2)
proportional
Transmission control solenoids (q.ty 4)
on-off
Reverse signal
P.I. 109 dB(A)-1000Hz
Transmission and Steering electronic control unit

BULLDOZER
EQUIPMENT
MC electronic
Rexroth
Two push beams hinged to the track frame by ball joint. hydraulic tilt adjustment and mechanical
pitch. Equistatic compensator.
Pins
Diameter
mm (in)
137.7 to 137.9 (5.3 to 5.4)

D350
GENERALITIES
0 - 17
Push beams
Beam height
mm (in)
305 to 3642 (12 to 143.4)
Diameter of front ball joint
mm (in)
138 (5.4)
mm (in)
3850 (151.6)
Width (tip of corner bits)
mm (in)
3975 (156.5)
Height
mm (in)
1700 (66.9)
m3 (ft3)
9.1 (321.4)
Max. lift
mm (in)
1220 (48)
Digging depth
mm (in)
600 (23.6)
Max. tilt
mm (in)
900 (35.4)
HSU blade:
Width (blade)
Nominal capacity
Max pitch
deg
6 30'
mm (in)
25 (0.9)
Wear components:
Two corner bits + two reversible cutting edges
BULLDOZER
EQUIPMENT
Thickness of cutting edges

Break-up force (lift cylinders)
daN
32380
Break-up force (tilt cylinder)
daN
49850
Full-U, HU blade:
Width (blade)
mm (in)
4260 (167.7)
mm (in)
4292 (168.9)
Height
mm (in)
1650 (64.9)
Nominal capacity
m (ft )
11.35 (400.8)
Max. raising
mm (in)
1220 (48)
Penetration into the ground
mm (in)
600 (23.6)
Max. tilt
mm (in)
980 (38.6)
Max. pitch
deg
6 30'
mm (in)
25 (0.9)
Wear components:
Two corner bits + three reversible cutting edges
daN
32380
daN
49850
C-frame, hinged to track frame by ball trunnions

Hydraulic tilt adjustment and mechanically
adjusted pitch.
ANGLEDOZER
EQUIPMENT
Side guides (with 711 mm, 28 in shoes)

Height of C-frame
Diameter of front ball trunnion
mm (in)
170 (6.7)
mm (in)
4350 (171.2)
Angledozer blade
Width (blade)

GENERALITIES
0 - 18
D350
mm (in)
4622 (181.9)
Height
mm (in)
1143 (45)
Nominal capacity
ANGLEDOZER
EQUIPMENT
m (ft )
4,53 (159.9)
Max. lift
mm (in)
1140 (44.9)
Digging depth
mm (in)
685 (26.9)
Max. tilt
mm (in)
470 (18.5)
Tilt
deg
25
Max pitch
deg
Two corner bits + three reversible cutting edges

mm (in)
25.4 (1)
daN
32380
daN
39388
Model
PVD-350
Parallelogram type, actuated by four double stroke cylinders,

equipped with a three position single semi-curve shank with
interchangeable tip
SINGLE
SHANK RIPPER
Mass
kg (lb)
2960 (6525.7)
Mass of shank
kg (lb)
425 (936.9)
Dimensions
mm (in) 355 x 90 x 2100 (13.9 x 3.5 x 82.7)
Ground clearance under shank bar

with ripper lowered
mm (in)
Ground clearance under shank bar

with ripper lifted
cyl. extended
cyl. retracted
position 1
mm (in)
124 (4.9)
584 (23)
position 2
mm (in)
381 (15)
737 (29.1)
position 3
mm (in)
630 (24.8)
1020 (40.1)
Break-up force
Penetration force
daN
daN
22000
14000
Ripping depth
mm (in)
1194 (47)
Ripping width
mm (in)
90 (3.5)
34 (8.9)
Increment of hydraulic oil

D350
GENERALITIES
0 - 19
TECHNICAL DATA
ENGINE
Net power at flywheel at 2100 rpm (ISO 9249)
kW (HP)
299 HP/223 kW
Net power at flywheel at 1800 rpm (ISO 9249)
kW (HP)
342 HP/255 kW
Low idle speed
rpm
800 to 900
High idle speed
rpm
2300 to 2350
Equipment stall
rpm
2180 to 2280
Converter/transmission stall
rpm
1730 to 1830
Total stall
rpm
1528 to 1628
Lubrication
At low idle (minimum allowed)
bar (psi)
0.69 (10)
At max. idle (minimum allowed)
bar (psi)
1.9 (27.6)
By-pass filter pressure
bar (psi)
6.2 (89.9)
Thermostat opening temperature
C (F)
81 to 83 (177.8 to 181.4)
Fully open thermostat opening pressure
C (F)
92 (197.6)
Injector pressure
bar (psi)
345 to 1900 (5003 to 27557.2)
bar (psi)
16 (232.1)
Converter safety pressure
bar (psi)
10 to 11 (145 to 159.5)
Lubrication oil pressure relief valve
bar (psi)
2 to 3,5 (29 to 50.8)
Main pressure
bar (psi)
14 to 16 (203.1 to 232.1)
First speed pressure
bar (psi)
14 to 16 (203.1 to 232.1)
Second speed pressure
bar (psi)
14 to 16 (203.1 to 232.1)
Third speed pressure
bar (psi)
14 to 16 (203.1 to 232.1)
Fourth speed pressure
bar (psi)
14 to 16 (203.1 to 232.1)
Reverse pressure
bar (psi)
14 to 16 (203.1 to 232.1)
Main pressure relief valve
bar (psi)
28 to 32 (406.1 to 464.1)
Safety valve pressure
bar (psi)
45 (652.7)
Pressure regulated by brake pedal valve
bar (psi)
18 to 22 (261.1 to 319.1)
Piloting pressure
bar (psi)
28 to 32 (406.1 to 464.1)
TRANSMISSION
Main pressure relief valve
BRAKE SYSTEM
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (accessories/steering)

Max. pressure (equipment/steering)
bar (psi)
200/350 (2900.7/5076.3)
Pressure in neutral
bar (psi)
28 to 32 (406.1 to 464.1)
Pressure in float
bar (psi)
28 to 32 (406.1 to 464.1)
Delta LS
bar (psi)
20 to 21 (290.1 to 304.6)
Float engagement pressure
bar (psi)
25 (362.6)
Unloading valve pressure (@ 10 l/min, 2.6)
bar (psi)
28 to 32 (406.1 to 464.1)
bar (psi)
689 (9993.1)
UNDERCARRIAGE
Discharge valve pressure

GENERALITIES
0 - 20
D350
LIST OF WEIGHTS OF MAIN SERVICE COMPONENTS

KG (LB)
Cummins engine QSM11
1160 (2557.4)
Engine complete with torque converter (w/ pumps)
1450 (3196.7)
Intercooler group
52 (114.6)
Main pump
110 (242.5)
Brake pump
10 (22)
Transmission & converter pump
50 (110.2)
Radiator assembly (empty)
233 (513.7)
Universal joint
23 (50.7)
Transmission assembly
725 (1598.3)
Bevel gear set
57.5 (126.8)
Steering module (each)
235 (518.1)
Hydraulic motor
70 (154.3)
Final drive assembly (each)

Pivot shaft
1210 (2667.6)
150 (330.7)
Swing bar
390 (859.8)
Track chain assembly (610 mm, 24 in shoes, 44 elements)
2783 (6135.4)
Track chain assembly (711 mm, 28 in shoes, 44 elements)
3022 (6662.4)
Shoes (610 mm, 24 in each)

Shoes (711 mm, 28 in each)
Track frame assembly
Track roller (each)
32 (70.5)
37.6 (82.9)
4000 (8818.5)
88/96 (194/211.6)
Support roller (each)
51 (112.4)
Idler assembly
308 (679)
Fuel tank (empty)
408 (899.5)
Hydraulic tank
228 (502.6)
Battery (each)
50 (110.2)
Rops canopy
596 (1313.9)
Operator compartment (cab)
450 (992.1)
Canopy (rops)
200 (440.9)
Rear engine hood support
108 (238.1)
Engine hood
37 (81.6)
Front grill assembly
80 (176.4)
Hydraulic control valve
106 (233.7)
Lift cylinder (each)
139 (306.4)
Tilt cylinder
170 (374.8)
Semi-U blade (w/equistatic)
3200 (7054.8)
Push beam and rod (each)
1100 (2425.1)
HA angle blade
1660 (3659.7)
C-frame
1628 (3589.1)
Single shank ripper assembly (without tool)
2960 (6525.7)
Ripper tool
425 (936.9)
Ripper cylinder
140 (308.6)
Main frame (with lower guards)
5040 (11111.3)

D350
GENERALITIES
0 - 21
STABILITY
POSITION OF THE CENTRE OF GRAVITY D350 PS
In transportation condition
Note The centre of gravity depends upon the position of the equipment.
MACHINE W/ BLADE & RIPPER
LG mm (in) HG mm (in)
W/ blade and ripper on the ground
1680 (66.1)1960 (37.8)
W/ blade on ground and ripper

atmax. height
1665 (65.5)1990 (38.9)
W/ blade at max. height and ripper

on ground
1670 (65.7) 1095 (43.1)
W/blade at max. height and ripper

at max. height
1660 (65.3) 1115 (43.9)
WARNING
The machine, as delivered by the plant, is not intended for any other application and, in particular,
should not be considered for use as a mean for
hooking, lifting or moving suspended loads.
Any different usage, therefore, MUST BE AVOIDED,
unless the machine has been originally provided,
by the FK Organisation, with special equipment
and particular instructions for specific applications.
MACHINE W/ BLADE ONLY

Blade on the ground
1940 (76.4)1880 (34.6)
Blade at max. height
1910 (75.2) 1015 (39.9)
MACHINE W/OUT BLADE

AND W/OUT RIPPER
1465 (57.7) 1000 (39.4)
Note - LG = Horizontal distance from sprocket C/L

HG = Ground clearance
HG
LG
D350M0007

GENERALITIES
0 - 22
D350
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
INSTALLATION OF SEALS
FOR ROTATING SHAFTS
Osservate le seguenti avvertenze:
- prior to installation, keep the seals half an hour
dipped into the same oil they are going to seal;
- clean accurately the shaft and make sure that its
working surface is undamaged;
- direct the sealing lip towards the fluid; in case of an
hydro dynamic lip, the grooves must be oriented
so that the rotating direction of the shaft, tend to
return the oil inside the seal;
- smear the sealing lip with a film of lubricant (oil is
preferred to grease);
- install the seal into its seat by pressing it or using a
punch with a flat contact face; absolutely avoid
hammering it;
- when pressing the seal, make sure that it is entered
perpendicularly to its seat and once the pressing is
over, make sure, when requested, that is seated
against the shoulder;
- in order to avoid damaging the sealing seat with
the shaft, it is recommended, during the installation
of the two parts, to insert an appropriate seal.
INSTALLATION OF O-RINGS
Lubricate the seals before placing them into the
relevant seats so as to avoid that, during the
installation, they tend to roll, thus altering their correct
positioning, being furled, causing prejudice to their
sealing function.
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE DISASSEMBLY

AND REASSEMBLY OF GROUPS
The following information, of a general nature, are
intended to facilitate the disassembly and reassembly
of groups.
Consequently, read and heed them when performing
this type of operations.
CLEANING
After disconnecting the electrical system, clean
accurately all the parts to be disassembled, preferably
using steam.
In many repair or service workshops, caustic
compounds are used to eliminate all traces of grease,
dirt, paint or remains of sealing materials etc. from
the parts. These compounds are very useful and
efficient when used correctly; however they can cause
considerable damages to certain components.
Materials such as aluminium, rubber, fibres, sintered
bronze and alloying elements are particularly sensitive
to all highly concentrated caustic compounds.
Some heat exchangers are made with aluminium fins.
To clean internally or outside these parts, the use of
solvents not reacting with aluminium are
recommended.
DISASSEMBLY
It is always recommended, for any intervention on
engines or other assemblies removed form the
machine, that appropriate stands are used.
Make available baskets or containers sufficient to
store all the smaller size parts disassembled. Take
particular care of machined faces of the components,
placing them, after the disassembly, on shelves or
wooden blocks.
When identical parts are disassembled, such as
valves, tappets etc., place them in appropriate
containers to ensure the same mating order when
reassembling.
ASSEMBLY
Clean accurately all the components to be
reassembled, as described by the various chapters
of the Manual.
The use of the proper special tools shown in the Manual
is recommended.
Note When applying sealing adhesive compounds,

comply with the instructions provided with commercial
products.

D350
GENERALITIES
0 - 23
The manufacturer prescribes, unless differently

specified, the following adhesive compounds:
RHODORSIL CAF 1, or LOCTITE 510.
Whenever possible, press bushes into their correct
position using a press.
In the event it is necessary to use a hammer to install
a bush, use an appropriate punch to avoid damaging
the bush.
Lubricate ball bearings prior to their installation. Lubricate the sealing lip of all seals, prior to their installation.
Whenever possible, install new seals; in particular new
gaskets must be used on engine cylinder heads.
Use screws with the dimensions and grade indicated,
referring to the part number of the Spare Parts Catalogue.
When indicated, safety washers, split pins and locking wires etc. must be used.
Comply with the prescribed tightening torques indicated in the "Tightening torques" section of this
Manual, using an appropriate torque wrench.
Self-locking nuts must be replaced at each disassembly, to ensure a constant good performance against
loosening.
HIGH PRESSURE PIPES, CONNECTIONS,

HOSES AND PIPES
Max = 0,6 mm
D350R0406
Wrong
Correct
This chapter provides correct recommendations and

procedures to be followed during the disassembly of
pipes and relevant connections.
D350R0407
- Keep all internal and external threads clean;

- Remove the plugs just before connecting the pipes
and plug at once all open connections.
- Do not use or reuse semi flanges out of shape more
than 0.6 mm (0.02 in) in the centre (see figure).
- Make sure that the seats of O-rings are undamaged.
Wrong
Correct
- Lubricate all O-Rings.

- Make sure that O-Rings are in place in the relevant
seat.
- Tighten regularly so as to avoid distortions or damages to O-Rings;
D350R0408
0 - 24
GENERALITIES
D350
- Install pipes and support bands letting the latter

slightly loosen (tighten the band only after tightening the connections).
- Make sure that the hoses reach the corresponding
part to be connected to without forcing their position.
- In the event a hose is mounted straight, let enough
space to absorb contractions caused by pressure.
- Hoses must not be rolled (see figure) or touching
one another or touching other parts, especially if
moving.
- Make sure that the dimension of the bands is
appropriate for the outer diameter of the pipe to be
tighten to avoid possible rubbings (see figure).
D350R0409
Wrong
- Do not install bands on small diameter curves, to

avoid that, under pressure, forces are generated in
the pipe (see figure: the dotted lines indicate the
contraction that the hose could be subject to under
the action of the pressure).
Correct
- Make sure that bands are installed in a correct position so that the hose is kept away from obstacles
(see figure).
D350R0410

D350
GENERALITIES
0 - 25
O-RINGS - Field of application

DESIGNATION
BASE ELASTOMER
TEMPERATURE
of OPERATION
(*)
- 40 to 120C
(- 40 to 248F)
NBR
FIELD OF APPLICATION
MINERAL OIL AND GREASE, COOLANTS, FUEL, WATER UP TO 70C

(158F), AIR UP TO 100C (212F)
NITRIL BUTADIENE
- 30 to 125C
(- 22 to 257F)
FLUOROCARBON
(VITON)
FPM
ETHYLENE PROPYLENE
EPDM
MVQ
SILICON
- 40 to 200C
(- 40 to 392F)
- 40 to 150C
(- 40 to 302F)
- 60 to 200C
(- 76 to 392F)
SAME COMPATIBILITY OF NBR 60 "

75 IRHD, BETTER RESISTANCE TO
EXTRUSION, USED ONLY AS STATIC
SEAL
GENERAL FUELS, NON FLAMMABLE

FLUIDS, ACIDS, SOLVENTS, MINERAL OIL
TO BE USED WITH TEMPERATURES
> 100C (212F)
BRAKE FLUID (DOT 3), STEAM, HOT

WATER, SILICON OIL AND GREASE.
WARNING: NOT TO BE USED WITH
MINERAL OIL AND GREASE
AIR, GAS, WATER, HIGH ANILINE

POINT MINERAL OIL, STEAM USED
AS STATIC SEAL ONLY
Note (*) Temperature indicated for static applications, provided as indication only.
O-RING PROPERLY
INSTALLED
O-RING
PRESSURISED
O-RING
EXTRUDED
O-RING
BROKEN

GENERALITIES
0 - 26
D350
TROUBLESHOOTING
GENERALITIES
d) Inspection of the machine
For a fast troubleshooting, we recommend the compliance with the following rules:
After the test described in item c, stop the machine

and perform a visual inspection. Check whether leakages of fluids, loosening of fixtures, breakages or
various deformations etc. occurred.
a) Knowing the machine

It is impossible to research the causes and formula
te a diagnosis of troubles without having a good knowledge of the machine. Thus it is recommended
that the descriptions regarding the arrangement and
the operation of the various groups provided by the
Repair Manuals are carefully read.
e) Diagnosis
Once the trouble is identified. prepare a list of the
possible causes with the help of the suggestions of
the chapter for the group involved and identify the
correct one, using practical tests, starting from the
most probable causes and the easiest tests.
b) Inspection with the operator

Many trouble originate from a bad use or insufficient
maintenance. Check with the operator if the machine
was previously subject to the current trouble and eventual interventions have been performed with appropriate equipment and genuine spare parts. Also,
check the environmental working conditions of the
machine and make sure that current maintenance is
performed.
c) Operating the machine
The best way to ascertain the conditions of the
machine is to test it under real working conditions.
During such test, check:
- the correct operation of the monitoring instrumentation;
- the performance of the machine;
- eventual odours or signs of overheating;
- noises different from normal operation noises; identify their origin and the operating conditions during
which they occur.

D350
GENERALITIES
0 - 27
UNITS OF MEASURE
The units of measure used in this Manual are those
adopted by the International System (I. S.) superseding those previously used by the M.K.S. system.
CLASSIFICATION OF STANDARD COMPONENTS

TO DETERMINE THE TIGHTENING TORQUES
Force:
decanewton (daN) supersedes kilogram

(kg)
Pressure:
bar, supersedes kg/sqcm
Note In case, in the different sections, the tightening torque is not listed, refer to the table "TIGHTENING TORQUES", only after identifying exactly the
component.
Torque:
decanewton x meter (daN - meter) supersedes kg-m
To convert the units of measure, the following table

applies:
The latter is identified by a coded eight digit number,

allowing a complete description of the item.
Example:
Force
Pressure
Torque
multiply
by
to obtain
kg
0.9807
daN
kg/cm2
0.9807
bar
kg m
0.9807
daN m
Note For current repair needs, the following equivalencies can be considered valid:
kg = daN; kg/sqcm = bar; kgm = daNm.
I /
e / f
I - Standard index digit

It is always represented by the digit 1. This number
indicates that the item can be fabricated in different
versions, differing for the material and coating.
a - b - c - d - e - Standard base digit

It is a number always composed of five digits identifying the dimensional specifications of the item
To convert the units of measure of the International

System into an Anglo Saxon system, please refer to
the following table:
multiply
by
to obtain
kg
2.205
Ib
Length
mm
0.03937
in.
Pressure
bar
14,5
p.s.i.
daN m
7.373
lb.ft
l/min
0.2642
gal/min (US)
Temperature
9
9 C + 32
5
Power
kW
1.341
Hp
0.2642
US gal.
Km/h
0.6213
mph
Mass
Torque
Flow
Capacity
Speed
f - Material index digit

This digit indicates the material used fro a defined
item. Its meaning is indicated in the table to follow.
g - Coating index digit

It indicates the coating applied to a defined item.

GENERALITIES
0 - 28
D350
Class of resistance and type of material

Material
index no. (f)
FIAT
R 40
UNI
DIN
SAE
BSI
BNA
D - 4S - 4A
42
R 50
5S - 6S
56
R 80
8G
80
R 100
100
10K
100
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Copper
Copper
Copper
Copper
Copper
Copper
Free for other metal materials
NOTICES
- Lubricate with engine oil the fixtures up to diameter
24, with tallow for larger diameters.
- The tolerance on tightening torques is 5%.
- The strength classes R80, R100, R120, must be
intended as follows:
10.9 supersedes R 100

12.9
"
R 120
10
supersedes R 80
12
supersedes R 100
for screws
for nuts
CDT=cadmium plated;FOSF=phosphatised;ZNT=
zinc plated.

D350
GENERALITIES
0 - 29
TABLE OF TIGHTENING TORQUES

In the event, the tightening torque of bolts and nuts is not specifically indicated in the single sections, the same
can be found in the table listed here below:
Diameter
and pitch
mm
NUTS (ZNT)
SCREWS (ZNT / DEIDR)
Class of strength: 10 (R 80)
Class of strength: 10.9 (R 100)
normal
low type
with polyamaide ring
normal
daNm (lb.ft.) daNm (lb.ft.) daNm (lb.ft.)
low type
daNm (lb.ft.)
Diameter
and pitch
mm
normal
ZNT
autoblocc.
ZNT
daNm (lb.ft.) daNm (lb.ft.)
M6 x 1
1.3 (9.6)
3.2 (23.6)
M8 x 1.25
1.3 (9.6)
3.5 (25.8)
8.2 (60.4)
6.2 (45.7)
M10 x 1.25
7.1 (52.3)
7.9 (58.2)
5 (36.8)
7.7 (56.8)
6 (44.2)
M10 x 1.5
6.5 (47.9)
7 (51.6)
13 (95.8)
8.7 (64.1)
14.5 (106.9)
10.2 (75.2)
M12 x 1.25
12.7 (93.6) 13.9 (102.5)
M12 x 1.75
11 (81.1)
8.1 (59.7)
12.9 (95.1)
9.6 (70.8)
M12 x 1.75
11 (81.1)
12 (88.5)
M14 x 1.5
19.5 (143.8)
13 (95.8)
21.6 (159.2)
15 (110.6)
M14 x 1.5
20 (147.5)
22 (162.2)
M14 x 2
18 (132.7)
12.5 (92.2)
20 (147.5)
14.6 (107.6)
M14 x 2
18 (132.7)
19 (140.1)
M16 x 1.5
30 (221.2)
17 (125.3)
34 (250.7)
20 (147.5)
M16 x 1.5
30 (221.2)
33 (243.3)
M18 x 1.5
45 (331.8)
25 (184.3)
50 (368.6)
29 (213.8)
M18 x 1.5
45 (331.8)
48 (353.9)
M18 x 2.5
M18 x 2.5
M20 x 1.5
60 (442.3)
35 (258)
M20 x 1.5
60 (442.3)
65 (479.2)
M20 x 2.5
M20 x 2.5
M22 x 1.5
80 (589.8)
41 (302.2)
M22 x 1.5
80 (589.8)
90 (663)
M22 x 2.5
M22 x 2.5
M24 x 2
100 (737.3)
47 (346.5)
108 (796.2)
52.5 (387)
M24 x 2
100 (737.3)
110 (811)
M24 x 3
M24 x 3
M27 x 2
95 (700.4)
40.1 (295.6)
M27 x 2
100 (737.3)
M30 x 2
130 (958.4)
49.9 (368)
M30 x 2
140 (1032)
M33 x 2
170 (1253.4)
M33 x 2
190 (1400.9)
M36 x 3
220 (1622.1)
M36 x 3
240 (1769.5)
M6 x 1
1.3 (9.6)
1.2 (8.8)
M8 x 1.25
3.2 (23.6)
2.6 (19.2)
3.9 (28.7)
M10 x 1.25
7.2 (53)
5.2 (38.8)
M10 x 1.5
6.5 (47.9)
M12 x 1.25
M16 x 2
30.5 (224.9) 64.5 (475.5)
M16 x 2
SECTION 1
ENGINE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
SUBJECT
PAGE
1.1
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................. 1-3
1.2
SERIES "Q" ENGINE DATA ................................................................................................. 1-5
1.3
DIAGRAMS OF SERIES "Q" ENGINE ................................................................................. 1-8
1.4
MOUNTING OF ENGINE ON FRAME ................................................................................. 1-11
1.5
DIAGNOSTICS FOR CUMMINS ENGINES QSM11............................................................ 1-12
1.6
FAN AFTERCOOLER CONTROL SYSTEM ........................................................................ 1-17
1.7
THROTTLE LINKAGE ......................................................................................................... 1-19

1-2
ENGINE
D350

D350
1-3
ENGINE
1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

1. The Series Q engine is a diesel for heavy duty applications characterised by several design concepts
tending towards simplicity and a high compactness.
D350R0069
Series Q
2. The engine incorporates, in a single solution, all

the most important characteristics and advantages
of modern diesel technology.
Width
mm (in)
Height
mm (in)
Weight
Kg (lb)
1340
(52.7)
848
(33.4)
1185
(46.6)
1160
(2557.4)
TECHNOLOGY
3. The engine has been entirely designed with metric

dimensions. the only discrepancy with these specifications involves the use of connections for pipes
and plugs with SAE standards. The specifications
of accessories change depending upon the Supplier. Technical publications list metric values with
the equivalent SAE values.
Length
mm (in)
In-line cylinders
Water cooled
4 stroke
Turbocharger with aftercooler
Double impulse direct injection
Metric dimensions
Air flow cooling
ENGINE COMPONENTS
Metric specifications
PIPES CONNECTIONS
AND PLUGS
SAE standards

1-4
D350
ENGINE
IDENTIFICATION OF THE ENGINE

Engine data plate
The engine data plate provides the identification data
and other important information about the engine.
Have the engine data here below available when contacting a Cummins Authorised Repair Centre. The information data on the plate are compulsory when procuring Spare Parts.
1. Serial number of the engine (E.S.N.)
2. Control Parts List (CPL)
3. Model
Note Do not change the engine data plate unless
authorised by Cummins Engine Company, Inc.
2
D350M0003
Engine No.
Family
35048946
Advert. Power HP/KW
at
330/246 2100
RPM
CID/L
1CEXLO661AAC
FR
Fuel rate at Advert. Power
Date of Mfg.
Inj. Set IN/mm
11/01
Model
QSM11-C
Ref. No.
S052008
650 - 1000 NOx FEL

PM FEL
661/10.8
Idle Speed RPM
Valve Lash Cold IN/mm
155
mm 3
stroke
.025 / .356
Inj. Timing
CPL
.025 LASH
Int.
KV
2828
.027/.686
mm
Cu
ins
Exh.
Cummins Engine Company, Inc.

Assembled in the U.S.A.
4060493
IMPORTANT ENGINE INFORMATION :

This engine conforms to
U.S. EPA and California Tier 2 and EU
Stage II regulations for heavy
duty nonroad compression ignition diesel cycle
engines as applicable.
THIS ENGINE IS CERTIFIED TO
OPERATE ON DIESEL FUEL.
2001
Warranty Start Date

WARNING; Injury may result and warranty is voided if
fuel rate, RPM, or altitudes exceed published maximum
values for this model and application.
D350M0002
4. The Cummins engine nomenclature provided the

following data as illustrated in the diagram.
QSM
11 - C
335
Note The following digits designate some applications of the Cummins engine for different markets.
A = agriculture
C = construction
M = marine.
= Power at dynamometer
brake
= Market application (see note)
= Total displacement (Litres)
= Engine model description
5. The total displacement of the engine is 10.82 litres

(2.8 gal.), the bore is 125 mm (4.9 in) and the stroke
147 mm (5.8 in).
The firing order is the same as for the other in-line,
6 cylinder Cummins engines, 1-5-3-6-2-4.
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Total displacement
Bore
Stroke
Firing order
10.82 litri (2,8 gal.)

125 mm (4.9 in)
147 mm (5.8 in)
1-5-3-6-2-4

D350
1-5
ENGINE
1.2 SERIES "QSM 11" ENGINE DATA

Generalities
Bore .........................................................................................................
Stroke ......................................................................................................
Total displacement ...................................................................................
Max. power rated speed ...........................................................................
Net power at flywheel (SAE J1349) ..........................................................
Maximum torque ......................................................................................
Engine speed at idle with different stalls
Low idle ..............................................................................................
High idle ..............................................................................................
Equipment stall ...................................................................................
Converter stall ....................................................................................
Total stall (equipment + converter) ......................................................
Compression ratio ....................................................................................
Firing order ...............................................................................................
Valve clearance
Intake .................................................................................................
Exhaust ..............................................................................................
Engine rotation (seen from front side of engine) .......................................
Intake ......................................................................................................
125 mm (4.9 in)

147 mm (5.8 in)
10.8 litres (28 gal.)
1800/2100 rpm
272/246 Kw [364.7/329.9 HP]
167.4 daNm (1234.2 lb.ft.) (at 1360 rpm)
800 50 rpm
2350 50 rpm
2230 50 rpm
1780 50 rpm
1578 50 rpm
16.3 : 1
1-5-3-6-2-4
0.36 mm (0.014 in)
0.69 mm (0.027 in)
Clockwise
Turbocharged
Engine weight (with standard accessories)

Dry ...................................................................................................... 1124 kg (2477.9 lb)
Filled (with engine fluids) ..................................................................... 1160 kg (2557.4 lb)
Lubrication system
Oil pressure
At low idle (minimum allowed) ...............................................................
At nominal rpm (minimum allowed) .......................................................
Pressure differential for oil filter by-pass valve opening ...............................
Oil flow at rated speed (minus the flow through the pressure relief) .............
Oil temperature at rated spee ......................................................................
Oil temperature thermostat
Fully open (oil flowing through heat exchanger) .....................................
Oil sump capacity (all engines) (high - low) .................................................
Total capacity of system .............................................................................
0,69 bar (10 psi)

2 bar (29 psi)
6,2 bar (89.9 psi)
176 lt/min (46.5 gpm)
121 C (249.8F)
106 C (222.8F)
30 to 34 lt (7.2 to 8.9 gal.)
35 lt (9.2 gal.)

1-6
D350
ENGINE
Cooling system
Thermostats
Beginning of opening:.....................................................................
Fully open: .....................................................................................
Temperature of upper tank
Maximum allowed: .........................................................................
Minimum recommended: ................................................................
Cap pressure with system at 99C (210F) ..........................................
Cap pressure with system at 104C (220F) ........................................
Coolant pressure (Upper manifold) at rated speed of 2000 rpm ...........
Coolant flow (thermostats fully open,
at rated speed of 2000 rpm) ...........................................................
Coolant capacity .................................................................................
From 82 to 93 C (from 179.6 to 199.4F)

96 C (204.8F)
100 C (212F)
70 C (158F)
0.42 bar (6.1 psi)
1.3 bar (18.8 psi)
From 1.3 to 2.7 bar
(from 18.8 to 39.2 psi)
438 lt/min (115.7 gpm)
9.5 lt (2.5 gal.)
Intake and exhaust

Maximum restriction allowed at nominal speed and load
(with dry air cleaner element) .........................................................
Maximum restriction turbocharger outlet at intake
manifold inlet .................................................................................
Maximum restriction after-cooler radiator outlet ...................................
63.5 cm H2O (12.3 psi)

152 mm Hg (2.9 psi)
152 mm Hg (2.9 psi)
Fuel system
Maximum restriction at fuel pump inlet ................................................
Minimum output pressure of fuel pump at rated speed
low delivery ....................................................................................
high delivery ..................................................................................
Restriction on fuel return (maximum) ...................................................
203 mm Hg (3.9 psi)

10.3 bar (149.4 psi)
12.4 bar (179.8 psi)
63 mm Hg (1.2 psi)

D350
1-7
ENGINE
Electrical system
System voltage
Ambient temperature
-18 C (-0.4F)
24 Volt
0 C (32F)
Cold starting
Amp
Reserve
Cap.1 Amp
Cold starting
Amp
Reserve
Cap.1 Amp
900
320
640
240
1. The quantity of plates for a determined size of batteries determines its capacity.
The reserve capacity determines the duration of the period during which a sustained starting is maintained.
2. The CCA specifications are based upon two 12-Volt batteries in series.
Batteries (Specific gravity)

Specific gravity at
27 C (80 F)
Charge status
1.260 - 1.280
1.230 - 1.250
1.200 - 1.220
1.170 - 1.190
1.110 - 1.130
100%
75%
50%
25%
Exhausted

1-8
D350
ENGINE
1.3 DIAGRAMS OF SERIES "QSM 11-C" ENGINE

The illustrations here below provide information on the
engine components, the location of filters, the draining points and the access locations for engine instrumentation and controls.
The illustrations and the configuration of the components shown in these diagrams are of a general nature. The locations of some components change depending upon the application and the installation.
For the removal, inspection, overhaul and reinstallation of the

engine, please refer to the specific manuals for this type
of engine contacting the Service Network.
Air manifold
(after after-cooler)
Oil filler neck

Dipstick
Fuel filter
ECM data
plate
Engine
coolant filter
Oil draining
plug
D350R0056
Fig. 1-8 View from injection pump side

D350
1-9
ENGINE
Turbocharger
exhaust outlet
Flywheel
housing
Centring
bearing seat
Flex disc
mounting holes
Flywheel
D350R0057
Fig. 1-9 Rear view
Coolant filter
Alternator
Drive belt
Belt
tensioner
Compressor drive
pulley
Drive
pulley
D350R0058
Fig. 1-10 Front view

1 - 10
D350
ENGINE
Air manifold
(after after-cooler)
Exhaust
manifold
Air manifold
(before
after-cooler)
Alternator
Turbocharger
Oil
sump
Starter
motor
D350R0059
Fig. 1-11 View from turbocharger side

D350
1 - 11
ENGINE
1.4 MOUNTING OF ENGINE ON FRAME

C1
C5
C4
C3
C2
C1
C5
C1
C4
C4
C1
C2
C3
C2
C4
C6
C3
C2
Tightening torques
C1.
C2.
C3.
C4.
C5.
C6.
Nut EM16 x 1,5 ....................

Screw TE M24 x 2 x90 .........
Self-locking nut ....................
Screw TE M16 x 1,5 x 45
Screw TE M16 x 1,5 ............
Screw TE M10 .....................
C3
(47.5 to 52.5 daNm) (350.2 to 387.1 lb.ft.)

EM16 x 1,5
(22.5 to 25 daNm) (165.9 to 184.3 lb.ft.)
(32 to 32.5 daNm) (235.9 to 239.6 lb.ft.)
(6.8 to 6.85 daNm) (50.1 to 50.5 lb.ft.)
D350R0060

1 - 12
D350
ENGINE
1.5 DIAGNOSING THE ENGINES

CUMMINS QSM11
The QSM11 engine is equipped with an electronic
controller capable of self-diagnosing possible troubles
occurring during the operation (electronic control Module).
A panel with a signal indicator is located behind the
operator's seat in the cab that can be reached by removing a panel with screws.
FUNCTIONS:
Test
Every time the engine controller is activated a test of
the integrity of the 3 indicator lights, staying ON for a
few seconds, is performed.
Diagnosis
By actuating the switch "Diagnosis" it is possible to
check the operation of the engine controller and to verify
the presence of active error codes.
Method
Engine inoperative
Key on second step (ON)
"Diagnosis" switch in ON
Possible results:
1. Indicator lights Warning and Stop come ON and
stay ON until the "diagnosis" switch is returned to
OFF. This behaviour indicates the absence of active error codes and it is possible to return the "Diagnosis" switch into OFF and start the engine.
2. In the event error codes are memorised, on the
other hand, the Warning indicator flashes once,
then the red indicator flashes the three digits of the
first active error code. As an example, if the first
active code is 431, there is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
1 flash of the Warning indicator

4 flashes of the Stop indicator
pause
3 flashes of the Stop indicator
pause
1 flash of the Stop indicator
pause
ON
ENGINE
DIAGNOSTIC
DIAGNOSTIC
INCREMENT
STOP
ON
Fig. 1-7
Red
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Red
Red
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Red
Yellow
Yellow
Red
121
122
123
131
132
135
141
143
144
145
151
153
154
155
Red
111
115
COLOUR
INDICATOR
ERROR
CODE
Progressive reduction of power and swing speed.

If engine protection is activated, the engine is cut-off after
30 seconds from beginning of flashing of indicator light.
Possible white smoke. No engine protection for

intake air temperature.

intake air temperature.


coolant temperature.

coolant temperature.

No engine protection on for low oil pressure.
ENGINE
The intake manifold air temperature signal indicates a value higher than
93.3C (200F).
Low voltage measured on intake manifold air temperature sensor circuit.
Excessive voltage measured on intake manifold air temperature sensor circuit.
The coolant temperature signal indicates a value higher than 104 C (220F).
Low voltage measured of coolant temperature sensor.
Excessive voltage measured of coolant temperature sensor.
The engine oil pressure signal indicates a pressure below the lower limit.
Low voltage measured on engine oil pressure circuit.
No engine protection on for low oil pressure.
Heavy reduction of power and swing speed.

Operating mode "LIMP HOME".
Heavy reduction of power and swing speed.

Operating mode "LIMP HOME".
Reduced engine power.
Reduced engine power.
No effect on engine performances.
The engine is cut-off and fails to start.
The engine fails to start.
EFFECT
D350
Excessive voltage measured on engine oil pressure circuit.
Low voltage measured on circuit relative to throttle pedal position.
Excessive voltage measured on circuit relative to throttle pedal position.
Low voltage measured on intake manifold air pressure sensor circuit.
Excessive voltage measured on intake manifold air pressure sensor circuit.
No signal measured on one of the two engine position and speed sensors.
No signal measured on both engine position and speed sensor.
Internal trouble of ECM controller correlated to hardware memory defects

or to supply voltage of controller inner circuits.
INDICATOR
CUMMINS ENGINE QSM11 - LIST OF ERROR CODES (ECM 570)

1 - 13
Yellow
Yellow
Red
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Red
Red
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
213
214
221
222
227
234
254
255
311
312
313
314
315
321
322
323
324
Yellow
187
212
COLOUR
INDICATOR
ERROR
CODE
The injector of cylinder 3 is deactivated.
The injector of cylinder 3 is de-activated.
No effect on engine performance.

The Shut-Off remains energised.
ENGINE
No current measured on injector of cylinder 3 when it should

be energised.

be energised.

be energised.
Current measured on solenoid of injector solenoid of cylinder 3 when

it should be deactivated.





ECM outer supply voltage measured on Shut Off valve solenoid.

The Shut-Off remains energised.
ECM de-energises the Shut Off valve and cuts off

the engine.
The fuel SHUT-OFF valve

stays closed until the speed decreases. the valve
re-opens once the speed returns below
2000 rpm.
The engine is de-rated. No protection for oil pressure

and coolant level.
Reduction of engine power.
Reduction of engine power.

No engine protection for oil temperature.
No engine protection for oil temperature.
The engine is de-rated. No protection for oil pressure

and coolant level.
EFFECT
1 - 14
Voltage lower than 6 VDC measured on Shut Off solenoid valve supply circuit.
or defects on output current from ECM toward actuators.
The signal coming from sped sensor indicates a value exceeding 2650 rpm.
Excessive voltage measured on ECM supply lines toward some sensors s verso.
Low voltage measured on ambient temperature sensor circuit.
Excessive voltage measured on ambient temperature sensor circuit.
The engine oil temperature signal indicates a value exceeding 124 C (255 F).
Low voltage measured on engine oil temperature sensor.
Excessive voltage measured on engine oil temperature sensor.
Low voltage measured on ECM supply lines toward some sensors s verso.
INDICATOR

D350
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Red
Mainten.
(Blue)
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Red
Yellow
332
341
343
352
386
415
418
419
428
429
431
432
433
Yellow
325
331
COLOUR
INDICATOR
ERROR
CODE
The engine is de-rated.
Engine runs at idle only.
No effect on performances.
Possible white smoke, loss of power or difficult starting.

If engine protection is activated, the engine is cut-off
after 30 seconds from beginning of flashing
of indicator light.
ENGINE
The signal of intake air pressure sensor indicates high pressure,

whereas other engine parameters require a lower air.
Voltage measured on "idle on" (throttle pedal released) when

throttle pedal is pressed.
No voltage measured simultaneously on pins relative to "idle on"

(throttle pedal released) and "idle off" (throttle pedal pressed) circuits
Low voltage measured on water in fuel (WIF) sensor circuit.
Excessive voltage measured on water in fuel (WIF) sensor circuit.
Error measured on signal coming from intake air pressure sensor.
Water is monitored in fuel filter.
The engine oil pressure signal indicates a value highly below its lower limit.
Possibly no effects on performance or heavy

power loss.
Possible effects on performance not felt, or engine

is cut-off or difficult engine starting.
Diagnostic information can be inaccurate.
EFFECT
D350
Excessive voltage measured on supply electronic circuit for some

sensors inside the ECM controller.
Low voltage measured on supply electronic circuit for some

sensors inside the ECM controller.
Internal ECM trouble.
Significant loss of data from ECM internal memor.
No current measured on injector of cylinder 4 when it should be energised.
INDICATOR

1 - 15
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Red
None
Mainten.
(Blue)
Yellow
None
441
442
443
551
581
582
583
596
598
611
775
776
951
Yellow
434
435
COLOUR
INDICATOR
ERROR
CODE
Unbalance of the power sharing on cylinders found.
A fast leakage is detected in the turbo-charging system.
A slow leakage is detected in the turbo-charging system.
The engine has been cut-off by the operator before reaching idle speed
regime.
Excessively low battery voltage monitored by battery voltage feature.
Excessive battery voltage measured by battery voltage feature.
Obstruction at fuel inlet monitored by clogging sensor.
The engine could have an irregular idle speed

or jumping in firing order.
No intervention by ECM.
The red indicator light stays ON until battery voltage

value is re-established.
The red indicator light stays ON until battery voltage
value is re-established.
The yellow indicator light stays ON until normal battery

voltage value is re-established.
Fuel inlet clogging monitoring alarm is activated.
Fuel inlet clogging monitoring de-activated.
Fuel inlet clogging monitoring de-activated.
Possible effects on performance not felt, or

irregular operation at idle speed is possible.
No effect on performances. No engine protection for

low oil pressure.
Possible effects on performance not felt, or engine is

cut-off or difficult engine starting.
Diagnostic information can be inaccurate.
EFFECT
1 - 16
Voltage measured on pin of fuel inlet clogging sensor.
Excessive voltage measured on pin of fuel inlet clogging sensor.
No voltage measured simultaneously "idle on"

(throttle pedal released) and "idle off" (throttle pedal pressed) circuits.
Low voltage measured on ECM supply circuit to throttle potentiometer.
Battery voltage above normal operational level.
Battery voltage below normal operational level.
Error on engine oil pressure measured by ECM.
Supply voltage to ECM dropped below 6.2 V for a split second or the ECM
is prevented from cutting-off.
INDICATOR
ENGINE
D350
Gear pump
8.4 cu cm/rev.
110 2 bar
(1595.4 29 psi)
with 21.8 lt/min
(5.8 gpm)
Tank
Sequence
valve
23 1 bar
(333.6 14.5 psi)
with 18.5 lt/min
(4.9 gpm)
Gear motor
D350
D350R0065
Counter
pressure
valve
10.8 cu cm/rev.
ENGINE
1 - 17
1.6 FAN AFTERCOOLER CONTROL SYSTEM

1 - 18
D350
ENGINE
2
3
D350R0066
1. Gear motor - 2. Sequence valve - 3. Counter pressure valve - 4. Radiator - 5. Support - 6. Brake pump.

D350
1 - 19
ENGINE
1.7 THROTTLE LINKAGE

The control is an electric type and is composed of:
- q.ty 1 lever (A) potentiometer control (B) having the
accelerator function.
- q.ty 1 decelerator pedal complete with potentiometer
(C).
MIN
MAX
The two components are installed in the cab in front
of the operator on the right side.
A - Control lever
B - Potentiometer "Williams Controls "Type WM53113032
C - Decelerator "Williams Controls "Type WM54013157
D350R0067
MIN
D350R0068
SECTION 2
TRANSMISSION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH SUBJECT
PAGE
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
OPERATION OF CONVERTER-TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC SYSTEM ...........................

Supply and scavenging .....................................................................................................
Torque converter ...............................................................................................................
Cooling, lubrication and flushing ........................................................................................
Gearshifting 1st - 3rd - AV - IN .............................................................................................
Speed engagement ...........................................................................................................
Quick discharge valve .......................................................................................................
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
HYDRAULIC TORQUE CONVERTER ................................................................................... 2-7

Removal of torque converter from the machine ................................................................. 2-7
Disassembly of torque converter ...................................................................................... 2-10
Inspection of parts and reassembly ................................................................................. 2-17
2.3
CONVERTER-TRANSMISSION OIL FILTERS .................................................................... 2-21
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-4
TRANSMISSION .............................................................................................................. 2-22

Removal of the transmission from the machine ................................................................2-22
Disassembly of clutches .................................................................................................. 2-31
Inspection of parts disassembled .....................................................................................2-34
Reassembly of transmission ............................................................................................ 2-35
Transmission lubrication oil pressure relief valve .............................................................. 2-39
Reinstallation of transmission .......................................................................................... 2-40
2.5
CONVERTER-TRANSMISSION OIL FILTERS .................................................................... 2-43
2.6
2.6.1
CONVERTER, TRANSMISSION-CONVERTER, TRANSMISSION

OIL SCAVENGER HYDRAULICPUMP ................................................................................ 2-44
Overhaul .......................................................................................................................... 2-44
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.7.4
TRANSMISSION CONTROL VALVE ................................................................................... 2-49

Removal and disassembly ............................................................................................... 2-49
Inspection of parts disassembled .....................................................................................2-51
Reassembly of control valve ............................................................................................ 2-51
Hydraulic tests of control valve on bench .........................................................................2-52
2.8
2.8.1
2.8.2
GEARSHIFT CONTROL...................................................................................................... 2-53

Transmission gearshift buttons and safety lever ............................................................... 2-53
Disassembly of gearshift components .............................................................................. 2-54
2.9
2.9.1
TRANSMISSION OIL RADIATOR ........................................................................................2-55

Cleaning and inspection of tightness of heat exchanger ................................................... 2-55

2-2
TRANSMISSION
PARAGRAPH SUBJECT
D350
PAGE
2.10
2.10.1
2.10.2
2.10.3
2.10.4
2.10.5
2.10.6
TROUBLESHOOTING .........................................................................................................2-56
Troubles, causes, remediesi .............................................................................................2-56
Test of converter-transmission group on machine ............................................................2-60
Gearshifting test and converter stallingo .......................................................................... 2-60
Check of transmission-converter pressures .....................................................................2-60
Pump delivery test ........................................................................................................... 2-60
Torque converter safety valve setting test ........................................................................2-61
2-11
SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA .............................................................................................2-62
2-12
TIGHTENING TORQUES ....................................................................................................2-66
2-13
SPECIAL TOOLS ................................................................................................................2-67

D350
TRANSMISSION
2-3
2.1 OPERATION OF TORQUE CONVERTER-TRANSMISSION

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2.1.1 SUPPLY AND SCAVENGING
The supply to the circuit is provided by a three section pump (Pa, Pc, Pr, fig. 2-1) respectively for the
supply of the transmission-converter, the supply to
the converter, the scavenging of the oil from the transmission housing, flanged on the converter housing
support.
The oil tank is made by a portion of the transmission
housing in which the oil is separated from the oil occupying the gear and clutch compartment and it is
kept low by scavenger pump (Pc) sucking through a
filter with magnetic elements and supplying the above
tank together with the oil scavenged from the converter compartment, obtained by the depression
("VENTURI" effect) from connection (V).
The oil in the transmission housing tank is sucked by
twin pumps (Pa and Pc). Pump (Pa) has the function
of generating the pressure controlling the transmission. pump (Pc) has the purpose of sending an oil
flow into the converter added to the flow coming from
the same control pump (Pa).
2.1.2 TROQUE CONVERTER

With the transmission engaged, the torque converter
is supplied by the addition of the flow of pump (Pc)
and the flow from pump (Pa) through the upper gap of
the transmission oil pressure relief valve (11). With
the transmission disengaged, the converter flow is
reduced since a portion of the flow of pump (Pa) passes
through the lower gap of pressure relief valve (11) directly to the lubrication.
2.1.3 COOLING, LUBRICATION AND

FLUSHING
The lubrication circuit is supplied by the oil coming
out the converter that, with the transmission engaged,
corresponds to the addition of the flows of pumps (Pc)
and (Pa) minus leakages and small spills.
The oil coming out the converter is cooled by radiator
(S) moves into the transmission housing and is distributed in the shaft and clutches lubrication ducts.
Temperature gauge (T) located on the dashboard indicates the temperature of the oil measured before the
heat exchanger.
When the transmission is in neutral the plunger of
transmission oil pressure relief valve (11) is moved
downward, as explained in paragraph 2.1.4.
In this manner also the lower gap of valve (11) is uncovered thus reducing the oil pressure of the oil enter-
ing the converter, thus, the neutral general pressure

required to gradually engaging the transmission
clutches as well.
The activation of indicator light (Sc) located on the
dashboard, signals an insufficient lubrication pressure.
In the event this occurs and the light stays ON with
the engine in operation, it is necessary to stop the
machine at once and investigate the problem in accordance with the instructions listed by the relevant
paragraph.
Safety valve (18) limits the pressure in the lubrication circuit by opening when the pressure value exceeds 4 bar with the transmission in neutral. The oil
is then collected in the gear compartment, filtered
by magnetic filter (Fr) and is sucked by scavenger
pump (Pr) transferring it into the tank compartment.
2.1.4 GEARSHIFTING 1st - 3rd - AV - IN

The gearshifting is provided by buttons controlling
the transmission electrically through an electronic
controller providing the engagement of solenoids
powered by pump (Pa).
When the safety lever is in position "UNLOCKED"
the oil flowing from valve (26) power directly the solenoids. When valve lever (25) is in position
"LOCKED" the oil that previously was supplied to
the pilot valve, is discharged.
Valve (26) provides, when in neutral and the engine
at low rpm, a pressure sufficient for a correct operation of pushers (12 - 15) through the control solenoids.
2.1.5 ENGAGEMENT OF SPEEDS

The oil sucked by pump (Pa) passes into filter (Fm)
equipped with a paper made replaceable filtering element and safety pump (16) protecting it in case of
clogging. The valve operates in the event the filtering
element causes an abnormal pressure drop and its
function is to ensure under all conditions, an oil flow
excluding partially or totally the cartridge, preventing its laceration.
When gearshift button (5) is in neutral position, the
oil coming from pomp (Pa) flows out transmission oil
pressure relief valve (11) from both gaps; the upper
one connected to the torque converter, the lower one
connected to the transmission lubrication circuit.
Under these conditions, the oil provided by pump (Pa)
is at low pressure, since the plunger of valve (11) is
only subject to the action of the pump.

2-4
TRANSMISSION
Also, during the neutral phase, the oil flowing out the
solenoid diverter keeps the second speed engaged,
being the two pushers (12 and 15) centred.
During the first phase of the control button from neutral into first reverse ball (15) and spool (12) move
providing the supply to spool (6) first and then to spool
(19). Restriction (28) provides the priority to the engagement of the "reverse" of the solenoid, whereas
ball (20) positioned as illustrated, provides the supply
to the "reverse" duct.
Ball valve (9) prevents the pressure to discharge
through the actuating duct of the FORWARD speed,
which is in discharge. At this point, the operation of
the modulating valve of the reverse starts, as described here below.
The oil pressure that, as described here above, is
initially low, moves also under valve (11) helping the
pressure to create the pressure to be regulated that,
therefore, increases with respect to the initial value
determined by the spring only.
Also, the same pressure reaches under the piston of
modulating valve (7) causing the beginning of its stroke
upward, thus the compression of the outer spring that,
by actuating plunger (21) determines a gradual increment of the pressure in the engagement circuit.
Orifice (22) provides the setting of the time taken by
piston (7) to run its stroke until it touches the inner
spring that is pre-charged.
D350
Starting from this moment, under the effect of the

combined load by the two springs, the pressure regulated by the modulating valve increases sharply to
the maximum value of the system operating pressure.
Orifice (23) provides small flows to be controlled by
the modulating valve. The same sequence occurs
when other gearshifting occur both forward and reverse.
The function of the two modulating valves is therefore to:
- regulate through time the increment of the clutch
control pressure, to make the engagement gradual
- limit the maximum pressure for the control of the
transmission.
2.1.6 QUICK DISCHARGE VALVES (24)

The quick discharge valves, one for each speed clutch,
have the main purpose of providing the direct discharge
of the oil into the gear compartment of the transmission when the pressure reaches zero value, eliminating the centrifugal effect of the oil inside the control
chamber that has the tendency to keep the clutch
engaged, causing unnecessary stresses.
2-5
TRANSMISSION D350
Display
Satellite
26
(Microcontroller)
Sc
15
9
28
20
17
12
11
18
Fm
Fm
23
19
21
7
10
8
13
D
I
22
16
3
Pc
Pa
22
Pr
24
S
p.
p.
c.
c.
s.
s.
l.l.
Fa
Fr
D350R0183
st
Fig. 2-1 Torque converter-transmission hydraulic system diagram with 1 REVERSE speed engaged
A. Forward speed engagement - C. Torque converter - Fa. Transmission-converter (Pa) and converter (Pc) supply pump suction filter - Fm.Transmission- converter supply pump delivery filter - Fr. Magnetic filter on scavenger pump suction (Pr) for oil scavenging from gear
compartment - D. Transmission control valve - I. Reverse speed engagement - P. Control oil pressure gauge - Pa. Transmission-converter supply pump - Pc. Converter supply pump - Pr. Oil scavenger pump - S. Transmission oil radiator - Sc. Lube oil low pressure indicator - T. Lube
oil temperature gauge - V. Converter scavenging suction connection - 1. First speed - 2. Second speed - 3. Third speed - 4. Third spool - 5. Gearshift solenoid valves - 6. First spool - 7. Modulating valve piston - 8. Second spool - 9. Block valve - 10. Forward spool - 11. Transmission
pressure relief valve - 12. Gearshift spool - 13. Converter pressure relief/safety valve - 15. Pusher - 16. Filter safety valve (Fm) - 17. Block balls - 18. Lube circuit safety valve - 19. Reverse spool - 20. Block valve - 21. Modulating valve plunger - 22. Orifice-check for modulating valve
- 23. Orifice for flow reduction - 24. Quick discharge valves - 26. Interceptor valve in neutral - 28. Orifice - Colour code: p = oil under pressure - c = converter circulating oil - s = suction or discharge oil - l = lube oil.
D350

2-6
TRANSMISSION
D350

D350
2-7
TRANSMISSION
2.2 HYDRAULIC TORQUE CONVERTER

This chapter deals with the overhaul of the torque
converter, the operation relative to the hydraulic circuit is described together with the transmission circuit in section 6 "DOZER EQUIPMENT HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM".
C1
2.2.1 REMOVAL OF CONVERTER FROM

THE MACHINE
3
4
WARNING
Handle all parts with utmost care. do not stick
hands and fingers between parts.
D350R0073
Fig. 2-2 Torque converter

C1. Screws securing the torque converter to the engine -1.
Torque converter - 2. Equipment pump - 3. Brakes pump 4. propeller shaft.
Remove the cab and drain the transmission and

equipement oil (Refer to MAINTENANCE MANUAL)
Note Illustration fig. 2-3 represents the lifting of the
torque converter from the machine without the transmission. The same operation can be performed with
the transmission mounted, removing first the hydraulic pumps flanged on the torque converter cover
Operate as follows:
- disconnect the hydraulic pipes form the torque converter;
- remove propeller shaft (4, fig. 2-2);
- apply bracket (A, fig. 2-3) on the transmission drive

sleeve cover.
WARNING
Lift and handle all heavy components with a lifting device of appropriate capacity.
Make sure that all parts are attached to appropriate slings and hooks. Use the lifting eyes provided for this purpose.
Beware of persons standing in the vicinity of the
load to be lifted.
D350R0184
Fig. 2-3 Removal of the torque converter from the

machine
A. Lifting bracket 380000961 and 380000960 - 1. Torque
converter.

2-8
D350
TRANSMISSION
1
- remove screws (C, fig. 2-2) securing the converter

cover and remove it from the assembly;
Note In the event the separation from the engine

block is difficult, use the appropriate threaded hole
(m10 x 1,25 mm, 0.05 in) to facilitate the extraction.
- mount the group on the stand (fig. 2-4);

- remove all pumps (1, 3, 4), valve (2) and sleeve (5)
of fig. 2-4;
- turn the torque converter cover upside down and
remove screws (C1 Fig. 2-4) securing the stator support hub;
C1
D350R0185
Fig. 2-4
- remove cover (1 fig. 2-5) and using a chain secured
to the screws securing the converter centring cover,
lift the group (fig. 2-6);
Note When lifting, ensure that the gear teeth (1, fig.
2-6) driving the hydraulic pumps, do not force against
the relevant teeth of the converter drive gear.
1
D350R0186
Fig. 2-5
D350R0187
Fig. 2-6

D350
2-9
TRANSMISSION
1
2
11 12
3
4
5
13
7
13
14
15
10
14
10
17
11
12
a)
16
18
b)
c)
D350R0188
Fig. 2-7 Sections of hydraulic pump drives on torque converter cover

a. Equipment pumps drive - b. Converter-transmission pump drive - c. Fan drive, aftercooler pump drive - 1. Spacer - 2.
Bearing - 3. Sleeve - 4. Elastic ring - 5. Splined sleeve - 6. Elastic ring - 7. Gear - 8. Retaining ring - 9. Drive shaft - 10. Snap
ring - 11. Bearing - 12. Inner spacer - 13. Gear - 14. Gear (13) - retaining snap ring - 15. Centring ring - 16. Snap ring 17. Hub - 18. Drive ring.
- remove the various hydraulic pump drives reference

sections a, b, and c, fig. 2-7.

2 - 10
D350
TRANSMISSION
2.2.2 DISASSEMBLY OF TORQUE CONVERTER
10
C1
C4
11
13
C3
15
13 12 14
3
S1
2
B
C5
5
C2
D350R0286
Fig. 2-8 Section view of torque converter

A. Converter oil inlet - B. Converter oil outlet - C1. Pump wheel securing screws - C2. Drive gear securing screws - C3.
Converter centring cover securing screws - C4. Turbine wheel securing screws - C5. Shaft (5) securing screws - S1. Shims 1. Torque converter housing - 2. Front bearing (3) retaining disc - 3. Front bearing - 4. pump wheel - 5. Output shaft 6. Turbine wheel - 7. Snap ring - 8. Stator hub support - 9. Intermediate bearing - 10. Stator - 11. Turbine wheel support 12. Sealing elastic ring holder disc - 13. Sealing elastic ring - 14. Rear bearing - 15. Pump drive bearing.

D350
TRANSMISSION
2 - 11
Secure the torque converter to the bench using appropriate protections to prevent damaging the drive
shaft with the jaws of the vice (fig. 2-9).
D350R0287
Fig. 2-9
Mark the housing and the pump wheel to re-obtain the
same mounting position when re-assembling the unit
(fig. 2-10).
D350R0288
Fig. 2-10
Remove the screws securing the torque converter
centring cover (fig. 2-11).
D350R0289
Fig. 2-11
Remove the torque converter centring cover as indicated in fig. 2-12.
D350R0290
Fig. 2-12

2 - 12
TRANSMISSION
D350
Remove the screws securing the housing to the pump

wheel (fig. 2-13).
D350R0291
Fig. 2-13
Separate the parts using, if necessary, the appropriate
pulling holes located on the pump wheel (fig. 2-14).
D350R0292
Fig. 2-14
Remove the screw retaining the converter shaft (fig. 215) and remove the bearing retaining disc underneath.
D350R0293
Fig. 2-15
Remove the adjusting shims on the torque converter
shaft (fig. 2-16).
D350R0294
Fig. 2-16

D350
TRANSMISSION
2 - 13
Using a puller, separate the converter housing complete with inner bearing, as in fig. 2-17.
Note A bearing inner race remains pressed fitted on

the toque converter shaft.
D350R0295
Fig. 2-17
Remove the screws securing the turbine to the relevant flange (fig. 2-18).
D350R0296
Fig. 2-18
Remove the turbine as indicated in fig. 2-19.
D350R0297
Fig. 2-19
Install a puller on the turbine flange and warm-up the
bearing race to extract the parts of the torque converter shaft (fig. 2-20).
Note Mark the position of the race to return to original position when reassembling.
D350R0298
Fig. 2-20

2 - 14
TRANSMISSION
D350
Remove the snap ring on the torque converter shaft

as indicated in fig. 2-21.
D350R0299
Fig. 2-21
Remove the snap ring securing the stator, as indicated in fig. 2-22.
D350R0330
Fig. 2-22
Install a puller on the upper edge of the stator and
warm it up adequately to extract it from the shaft
(fig. 2-23).
WARNING
The stator is made with an aluminium alloy. Operate with the utmost care.
D350R0331
Fig. 2-23
Remove the snap ring located under the stator as indicated in fig. 2-24.
D350R0332
Fig. 2-24

D350
TRANSMISSION
2 - 15
Pullout the pump wheel complete with hydraulic pump

drive gear as indicated in fig. 2-25.
D350R0333
Fig. 2-25
Unhook and remove the rotary sealing ring as indicated in fig. 2-26.
D350R0334
Fig. 2-26
Remove the Allen screws securing the pump wheel
and the hydraulic pump drive gear (fig. 2-27).
Separate the parts.
D350R0335
Fig. 2-27
Extract the bearing inside the support gear using an
appropriate puncher, as indicated in fig. 2-28.
D350R0336
Fig. 2-28

2 - 16
TRANSMISSION
D350
Turn the drive shaft upside down and remove the snap
ring retaining the rear bearing (see fig. 2-29).
D350R0337
Fig. 2-29
Tap the drive shaft to remove it from the support
splined hub, as indicated in fig. 2-30.
D350R0338
Fig. 2-30
Remove the sealing elastic ring from its eat (see
fig. 2-31).
D350R0339
Fig. 2-31
Remove the ring seat from the drive shaft, as indicated in fig. 2-32.
D350R0340
Fig. 2-32

D350
TRANSMISSION
2 - 17
Remove the snap ring retaining the rear bearing (see

fig. 2-33).
D350R0341
Fig. 2-33
Install an adequate puller to remove the rear bearing
from the drive shaft (fig. 2-34).
D350R0342
Fig. 2-34
2.2.3 INSPECTION OF PARTS AND

REASSEMBLY
Clean accurately all the parts removed.
Prior to re-assembly, check that:
- the bearing roll freely without hesitations and do not
show a radial play;
- the inner splines of the stator in correspondence
with the fitting with the relevant hub are not deformed
or worn (no radial play must exist once installed);
- the press fitting zones of the bearings do not show
signs of scoring or dragging indicating possible loosening or rotation of the parts in their seat.
Note Prior to the assembly it is recommended to
replace all snap rings and sealing elastic rings.
Re-install al the parts reversing the sequence described for the disassembly, considering the following special operations.

2 - 18
D350
TRANSMISSION
The Allen screws securing the hydraulic pump drive

gear must be lubricated and tightened to a torque of
5.2 to 6.2 daNm (38.3 to 45.7 lb.ft.) (fig. 2-35).
D350R0343
Fig. 2-35
The stator must be fitted on the hub after warming it
up with the wording "TURBINE SIDE" upward (turbine
side) as indicated in fig. 2-36.
E SIDE
RBIN
TU
D350R0344
Fig. 2-36
The screws securing the splined hub must be lubricated and tightened to a torque of 5.2 to 6.2 daNm
(38.3 to 45.7 lb.ft.) (fig. 2-37).
D350R0345
Fig. 2-37
After inserting the turbine complete with hub on the
drive shaft, install spacer (D) and using the same shaft
retaining screw (C1) with disc (1) press the turbine
until it touches the inner snap ring, as indicated in
fig. 2-38.
1
C1
D350R0346
Fig. 2-38

D350
2 - 19
TRANSMISSION
Warm-up the inner race (the one touching the turbine)

of the upper bearing and insert the torque converter
housing assembly matching the reference marks done
during the disassembly as indicated in fig. 2-39. Lubricate the securing screws and tighten them to a
torque of 3.6 to 4.5 daNm (26.5 to 33.2 lb.ft.).
D350R0347
Fig. 2-39
Insert the upper bearing race (shaft retaining disc side)
after warming it up the, using a feeler gauge, measure the protrusion of the race with respect to the drive
shaft (S), as indicated in fig. 2-40.
D350R0348
Fig. 2-40
Prepare a pack of shims with the same value (S) previously measured with the feeler gauge (see fig. 2-41).
D350R0349
Fig. 2-41
Insert the shims on the drive shaft, matching the hole
made on the side with the shaft centring spring pin as
indicated in fig. 2-42.
D350R0350
Fig. 2-42

2 - 20
TRANSMISSION
D350
Lubricate the shaft securing screw and tighten it

(fig. 2-43) to a torque of 20 to 23.5 daNm (147.4 to
173.3 lb.ft.).
D350R0351
Fig. 2-43
Secure the converter centring cover tightening the
screws, previously lubricated to a torque of 3.6 to 4.5
daNm (26.5 to 33.2 lb.ft.) (fig. 2-44).
D350R0352
Fig. 2-44

D350
2 - 21
TRANSMISSION
2.3 TORQUE CONVERTER-TRANSMISSION PROPELLER SHAFT

Loosen the screws securing the spiders to the front
and rear connecting flanges.
Remove the propeller shaft assembly using a craw
bar to pry it. Remove screws (1, fig. 2-45) securing
the spiders to the shaft and remove it.
Check that the bearings turn freely on the spider support pins: If no signs of rust or poor sealing of the
grease are found around the base of the bearing caps,
the spider can be reused.
The failure of a bearing requires the replacement of
the entire spider.
D350R0192
Fig. 2-45 Parts of the propeller shaft

1. Spider securing screws - 2. Spiders - 3. Shaft.
NOTICE
In case of replacement of the spiders, they are
supplied as spare parts, lubricated and ready to
be installed.
Reassemble the assembly reversing the disassembly sequence and tightening the screws to the prescribed torque.
WARNING
Keep clothing away from moving parts and make
sure to prevent injuring your hands.

2 - 22
D350
TRANSMISSION
2.4 TRANSMISSION
This chapter deals exclusively with the overhaul of
the transmission.
For the operation of the relevant hydraulic system,
please refer to chapter "Operation of the torque converter-transmission hydraulic system".
2.4.1 REMOVAL OF THE TRANSMISSION

FROM THE MACHINE
It is recommended that the machine is located on a
workshop pit.
Operate as follows:
3
1
C1
C3
2
C2
C3
WARNING
Do not work under or near the equipment of a
machine or its parts that are not properly supported or blocked.
- remove lower guards (1 and 3 Fig. 2-46);
D350R0193
Fig. 2-46 Fixtures of the lower guards

C1. Front guard securing screws - C2. Central guard (2)
securing screws - C3. Rear guard (3) securing screws 1. Central guard - 2. Lower door to access the transmission housing - 3. Rear guard.
- drain the oil from the transmission as follows: remove draining plug (B, fig. 2-47); disconnect flanges
(A and C).
Note Loosen flanges (A and C) gradually to prevent
a sudden draining of the oil.
- disconnect all pipes connected to the transmission
of the machine;
- install hooks D and F 380000964 e 380000963 to
the transmission (fig. 2-48);
- remove the propeller shaft assembly;
- with chain (E, fig. 2-48) under load, remove screws
(C3. fig 2-79) securing the transmission to the rear
transmission.
D350R0194
Fig. 2-47 Transmission oil draining

WARNING
Lift and handle all heavy components with a lifting device of appropriate capacity.
Make sure that all parts are attached to appropriate slings and hooks. Use the lifting eyes provided
for this purpose.
Beware of persons standing in the vicinity of the
load to be lifted.
A. Converter-transmission pump suction pipe flange securing screws - B. Draining plug - C. Transmission oil
scavenging pipe flange.

D350
2 - 23
TRANSMISSION
- lift the transmission as illustrated in fig. 2-48 and

place it on an overhaul stand;
E
D
- remove screws (C3, fig. 2-49) and disconnect the

clutch lubrication pipes;
- disconnect pipes (2 and 4 Fig. 2-49);
- remove screws (C4), relevant plate (7) and disconnect pressure pick-up pipes (3);
- remove oil manifolds (1 and 5) removing the relevant screws (C1 and C2);
D350R0195
Fig. 2-48 Lifting the transmission out of the machine

D. Hook 380000964 - E. Chain 380000966 - F. Hook
380000963.
C1 3
C4
C2
5
6
C3
D350R0196
Fig. 2-49 Rear view of transmission

C1. Oil delivery manifold securing screw (1) - C2. Manifold
(5) securing screws - C3. Pipe (6) securing screw - C4.
Plate (7) securing screws - 1. Speed engagement oil
manifold - 2. Speed control pipes - 3. Pipes for pressure
pick-ups - 4. Directional speed control pipes - 5. Directional speed control manifold - 6. Lubrication pipes - 7.
Pressure pick-up retaining plate.

2 - 24
D350
TRANSMISSION
- install hooks (1) on transmission (fig. 2-50) and using adjustable chain (2) turn the transmission setting it on the stand as indicated in fig. 2-51;
- remove front cover (2, fig. 2-79) and loosen screws
(C, fig. 2-79);
2
- remove screw (C, fig. 2-79), retaining disc and flange
(9) for the converter connecting propeller shaft;
1
D350R0197
Fig. 2-50 Positioning of the transmission on the

overhaul stand
1. Lifting hook 380000971 - 2. Adjustable chain.
3
2
2
6
1
a)
5
D350R0198
Fig. 2-51 View of transmission on overhaul stand

a. Lower view of transmission for the correct positioning of the shafts with respect to the stand shape - 1. Transmission
control valve - 2. Solenoid connecting pipes - 3. Solenoid support bracket - 4. Output shaft - 5. Directional speed shaft 6. Stand 380000970.

D350
2 - 25
TRANSMISSION
- remove securing screws (C8, fig. 2-79) and remove

cover (10) complete with seal (11);
- remove the screws securing the 3rd speed clutch;
- install two brackets (A, fig. 2-52) and remove the 3rd
speed pack complete with clutches, then extract
the bearings and spacers left on the shaft;
- remove screws (C4, fig. 2-79) securing disc (28, fig.
2-79) after bending the wings of the safety plate
then extract from output shaft (15, fig. 2-79) 3rd
speed driven gear (29, fig. 2-79);
D350R0199
WARNING
Handle all items with utmost care. Do not stick
hands or fingers between pieces. Wear authorised
personal protection devices such as glasses,
gloves and safety shoes.
Fig. 2-52 Removal (re-installation) of third speed

clutches
A. Brackets - 1. Third speed driven gear
- separate cover (1, fig. 2-53) form the transmission

housing together with the bearing outer races using
puller screws (B) then lift it using chain (C);
D350R0200
Fig. 2-53 Removal (re-installation) of cover

B. Puller screws 380000969 - C. Lifting chain 380000966
- 1. Cover.

2 - 26
D350
TRANSMISSION
- remove reverse idle gear (1, fig. 2-54) from shaft (2);
1
D350R0201
Fig. 2-54
1. Reverse idle gear - 2. Shaft.
- using a general puller (D, fig. 2-55) remove reverse

driven gear (3);
D
D350R0202
Fig. 2-55
1. Reverse idle gear - A. General puller.
- extract gear (4, fig. 2-56) recover bearing inner race

(5) and spacer (6);
- secure hook (A fig. 2-59) to the nose of output shaft
(1, fig. 2-59) and pull slightly the assembly with a
hoist;
5
6
D350R0203
Fig. 2-56
E. General puller - 4. Reverse speed driven gear - 5. Bearing inner race - 6. Spacer.

D350
2 - 27
TRANSMISSION
- reach the lower side of the overhaul stand and remove carefully snap ring (7, fig. 2-57) and thrust
ring (8);
- extract the shaft from the bottom, recovering afterward the roller bearing; then remove the 1st speed
driven gear from the transmission housing;
7
8
D350R0204
Fig. 2-57 Removal (installation) of transmission

output shaft
7. Snap ring - 8. Thrust ring.
- set hook (F, fig. 2-58) on the transmission input shaft

and remove it pulling it out from the top, complete
with the clutch pack;
F
1
2
3
4
D350R0205
Fig. 2-58 Removal (installation) of transmission

input shaft
F. Hook 380000964 - 1. Shaft-clutch - 2. Reverse speed
clutch - 3. Disc pushing piston seat - 4. Forward speed
clutch.

2 - 28
D350
TRANSMISSION
Note The arrow indicates the direction in which the

shaft must be pulled out from the transmission housing.
2
D350R0206
Fig. 2-59
A. Hook 380000965 - 1. Output shaft - 2. Forward-reverse speeds clutch shaft - 3. Intermediate shaft.
- install hook (C, fig. 2-60) on the intermediate shaft.

Then lift the shaft assembly complete with the 2nd
and 1st speed clutches.
C
1
2
3
4
D350R0207
Fig. 2-60 Removal (installation) of intermediate

shaft
C. Lifting hook 380000968 - 1. Clutch shaft - 2. Second
speed clutch - 3. Disc pushing piston seat - 4. First speed
clutch.

D350
2 - 29
TRANSMISSION
7
6
4
3
2
1
C1
14
13
14
12
13
9
15
10
11
16
4
9
9
10
11
10
10
9
D350R0208
Fig. 2-61 Components of the transmission input shaft

C1. Sleeve (3) securing screws - 1. Disc - 2. O-Ring - 3. Motion input sleeve - 4. Shaft support bearings - 5. Shaft - 6. Piston 7. Lubrication splitting pins - 8. Rotating sealing rings - 9. Thrust bearings - 10. Roller bearings - 11. Spacers 12. "REVERSE" clutch pack - 13. Spacers - 14. Retaining half-rings - 15. "FORWARD" clutch pack - 16. Snap ring.

2 - 30
D350
TRANSMISSION
1
10
C1
12
11
11
6
5
11
12
13
9
14
18
16
17
15
D350R0209
Fig. 2-62 Components of the speed clutch

C1. Clutch pack (4) retaining screw - 1. Safety plate - 2. "SECOND" clutch pack - 3. Pack (4) retaining disc - 4. "THIRD" clutch
pack - 5. Thrust bearing - 6. Needle bearings - 7. Spacer - 8. Bearing (9) retaining flange - 9. Shaft support bearings - 10.
Reverse speeds driven gear (43 teeth) - 11. Rotating sealing rings - 12. Elastic retaining rings - 13. "FIRST" clutch pack 14. Forward speed shaft driving gear (60 teeth) - 15. Piston seat - 16. Shaft - 17. Lube oil splitting spring pins - 18. O-Ring.

D350
2 - 31
TRANSMISSION
2.4.2 DISASSEMBLY OF CLUTCHES

Note The disassembly-reassembly operations are
equivalent for all the clutches.
The differences relate to the discs and location of
bearings, spacers and elastic rings on the transmission shafts.
The description here below refers to the disassembly
and reassembly procedure for the reverse clutch, but
it applies to the other clutches as well, except for the
items subject to specific references.
Proceed as follows:
- place the shaft in the hole on the stand and pull-out

the driven disc drum;
- remove the bearings and relevant spacers;
- install compression bracket (A, fig. 2-63) and remove the three retaining half-rings (2);
- extract clutch pack (2, fig. 2-64) and remove spring (3);
D350R0210
Fig. 2-63 Disassembly (reassembly) of the hub

retaining rings
A. Compression plate - B. Rod - 1. Driven disc hub - 2.
Retaining half-rings.
WARNING
hands or fingers between pieces.
D350R0211
Fig. 2-64 Disassembly of the reverse disc pack

2. Reverse disc pack - 3. Drive disc hub retaining cup
spring.

2 - 32
D350
TRANSMISSION
DANGER
Highly compressed springs. Always comply with
the prescribed procedure when disassembling or
re-assembling.
WARNING

- place pressing rig (C, fig. 2-65) in the vice and press
the spring removing at the same time retaining ring
(4) and relevant plate (3);
D350R0212
Fig. 2-65 Disassembly of clutch pack

C. Screw type pressing rig 380000972 - 4. Retaining elastic
ring - 5. Ring (1) backup plate.
4
3
2
11
5
6
7
10
13
12
9
8
9
16
14
15
8
10
3
4
5
6
7
D350R0213
Fig. 2-66 Components of FORWARD and REVERSE clutches

1. Driven disc drum "REVERSE" - 2. Drive disc hub - 3. Hub (2) retaining cup spring - 4. Spring - 5. Spring seat cup - 6. Ring
(7) backup plate - 7. Elastic ring - 8. Steel drive disc - 9. Ring type spacer springs - 10. Sintered material driven disc 11. Mobile piston - 12. Safety wire - 13. Piston retaining elastic ring - 14. O-Ring - 15. Mobile piston - 16. Driven disc drum
"FORWARD".

D350
2 - 33
TRANSMISSION
a)
D350R0214
Fig. 2-67 Removal of safety wire (1)

a. Section view on elastic ring - 6. Safety wire - 7. Piston retaining elastic ring.
- disassemble the disc pack from drum (2, fig. 2-66);

- using appropriate pliers press the tips of mobile piston retaining elastic ring (D, fig. 2-68) and at the
same time lift piston (E);
E
8
9
D
WARNING
- turn the shaft assembly upside down and proceed

in the same manner to disassemble the FOWARD
speed clutch.
D350R0215
Fig. 2-68 Disassembly of two mobile pistons

(1 and 2)
D. Press the tips of the ring - E. Lift the mobile piston 8. and 9. Pistons.

2 - 34
D350
TRANSMISSION
Clutch discs
2.4.3 INSPECTION OF PARTS

DISASSEMBLED
It is necessary to replace the clutch discs, not considering the wear of surfaces, every time they show
pitted zones, scratches or burns, generally due to
impurities in the oil or a dry operation of the clutches.
The thickness of each single sintered disc is 3.55 to
3.65 mm (0.13 to 0.14 in). Replace when thickness is
below 3.3 mm (0.12 in).
WARNING
Never use gasoline, solvent or other flammable
fluid to clean parts. Use exclusively qualified, nonflammable, non-toxic commercial solvents.
10
11
13
12
5
1
2
3
6
7
9
8
10
11
14
5
7
6
11
3
16
10
9
8
15
D350R0216
Fig. 2-69 Components of the speed clutches

1. "THIRD" piston seat - 2. Sealing elastic ring - 3. O-Ring - 4. Backup ring - 5. Piston - 6. Steel disc - 7. Sintered material disc 8. Retaining elastic ring - 9. Spring seat cup - 10. Spring - 11. Driven disc hub - 12. Sintered material drum (THIRD) 13. Retaining rings - 14. Sintered disc hub (SECOND) - 15. "SECOND and THIRD" piston seat - 16. Sintered disc drum
(FIRST).

D350
2 - 35
TRANSMISSION
The thickness of each individual steel disc is 2.42 to

2.58 mm (0.09 to 0.10 in). Replace when the thickness is lower than 2.3 mm (0.09 in). Check any possible weakening of the clutch disengagement springs,
making reference to what listed in the tables "SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA". Check the rolling faces of
the needle bearings. In the event they show scratches
or elongation, replace the entire part.
A
1
2.4.4 REASSEMBLY OF THE TRANSMISSION

Proceed with the reassembly of the clutches in accordance with what listed here below:
- place pressing rig (C, fig. 2-65) in a vice and install
on it the drive disc hub;
D350R0217
Fig. 2-70 Measuring the deformation of the ring

spacer ring
A. = 4.3 to 4.7 mm (0.169 to 0.185 in) - 1. Spring.
- form the clutch pack always starting with a sintered

material disc touching the drive disc drum;
- insert the ring spacer springs between the inner
toothed discs, checking first that they are not deformed as per fig. 2-70;
QUANTITY
composition of brakes
FORWARD
3rd
2nd
1st
REVERSE
Inner toothed disc
10
Inner toothed disc with drive block
Outer toothed disc with

sintered material
10
10
Ring spacer springs
10
10

2 - 36
D350
TRANSMISSION
S (mm)
P (Kg)
200 Kg
(440.9 lb)
FORWARD-REVERSE
1st- 2nd - 3rd
61.8 to 62.3 mm
(2.43 to 2.45 in)
49.5 to 49.8 mm
(1.95 to 1.96 in)
Note Springs (1, fig. 2-70) are present only in the

"FORWARD and REVERSE" clutch packs.
- install the piston return spring and secure the assembly with the retaining ring inserting, for the forward-reverse, the safety wire provided (6, fig. 2-67);
- once the installation is over, check that the total

thickness is the one (S) listed in fig. 2-71. Correct,
as required, the thickness using inner toothed discs
provided with thickness equal to 3 mm (0.12 in);
D350R0218
- reassemble the transmission shafts without outer

toothed drums and measure the gap between piston and first inner toothed disc with a feeler gauge
(fig. 2-73);
Fig. 2-71 Checking the total thickness of the

clutch packs
WARNING
Lift and handle heavy parts with a lifting device of
proper capacity. Be sure parts are supported by
proper slings and hooks. Use lifting eyes if provided. Watch-out for people in the vicinity.
WARNING
Avoid kinking lifting chains or cables. Always wear
protective gloves when handling chains or cables.
- reinstall the shafts into the transmission housing

reversing the order described for the disassembly;
1
P
D350R0219
Fig. 2-72 Detail of correct installation sealing of

1st, 2nd, 3rd speed pistons
P. Pressure chamber - 1. Piston - 2. O-Ring - 3. Backup
ring

D350
2 - 37
TRANSMISSION
S (piston stroke mm)
CLUTCH
2.5 to 3.5 (0.09 to 0.14 in) FORWARD-REVERSE

3.3 to 4.3 (0.13 to 0.17 in)
1st, 2nd, 3rd
Note Prior to reassembling the output shaft position

the first speed driven gear on the appropriate support
pins (1, fig. 2-75).
S
2
D350R0220
- once the positioning of the shafts into the transmission housing is over, proceed with the check of the
plays on the support bearings (fig. 2-76 and 2-77);
Fig. 2-73 Measuring the piston stroke

S. Piston stroke - 1. Piston - 2. Inner toothed first disc.
- complete the assembly of the transmission reversing what described for the disassembly and secure
the various covers previously smeared in the mating surfaces with an adequate sealing compound.
A2
A0
1
3
45
43
47
35
60
WARNING
37
21
47
48
D350R0221
Fig. 2-74 Transmission shafts assembly

DANGER
Adhesive products are extremely flammable. Comply with the instructions of the manufacturer for
their application.
D350R0222
Fig. 2-75 View of the first speed driven gear

support pins

2 - 38
D350
TRANSMISSION
1
B
A
D350R0223
Fig. 2-76 Measuring the mounting play between bearing and manifold cover
B=A = 0.020 to 0.920 mm (0.0007 to 0.0362 in). Mounting play - 1. Shaft "FORWARD-REVERSE" - 2. Manifold cover - 3. Bearing.
D350R0224
Fig. 2-77 Measuring the mounting play between

bearing and flange
A=B = 0.211 to 1.311 mm (0.008 to 0.051 in). Mounting
play - 1. Bearing - 2. Speed shaft - 3. Flange.

D350
2 - 39
TRANSMISSION
2.4.5 TRANSMISSION LUBRICATION OIL

PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
5
WARNING
NEVER USE HANDS to search for suspected pressure leaks. Fluid escaping under can have sufficient force to penetrate the skin.
This valve is installed on the transmission cover in

correspondence with the return pipe from the heat
exchanger and it is only accessible by removing the
transmission front cover.
Disassemble the valve making reference to the section view of fig. 2-78.
Check the specifications of spring (2) in accordance
with what listed in the data paragraph. No spring adjusting shims are provided; thus, in the event a pressure value different from what specified is found, it is
necessary to replace the spring itself.
Normal lubrication pressure is 1.7 to 2.6 bar (24.6 to
37.7 psi) in neutral. The opening pressure is 4 bar (58
psi).
1
4
2
D350R0225
Fig. 2-78 Transmission lubrication oil pressure

relief valve
1. Retaining pin - 2. Spring - 3. Spring (2) support plates 4. Valve body - 5. Spacer.

2 - 40
TRANSMISSION
2.4.6 REINSTALLATION OF TRANSMISSION
WARNING
D350
When reinstalling the transmission group on the machine please consider the following:
- clean accurately the two mating surfaces between
the transmission housing and the rear transmission
housing and apply adhesive compound before mating the two parts;
- make sure that reverse clutch engagement oil delivery manifold (5, fig. 2-79) is complete with O-Rings
at the tips;
DANGER
Adhesive products are extremely flammable. Comply with the instructions of the manufacturer for
their application.
WARNING
proper slings and hooks. Use lifting eyes if provided.
Watch-out for people in the vicinity.
- remove the transmission from the overhaul stand

using adjustable chain (2) and lifting hook (1) (fig.
2-50);
- use the lifting eyes and auxiliary hook 380000963
already used for the removal, paying attention that
during this phase the O-Ring fitted at the tip of the
bearing retaining cover is not damaged;
- lubricate adequately the matching splines with the
bevel pinion with grease MOLYKOTE BR2 PLUS or
MOLYGUARD LMP7180.
2 - 41
35
31 26
1 20
19
27
C8
22
5
13
12
11
C1
9
C2
10
23
2
C9
24
18
17
14
16
C5
30
V
C4
28
29
32 33 34
Va
7
8
25
C6
C7
Fig. 2-79 Longitudinal view of the transmission
15
6
Fa
21
C3
D350R0353
A. Forward speed clutch - B. Reverse speed clutch - C. Retaining screws - C1. Flange retaining disc securing screw - C2. Screws securing manifold (5) to transmission housing - C3. Screws securing the transmission to rear transmission housing - C4. Screws securing disc (28)
retaining gear (29) onto shaft (30) - C5. Screws securing ring (30) - C6. Screws securing cover (2 and 3) to housing (1) - C7. Screws securing the transmission-converter power pump suction manifold - C8. Screws securing cover (10) to housing (1) - C9. Screws securing manifold
(4) to housing (1) - Fa. Transmission-converter power pump suction filter - L. 1st speed clutch - M. 2nd speed clutch - P. Diagnostic pressure pick-ups - V. 2nd speed clutch - Va. Quick discharge valve - 1. Transmission housing - 2. Transmission front cover - 3. Cover - 4. 1st, 2nd, 3rd clutch
engagement oil delivery manifold - 5. Reverser clutch engagement oil delivery manifold - 6. Pinion (7) taper roller bearing retaining cover - 7. Bevel pinion - 8. Taper roller bearing - 9. Converter-transmission propeller shaft flange - 10. Seal cover - 11, 12. Seal - 13. Forwardreverse clutches shaft - 14. 1st, 2nd, 3rd clutches shaft - 15. Transmission output shaft - 16. 3rd speed clutch engagement duct - 17. 2nd speed clutch engagement duct - 18. 1st speed clutch engagement duct - 19. Reverse speed clutch engagement duct - 20. Forward speed
clutch engagement duct - 22. Ball bearing - 21, 23, 24, 25, 26. Roller bearings - 27. Reverse speed idle gear - 28. Gear retaining disc - 29. 3rd speed driven gear - 30. Front bearing (23) a ring - 31. - Clutch disengagement springs - 32. Reverse speeds driven gear - 33. 2nd
speed driven gear - 34. Spacer - 35. Ring type spacer springs.
D350

2 - 42
TRANSMISSION
D350

D350
TRANSMISSION
2 - 43
2.5 TORQUE CONVERTER-TRANSMISSION OIL FILTERS

The filtration of the hydraulic system oil is provided by:
- a filter (Fm, fig. 2-1) full flow with paper replaceable
element located on the delivery form the torque converter-transmission power pump.
The circuit, in the event of clogging of the filter, is
supplied just the same by the opening of the bypass valve incorporated in the filter itself.
The filter is accessible opening the right panel under the cab;
- a filter (Fr, fig. 2-1) w/ full flow metal cloth filtering

element and magnetic rod located on the transmission oil scavenger pump in the gear compartment.
Access to the filter by opening the lower panel guarding the converter-transmission group and disconnecting pipe (C, Fig. 2-47).
- a filter (Fa, fig. 2-1) of a total flow type with steel mesh
replaceable element and magnetic rod located on the
transmission-converter supply pump delivery. To reach
the filter it is necessary to open the lower panel of the
torque converter-transmission group and disconnect
the pipe on the transmission side;

2 - 44
TRANSMISSION
D350
2.6 CONVERTER, TRANSMISSION-CONVERTER, TRANSMISSION OIL

SCAVENGER HYDRAULIC PUMP
2.6.1 OVERHAUL
DANGER
Fluid under pressure. Always rest the hydraulic
equipment on the ground. Cut-off the engine, actuate the control levers a few times idle, then
loosen and tighten the hydraulic system cap to
bleed the residual pressure, before disconnecting
the connections of the hydraulic system.
The pump is of a gear type, three sections, and powers the torque converter control hydraulic circuits (A,
fig. 2-80), transmission-torque converter (B) and oil
scavenging from the transmission gear compartment
(C). The motion is transmitted by the torque converter
through a driven gear and a shaft connected to the
drive shaft of the pump. The pump is mounted on the
torque converter cover and is accessible from the
topside of the machine, removing the cab.
Mark the different sections of the pump body to ensure the correct reassembly. Remove securing nut
(C2, fig. 2-80) and disconnect drive joint (1) using a
universal puller.
Then remove securing screws (C1) and disassemble
the single elements of the pump making reference to
the section of fig. 2-80.
Check the wear conditions of the pumps body, shafts
and gears, making reference to what listed in the table SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA.
Insert bearing (4) thrust rings (6) taking care of the
contact with the surfaces of the gears. During the
reassembly, lubricate all the parts, in order to prevent
seizing during the first period of operation.

D350
Tighten screws (C1) securing the pump elements and

coupling securing nut (C2) to the torque indicated in
the table "TIGHTENING TORQUES".
2 - 45
TRANSMISSION
C2
Before reinstalling the pump on the torque converter

support housing, make sure that the drive shaft turns
freely without showing any kind of effort.
1
D
B
6
4
F
C
G
C1
2
a)
D350R0226
Fig. 2-80 Longitudinal section of the three section pump powering the transmission-converter, converter
and oil scavenger from the transmission gear compartment
a. View of the suction and delivery ducts of the relevant sections of the pump - A. Torque converter pump - B. Transmissionconverter pump - C. Oil scavenging pump in transmission gear compartment - C1. Screws securing the pump body
elements - C2. Coupling securing nut - D. Suction from transmission - E. Delivery to torque converter - F. Delivery to
transmission control filter delivery - G. Suction from transmission (gear compartment) - H. To transmission tank - I. Oil inlet
from converter housing - 1. Drive joint - 2. Rear cover - 3. Gasket - 4. Needle bearings for gear shafts - 5. Centring pin 6. Needle bearing (4) backup rings.

2 - 46
D350
TRANSMISSION
2
3
21
C3
14
18
11
C1
10
16
15
17
19
20
12
13
C2
D350R0228
Fig. 2-81 Exploded view of the transmission control valve

1. Spring assembly for plunger (2) - 2. Neutral pressure valve plunger - 3. Block valve ball - 4. Transmission pressure relief
valve plunger - 5. Modulating orifice seat plug - 6. Modulating valve piston - 7. "REVERSE" control spool - 8. Spool return
spring - 9. Spool access cover - 10. "FORWARD" control spool - 11. 2nd speed control spool - 12. 3rd speed control spool 13. 1st speed control spool - 14. Restrictions on delivery from pilot valve (FORWARD and REVERSE) - 15. Gearshifting
block balls - 16. Ball (15) centring pin - 17. Gearshifting distribution rod - 18. Selector valve (FORWARD-REVERSE) 19. Gearshifting block - 20. Spool block - 21. Upper body - C1. Screws securing block (19) to control valve body - C2. Screws
securing cover (9) - C3. Screws securing upper body (21) to body (20).
2 - 47
13
12
17
C2
15
19
16
1
N
14
18
10
T
P1
P2
C1
C3
11
3
4
21
5
H
6
F
20
D
G
7
8
9
D350R0229
Fig. 2-82 Section view of transmission control valve

A. From power pump - B. Solenoid diverter - C. To transmission lubrication - D. To 3rd speed clutch - E. To 1st speed clutch - F. To forward speed clutch - G. To 2nd speed clutch - H. To reverse speed clutch - K. To torque converter - L. To control pressure pick-up - M. From gearshift
solenoid (1st and 2nd speed) - N. From gearshift solenoid (2nd and 3rd speed) - P1 and P2. Modulating valves pick-ups - T. From transmission control solenoid (FORWARD) - U. From transmission control solenoid (REVERSE) - 1. Spring assembly for plunger (2) - 2. Neutral
pressure valve plunger - 3. Block valve ball - 4. Transmission pressure relief valve plunger - 5. Modulating orifice seat plug - 6. Modulating valve piston - 7. "REVERSE" control spool - 8. Spool return spring - 9. Spool access cover - 10. "FORWARD" control spool - 11. 2nd speed
control spool - 12. 3rd speed control spool - 13. 1st speed control spool - 14. Restrictions on delivery from pilot valve (FORWARD and REVERSE) - 15. Gearshifting block balls - 16. Ball (15) centring pin - 17. Gearshifting distribution rod - 18. Selector valve (FORWARDREVERSE) - 19. Gearshifting block - 20. Spool block - 21. Upper body - C1. Screws securing block (19) to control valve body - C2. Screws securing cover (9) - C3. Screws securing upper body (21) to body (20).
D350

2 - 48
TRANSMISSION
D350

D350
2 - 49
TRANSMISSION
2.7 TRANSMISSION CONTROL VALVE

2.7.1 REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY
Remove the control valve from the machine as follows:

- remove the fuel tank;
3
- disconnect the connecting pipes;
2
- remove the screws securing it to the transmission
and remove the group;
Disassemble the control valve as described:

- remove upper plug (3, fig. 2-83) and remove neutral
pressure valve (1);
D350R0271
Fig. 2-83 Disassembly of neutral pressure valve

- with the valve in a vice remove plug (3, fig. 2-84)
and extract springs (2) with plunger (1);
1. Neutral pressure valve - 2. Transmission pressure relief valve - 3. Upper plug.
Note The two springs (2, fig. 2-84) are provided as

spare parts complete with the relevant mounting link
- extract plunger (1, fig. 2-85) and relevant springs (2,

fig. 2-85) from the upper side of the control valve;
- remove screws (C3, fig. 2-82) and separate the upper body from the spool body;
D350R0272
- remove screws (C1, fig. 2-86) retaining cover (1, fig.

2-86);
- remove screws (C1, fig. 2-82) and remove the
gearshifting block (1, fig. 2-87);
- mark the exact location of the spools (2, fig. 2-87)
in the relevant seats on the body and extract them;
Fig. 2-84 Disassembly of neutral pressure valve

1. Plunger - 2. Valve group - 3. Plug.
D350R0273
Fig. 2-85 Disassembly of transmission pressure

relief valve plunger
1. Transmission pressure relief valve plunger - 2. Plunger
springs.

2 - 50
D350
TRANSMISSION
Z1
3
C1
2 2
1
3
D350R0274
D350R0276
Fig. 2-86 Disassembly of the control valve bodies
Fig. 2-88 Disassembly of neutral pressure valve (1)
C1. Cover (1) securing screws - Z1. Calibrated orifices 1. Speed spools retaining cover - 2. and 3. Control valve
bodies.
A. Forward speed - I. Reverse speed - 1. To 1st speed

control - 2. To 2nd speed control - 3. To 3rd speed control.
1 2
3 4
7
2
1
D350R0275
D350R0277
Fig. 2-87 Disassembly of gearshift block
Fig. 2-89 View of oil passages in gearshifting block
1. Gearshift block - 2. Transmission spools.
1. Elastic rings - 2. Plugs - 3. Springs - 4. Balls - 5. Orifices 6. Gearshifting spool - 7. Plunger.
- disassemble, further, all the parts of the block

(fig. 2-89) removing elastic rings (1) and extracting
plugs (2).

D350
2 - 51
TRANSMISSION
2.7.2 INSPECTION OF PARTS

DISASSEMBLED
Check the specifications of the various pressure regulation springs, modulating valve springs and supply
spool return springs, making reference to the values
listed in the table "SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA".
Check that clutch control spools (2, fig. 2-87) and the
valve plungers are free from dents, scratches and
headings. Check the integrity of the O-Rings and make
sure that the ducts and the orifices are free from impurities (1, fig. 2-90).
1
2.7.3 REASSEMBLY OF CONTROL VALVE
Fig. 2-90 Cleaning the orifices on the "FORWARD

and REVERSE" speed ducts.
Reassemble the control valve reversing the sequence

described for the disassembly. If the transmission
spools are replaced (2, fig. 2-87) install them in the
relevant body making the matching at the disassembly. Tighten the securing screws to the prescribed
torque.
1 2
4 5
1 2 7
WARNING
D350R0278
D350R0279
Fig. 2-91 Composition of the modulating valve

1. Circlip - 2. Plug - 3. Valve piston - 4. Spring guide pin 5. Springs - 6. Plunger - 7. Check valve and orifice.
D350R0280
Fig. 2-92 Installation of the direction combination

movement priority orifice
1. Orifice - 2. Connections to control valve.

2 - 52
D350
TRANSMISSION
2.7.4 HYDRAULIC TESTS OF CONTROL

VALVE ON BENCH
Makeup the circuit of fig. 2-93.
- actuate electric motor (A) warm-up the test oil to
about 50 C (122 F);
- actuate the control valve completely at least 10
times;
- shift all gears in sequence, forward and reverse,
checking that the pressures measured on the pressure gauges is included between 13 and 16 bar (188.5
and 232.1 psi);
- place the pilot valve in neutral and check that the

pressure measured on the pressure gauge, connected to the output of the 2nd speed is 4 to 5 bar
(58 to 72.5 psi).
WARNING
75296097
C
75290544
75294166
75294107
75290373
75290544
75294168
75294164
75295583
75295586
75295583/..86
75296097
75296092
75293157
75293156
75294106
75294108
75296098
75294141
75294143
75294099
F
75294161
D350R0281
Fig. 2-93 Bench test diagram of transmission control valve

A. Tank 75296155 - B. Test rig 75297784 - C. Pilot valve 75294165 - D. To pressure gauge kit 75294000 - P. Pump
75294140 - F. Electric motor 75294091 - G. Flow regulator.

D350
2 - 53
TRANSMISSION
2.8 GEARSHIFT CONTROL

2.8.1 TRANSMISSION GEARSHIFT
BUTTONS AND SAFETY LEVER
The gearshifting is done by electric buttons that
through an electronic controller control the solenoids
for the hydraulic connection to the transmission control valve (see fig. 2-94).
The group of buttons is incorporated in the left armrest of the operator seat.
N
F
AS
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLER
MICROCONTROLLER
12
S
11
17
18
10
D350R0282
Fig. 2-94 Gearshifting buttons

F. Forward speed - R. Reverse speed - P. Gear increment - S. Gear increment - N. Neutral - AS. Auto-shift function 9. FORWARD speed solenoids - 10. REVERSE speed solenoid - 11. 1st speed - 12. 3rd speed solenoid - 17. FORWARDREVERSE control valve spool - 18. 1st - 3rd control valve spool.

2 - 54
D350
TRANSMISSION
Also, the transmission safety lever is included in the

electric circuit (fig. 2-95).
This device can get into two positions.
- Position "A" (in neutral): in this position it is possible to start the engine.
A
B
During the standing with the engine in operation, the

gearshift buttons are inhibited, to prevent unwanted
movements that could cause dangerous manoeuvres.
In this position the parking brake is engaged.
- Position "B" (work position) the lever allows the
gearshifting and disengages the parking brake.
The gearshifting is also inhibited by the "sentinel system brake" that in the event of a sudden pressure
drop of the brake system (11.5 bar, 166.8 psi) shifts
the transmission into neutral, so that severe damages to the brakes group and the transmission clutches
are prevented.
D350R0283
Fig. 2-95
2.8.2 DISASSEMBLY OF GEARSHIFT

COMPONENTS
To replace the gearshift buttons, access through the
left armrest directly form the operator seat.
To access the micro controller and replace it, remove
the panel on the left console (see fig. 2-96).
The gearshift solenoids are disconnected, reaching
them from the left side of the machine under the cab,
removing the left footrest and the relevant guards
underneath.
D350R0284
Fig. 2-96

D350
2 - 55
TRANSMISSION
2.9 TRANSMISSION OIL RADIATOR

The transmission oil radiator is incorporated in the
main radiator of the machine. IT uses its own aluminium made core and is located on the left side of the
water radiator.
Cooling is provided by the main fan.
Ss
2.9.1 CLEANING AND INSPECTION OF

TIGHTNESS OF HEAT EXCHANGER
Remove possible traces of calcium scaling using the
appropriate de-scaler for radiators in the solutions prescribed by the "OPERATTION AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL" of the machine.
The cleaning of the core is done by opening the conveyor upper panel and the conveyor lower panels to
remove the materials accumulated using a water or
compressed air jet (fig. 2-97).
C
WARNING
Wear proper protective equipment such as safety
goggles or safety glasses with side shields when
using compressed air to clean parts to prevent
injuries by metal or other particles apt to fly or
fall. Limit the pressure to 2.1 bar (30.5 psi) in accordance with current local or national regulations.
Si
M
D350R0285
Fig. 2-97 Radiator

C. Transmission oil section - I. Hydraulic oil section M. Engine coolant section - S1. Lower panels - SS. Upper
panel.
WARNING

2 - 56
D350
TRANSMISSION
2.10 TROUBLESHOOTING
WARNING
WARNING
Comply with all starting and cutting off- procedures and the NOTICES prescribed by the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
WARNING
WARNING
Be sure exposed personnel in the area of operation are clear of the machine before moving it or
its attachments. WALK COMPLETELY AROUND the
machine before mounting. Sound horn.
Cut-off the engine and make sure that pressure is

discharged from all systems prior to removing side
panels, containers, guards or covers.
2.10.1 TROUBLES, CAUSES, REMEDIES

Note Unless differently directed, please refer to the diagram of fig. 2-1.
TROUBLES
POSSIBLE CAUSES
1. Lube oil pressure indicator light (Sc)

stays ON with engine operating at
high rpm.
a. Insufficient quantity of oil in the

transmission housing.
Check level (*)
b. Clogged filters.
Inspect filters.
c. Oil leakages or air sucked due to

broken or cracked pipes, or defective seals.
Identify leakage and replace

defective parts.
d. Use of oil of wrong viscosity.
Check and change oil if required.
e. Power pumps worn.

f. Torque converter safety valve (13)
stuck in open position
g. Lube safety valve (18) seized in
open position.
REMEDIES
Check pumps.
Check valve.
Check valve.
(*) Note To check the transmission oil level, proceed as follows:

- warm-up the oil to 70 to 90 C (158 to 195 F) (temperature gauge about half way the green field);
- run the engine at low idle for 3-5 minutes, with transmission in neutral;
- cut-off the engine and check the level.

D350
2 - 57
TRANSMISSION
TROUBLES
POSSIBLE CAUSES
REMEDIES
2. Oil pressure gauge (P) on pressure

pick-up panel indicates insufficient
pressure both in forward and reverse, with engine at high idle and
speed engaged.
a. Insufficient quantity of oil in transmission housing.
Top-up level (*) and eliminate

possible leakages.
b. Defective operation of pressure

gauge.
Check and replace if required.
c. Bad sealing of power pump (Pa)

suction and delivery ducts.
Inspect and tighten connections.
d. Clogged filters.
Inspect filters
e. Poor performance of power pump.
Overhaul and replace if required.
f. Transm. oil pressure relief valve

(11) seized in open position.
Check free travel of valve.
g. Modulating valves (21) out of setting.
Replace valves.
a. Forward (or reverse) modulating

valve (21) out of setting.
Remove control valve and replace valve.

Check tightness of pipes taking oil to pressure pick-ups
(3, fig. 2-49) and look for possible leakages.

pressure on all forward speeds
whereas for reverse speeds the
pressure is normal (or viceversa).
b. Transm. internal pipes or sealing

segments on shafts broken.
c. Quick discharge valve stuck in

open position.
Check valves.

pressure in 1st, 2nd, 3rd speed only,
both forward and reverse.
a. See point 3b and 3c.
Look for failure of brakes system.

normal pressure and machine does
not start.
a. Spool stuck in closed position.
Remove control valve and

check spools.
b. Simultaneous engagement of two

speeds due to seizing in open position of spools (2, fig. 2-87).
See point above.
c. Clutch pack of one speed stuck.
Overhaul transmission.
b. Check pressure of brakes oil system (sentinel system).


2 - 58
D350
TRANSMISSION
TROUBLES
POSSIBLE CAUSES
REMEDIES
6. Transm. oil temperature gauge (T)

on dashboard indicates an excessive temperature.
a. Insufficient quantity of oil in transmission housing
Check level (*).
b. Safety valve is stuck in open position.
Check valve.
c. Safety valve (13) is kept open by

clogging in oil radiator or relevant
delivery pipes.
Inspect and clean radiator and

relevant pipes.
d. Bad sealing of power pumps (Pc)

and (Pa) suction pipes with subsequent entry of air.
Check and tighten connections

and clamps.
e. Filter (Fa) on pump suction clogged.
Check filter.
f. Power pump poor performance (insufficient oil delivery).
Check pumps (Pc) and (Pa).
g. Scavenger pump (Pr) poor performance of suction filter (Fr) clogged.
Check filter and check operation of pump.
h. Oil radiator, pipes clogged; water

pump inefficient.
Clean outside of radiator and

flush cooling circuit; check water pump.
i. Accumulation of materials between

lower guards of machine and engine and transmission groups.
Remove lower guards and

clean them.
l. Incorrect operation of the machine
Avoid operating with torque

converter stalling frequently
and use lower speeds.

- run the engine at low idle for 3 - 5 minutes, with transmission in neutral;

D350
2 - 59
TRANSMISSION
TROUBLES
POSSIBLE CAUSES
REMEDIES
7. The machine provides low power

in all gears (with engine efficient
and normal gearshifting pressure).
a. Insufficient transmission oil level.
Check oil level (*).
b. Air sucked into pump power pipes.
Check hydraulic circuit.
c. Oil leakages inside the torque converter (in this case the pressure in
the converter measured as per
point 2.10.2 is considerably lower
than the values indicated).
Overhaul torque converter.

- warm-up the oil to a 70 to 90 C (158 to 195F) (temperature gauge about half way the green field);

2 - 60
TRANSMISSION
2.10.2 TEST OF CONVERTERTRANSMISSION GROUP

ON MACHINE
It is possible to perform operational checks without
removing the transmission groups from the machine.
D350
2.10.4 CHECK OF TRANSMISSIONCONVERTER PRESSURES

(with oil warmed-up and throttle
lever at maximum)
Checking the gearshifting pressures
2.10.3 GEARSHIFTING TEST AND

CONVERTER STALLING
warm-up oil and water to about 50C (122 F);
NOTICE
Warm-up the coolant to the value indicated above,
alternating short periods (a few seconds) of "stall"
operation and longer cooling-off periods in "neutral". This is in order to make the warming-up of
coolants progressive and uniform.
check, with transmission in neutral, that maximum

rpm at high idle is between 2250 and 2350.
Hold the machine by pressing the brake pedal and
keeping it firmly blocked.
Engage the third gear forward and check that the throttle lever is in maximum rpm position and the engine
rpm slows to 1780 50 rpm.
Shift all the other gears and check that the engine
decrement is the same, no matter what gear is engaged. If for one gear the engine rpm does not decrease, it is possible that the clutch of the speed selected slips.
If during the test the engine rpm does not decrease to
the prescribed value in any speed, the trouble is localised in the gearshifting circuit or in the torque converter and more precisely:
Connect a set of pressure gauges (20 to 25 bar, 290.1

to 362.6 psi capacity) to the pressure pick-ups (see
section 4 - STEERING BRAKES AND DIFFERENTIAL) and check the engaging pressures of the various clutches operating with the torque converter stalling, as described in the previous paragraph. With gears
engaged the engaging pressures must be included
between 14 and 16 bar (203 and 232 psi); with
gearshifting button in neutral position, the pressure
reading on the pressure gauge connected to 2nd speed
is about 4 to 5 bar (58 to 72.5 psi), whereas in the
other positions it must be 0.
Checking the torque converter pressure
Connect a pressure gauge to the torque converter pickup and check that the pressure value is about 3.5 bar
(50.8 psi) with a gear engaged (and torque converter
stalling).
Checking the lubrication pressure
Connect a pressure gauge to the lubrication pick-up
and check that the pressure is included between 1.7
and 2.5 bar (24.6 and 36.2 psi).
2.10.5 PUMP DELIVERY TESTS

Use the testing oil and the conditions as specified.
The deliveries measured must not be 20 5 below the
relevant nominal deliveries (see table "SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA").
In case they are below the limits, it is necessary to
overhaul the pump.
- in the transmission, when the propeller shaft between

torque converter and transmission is rotating;
- in the torque converter, when the propeller shaft
does not turn.

D350
2 - 61
TRANSMISSION
2.10.6 TORQUE CONVERTER SAFETY

VALVE SETTING TEST
The torque converter safety valve is located on the
upper side of the torque converter support housing.
Remove it from the machine disconnecting the steel
pipe connecting it to transmission pump, then remove
the screws securing it to the torque converter housing.
Check the specifications of spring (3) in accordance
with he description of the data paragraph.
Set the valve using the devices and tooling CE-EST
380060081 Diagnostic Kit , see paragraph relative to
special tools.
Supply the valve with SAE 10 oil at a temperature of
about 20 C (68 F) with a flow of 10 litre/min.
Under such conditions, plunger (2, fig. 2-98) must open
the discharge port at a pressure of 10 11 bar, otherwise change accordingly the quantity of adjusting
washers (S) located under the threaded plug.
S
3
6
1
2
5
4
D350R0190
Fig. 2-98 Section of torque converter safety valve

1. Valve body - 2. Plunger cylinder - 3. Spring - 4. Plunger
stop pin - 5. O-ring - 6. Gasket - S. Adjusting shims.

2 - 62
D350
TRANSMISSION
2.11 SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA

Torque converter type ............................................................
- mounting .............................................................................
- conversion ratio at stall .......................................................
- diameter ..............................................................................
single stage, 2-phase

mounted on flywheel splines
2.32 : 1
406.4 mm (16 in)
TORQUE CONVERTER SAFETY VALVE (fig. 2-98)

Valve pressure setting ............................................................
Valve setting ..........................................................................
Pressure variation for each shim ............................................
Specifications of spring (3);
- free length of spring ............................................................
- length under a load of 4.3 4.8 daN ...................................
Outer diameter of piston (2) ....................................................
Diameter of piston (2) seat .....................................................
Gap between piston and relevant seat ...................................
4.5 mm (0.18 in)

40 mm (1.57 in)
13.982 to 14.000 mm (0.550 to 0.551 in)
14.016 to 14.043 mm (0.552 to 0.553 in)
0.016 to 0.061 mm (0.001 to 0.002 in)
TRANSMISSION
Type .......................................................................................
Speeds ..................................................................................
S peed engagement clutches .................................................
"Full "Power-shift"
3 forward and 3 reverse
5
10 to 11 bar (145 to 159.5 psi)

by spring pre-loading washers
0.7 bar
TRANSMISSION RATIOS
Speed
Ratio
1st forward
2nd forward
3rd forward
1 : 2.918
1 :1.714
1 : 0.904
1st reverse
2nd reverse
3rd reverse
1 : 2.457
1 : 1.444
1 : 0.761

D350
2 - 63
TRANSMISSION
Cont.ed: SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA
Thickness of inner toothed steel discs (6, fig. 2-69) ...............

Thickness of inner toothed sintered discs (7) .........................
steel ...........................................
- maximum wear limit
sintered ......................................
Clutch disengagement spring (10, fig. 2-69):
- quantity per clutch
- spring free length ................................................................
- length of spring under a load of 141 daN .............................
2.42 to 2.58 mm (0.095 to 0.102 in)

3.55 to 3.65 mm (0.139 to 0.144 in)
2.3 mm (0.090 in)
3.3 mm (0.129 in)
Outer diameter of internal fixed piston ....................................

Inner diameter of seat on mobile piston ..................................
- operating play .....................................................................
Inner diameter of speed piston seats .....................................
Outer diameter of pistons .......................................................
- operating play .....................................................................
201.728 to 201.800 mm (7.942 to 7.945 in)

202.050 to 202.165 mm (7.954 to 7.559 in)
0.250 to 0.437 mm (0.009 to 0.017 in)
224.050 to 224.165 mm (8.821 to 8.825 in)
223.500 to 223.600 mm (8.799 to 8.803 in)
0.450 to 0.660 mm (0.018 to 0.026 in)
LUBE OIL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE (fig. 2-78)

Valve opening pressure ..........................................................
Specifications of valve spring (2):
- spring length under a load of 4.85 to 5.35 daN ....................
4 bar (58 psi)
TRANSMISSION-TORQUE CONVERTER
OIL PUMP (fig. 2-80) .............................................................
Make ......................................................................................
Rotation seen from drive shaft ...............................................
Ratio between engine and pump rpm ......................................
Rotal nominal delivery at maximum
pump speed (2604 rpm):
- transmission-torque converter power section ......................
- torque converter power section (A) ......................................
- oil scavenging from transmission gear compartment (C) .....
Outer diameter of pump gear shafts .......................................
Diameter of shaft seat on gears .............................................
Play between shafts and relevant seat on gears ....................
Axial play between gears and relevant pump bodies ..............
- maximum play for wear .......................................................
one
93 mm (3.661 in)
45 mm (1.771 in)
37 mm (1.457 in)
14 mm (0.551 in)
three sets of gears, one to power the transmission-torque converter, one to power the
torque converter and the third one to scavenge the oil from the transmission gear compartment
CNH-LECCE
anticlockwise
1 : 1.24
96.5 lt/min (25.5 gpm)
85 lt/min (22.5 gpm)
217 lt/min (57.3 gpm)
19.979 to 20.000 mm (0.786 to 0.787 in)
20.000 to 20.021 mm (0.787 to 0.788 in)
0.000 to 0.042 mm (0.000 to 0.001 in)
0.040 to 0.099 mm (0.001 to 0.003 in)
0.15 mm (0.006 in)

2 - 64
D350
TRANSMISSION
FILTERS
On transmission power pump suction
- torque converter ..................................................................
On transmission-torque converter
power pump delivery ..............................................................
On oil scavenger pump from transmission
gear compartment ..................................................................
GEARSHIFTING CONTROL VALVE (fig. 2-81 and 2-82)

Outer diameter pressure relief valve plunger (4) .....................
Diameter of plunger seat on body (21) ....................................
Play between plunger and its seat ..........................................
Specifications of pressure relief valve (4) springs:
- free length of spring ............................................................
- check load ..........................................................................
full flow, steel cloth replaceable element with

magnetic rod
full flow with replaceable paper element
full flow with metal cloth filtering element
29.979 to 30.000 mm (1.180 to 1.181 in)

30.020 to 30.041 mm (1.182 to 1.183 in)
0.020 to 0.062 mm (0.001 to 0.002 in)
Inner spring
Outer spring
129 mm (5.079 in)

7.00 to 7.08 daN
129 mm (5.079 in)

13.58 to 15.02 daN
- spring length under check load ............................................

62 mm (2.441 in)
Outer diameter of modulating valve piston (6) ........................
Diameter of piston seat on body .............................................
Play between piston and seat on body ...................................
Specifications of modulating valve outer spring:
- spring length under a load of 6.2 daNm ...............................
Specifications of modulating valve inner spring:
- spring length under a load of 11.7 daNm .............................
21.987 to 22.000 mm (0.865 to 0.866 in)

22.050 to 22.075 mm (0.868 to 0.869 in)
0.050 to 0.088 mm (0.002 to 0.003 in)
61 mm (2.401 in)
30 mm (1.181 in)
34 mm (1.338 in)
25 mm (0.984 in)

D350
2 - 65
TRANSMISSION
Diameter of transmission-torque converter

clutch power spools (2, fig. 2-87) ............................................
Diameter of seats for clutch power spools on body ................
Play between spools and relevant seats ................................
Specifications of transmission-torque converter
clutch power spool return springs:
- spring length under a load of 12.4 daNm .............................
Outer diameter of spool (6, fig. 2-89) ......................................
Inner diameter of seat ............................................................
- mounting play o ..................................................................
Specifications of distribution shaft:
- spring length under a load of 7.4 daNm ...............................
Pressure setting of neutral valve
(with flow of 23 to 35 lt/min, 6.1 to 9.2 gpm) ...........................
Outer diameter of neutral valve ..............................................
Inner diameter of seat ............................................................
- mounting play .....................................................................
17.989 to 18.000 mm (0.708 to 0.709 in)

18.030 to 18.050 mm (0.709 to 0.711 in)
0.030 to 0.061 mm (0.001 to 0.002 in)
41.5 mm (1.634 in)

27 mm (1.063 in)
9.991 to 9.995 mm (0.393 to 0.394 in)
10.000 to 10.022 mm (0.394 to 0.395 in)
0.005 to 0.031 mm (0.0002 to 0.0012 in)
22.5 mm (0.886 in)
12.5 mm (0.492 in)
11.5 to 12.5 bar (166.8 to 181.3 psi)
23.979 to 24.000 mm (0.944 to 0.945 in)
24.020 to 24.041 mm (0.945 to 0.946 in)
0.020 to 0.062 mm (0.0008 to 0.0024 in)

2 - 66
D350
TRANSMISSION
2.12 TIGHTENING TORQUES
Thread
Tightening
()
daNm (lb.ft.)
14 x 1.5
12 x 1.25
13 (95.8)
10 (73.7)
M16 x 2
14 x 1.5
12 x 1.25
23 (169.6)
18 (132.7)
6 (44.2)
12 x 1.25
12 x 1.25
12 x 1.25
12 x 1.25
12 (88.5)
8 (58.9)
7 (51.6)
10 (73.7)
TORQUE CONVERTER
Screw securing torque converter shaft ....................................
25 (184.3)
GEARSHIFTING CONTROL VALVE (fig. 2-81 and 2-82)

Screw (C2) securing spring seating cover to body ....................
Screw (C1) assembling body 19 and 20 ...................................
Screw (C3) assembling body 20 to body 21 .............................
8 x 1.25
8 x 1.25
10 x 1.25
1.9 (14)
2.5 (18.4)
5 (36.8)
TORQUE CONVERTER - TRANSMISSION PUMP (fig. 2-80)

Screws securing the pump to torque converter cover ..............
10 x 1.25
7 (51.6)
VALVES
Screws securing converter safety valve
to torque converter ..................................................................
10 x 1.25
7 (51.6)
Item to be tightened
TRANSMISSION
Screw (C1, fig. 2-79) securing flange retaining disc ..................
Screw (C2) securing manifold (5) to transmission housing .......
Screw (C3) securing transmission to rear
transmission housing ..............................................................
Screw (C4) securing transmission
output shaft securing disc (28) ................................................
Screw (C5) securing ring (30) ...................................................
Screw (C6) securing covers (2 and 3) to housing (1) ................
Screw (C7) securing transmission-converter
power pump suction manifold ..................................................
Screw (C8) securing cover (10) to housing (1) ..........................
Screw (C9) securing manifold (4) to housing (1) .......................
() Lubricate with engine oil.

D350
TRANSMISSION
2 - 67
2.13 SPECIAL TOOLS

TOOL CODE
DESCRIPTION
Lifting hook for torque converter and clutch removal to be used with 380000961
380000960
Lifting tool for torque converter and clutch removal to be used with 380000960
380000961
Couple of guides for the disassembly and assembly of the torque converter
380000962
Auxiliary hook for transmission removal and installation
380000963
Transmission shaft lifting hook
380000964
Transmission output shaft disassembly/assembly hook
380000965

2 - 68
TRANSMISSION
TOOL CODE
DESCRIPTION
Transmission lifting hook
380000966
Screws for removal/installation of reverser form flywheel
380000967
Lifting hook for transmission shaft complete with clutches
380000968
Torque converter puller screws
380000969
Transmission and clutch pack stand
380000970
Hook for positioning of transmission on overhaul bench 380000970
380000971
D350

D350
2 - 69
TRANSMISSION
TOOL CODE
DESCRIPTION
Tool for transmission speed clutch spring removal/installation
380000972
BB3 diagnostic tester
380001303
Adapter cable for BB3
380001471
380060081 CE - EST KIT ASSEMBLY
B
D180-2M001
ref.
code
q.ty
description
380001594
PFT-8 Kit hydraulic test
380060081
Diagnostic kit

2 - 70
TRANSMISSION
Hydraulic PFT - 8
FLOWS - PRESSURES - TEMPERATURES
(380001594)
cod.
q.ty
description
380001494
750L/M Flow Block
380001495
700 Bar Pressure Sensors
380001496
Temperature Sensors 150 C
380001497
Sensor Cables
380001498
Hydraulic Kit Carry Case
380060105
PFT-8 Module
DIAGNOSTIC KIT CE - EST

(380060081)
cod.
q.ty
description
380001501
PC to Vehicle Interface
380001502
Cable PC to Vehicle Interface
380001503
Cable PC to FK Vehicle
380001504
Cable PC to FH Vehicle
380001505
"SMS key" with FK-EST application software
380060088
STHP PC
380001465
Docking Station
380001510
12V Vehicle Power Supply
380001511
PC Carry Case
380001499
Printer
380001500
USB Printer Cable
380060089
STHP HDD
D350
SECTION 3
FINAL DRIVES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
SUBJECT
PAGE
3.1
3.1.1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................... 3-3

Final drive (section view and list of parts) ......................................................................... 3-4
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
REPAIR PROCEDURES ...................................................................................................... 3-6

Final drive (removal / disassembly) ................................................................................... 3-6
Description of installation of front seals (long life) ............................................................ 3-15
Final drive (assembly) ...................................................................................................... 3-16
3.3
3.3.1
SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA ............................................................................................. 3-26

Final drive shaft and bearing fittings ................................................................................. 3-26
3.4
SPECIAL TOOLS ................................................................................................................3-28

3-2
FINAL DRIVES
D350

D350
3-3
FINAL DRIVES
3.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The final drives are of a double reduction type. The
first is a single reduction (with straight tooth gears);
the second is an epicyclic train (with satellite and planetary gears). Final reduction ratio is 1:15.6.
Specifications of final drive oil: must meet MIL-2105
or Api Service GL5 (SAE 80W-90).
Quantity to fill with oil final drives: 51 litres (13.4 gal.).
The D350 final drives provide two advantages, one of
a technical type, the other of a service type.
The technical feature consists of a different arrangement of the final drives, being isolated from the stress
generated by the undercarriage, which, on the other

hand, is directly connected to the transmission housing, absorbing the majority of the loads on the track
chains through the hinging on the two shafts (PIVOT SHAFTS).
The service feature consists of the reduction of the
service time required to intervene on the machine,
since the modular type final drives are individually
removable from the unit, without involving the transmission housing.
5
3
D350M0056
Fig. 3-1 Final drive installed

1. Single reduction final drive - 2. Sprocket - 3. Epicyclic train final drive - 4. Track frame - 5. Transmission housing

3-4
D350
FINAL DRIVES
3.1.1 FINAL DRIVE (section view and list of parts)
8
41
42
43
44 45 46 47 48
49
52
9
50 51
10
11
40
12
13
39
14
15
38
16
37
17
36
18
34-35
21
33
19
31-32
24
30
20
29
28
27
26
25
23
22
D350R0269
Fig. 3-2 Section view of final drive

(For the numbered items please refer to page 3-5)

D350
FINAL DRIVES
1. Left final drive housing

2. Straight roller bearing type NJ224ECJ
3. Straight roller bearing type NJ2219ECJ
4. pin 5 x 12
5. Plug M10 x 1
6. Allen screw M12 x 1.5 x 35
7. Pinion sleeve
8. Plywood cover
9. Pinion
10. Rotating seal for shafts
11. DIN 3770 - 210 x 4 NB 70
12. Screws M10 x 25
13. Driven gear securing screw
14. Ex screw M12 x 1.75 x 25
15. Circlip 190 x 4
16. Splined sleeve
17. Left housing cover plate
18. Swinging roller bearing type 23938 CC/W33
19. Circlip 260 x 5
20. Driven gear
21. Ring
22. Plug M20 x 1.5
23. Ex screw M30 x 2 x 90
24. Taper sealing group
25. Crown securing ring
26. Outer hub
27. Crown
28. Ex screw M12 x 1.25 x 30
29. Allen plug CPN M22 x 1.5
30. Crown support
31. Adjusting shim 0.1
33. Solar shaft
36. Washer
37. Ex screw M16 x 60
38. Carrier
39. Planet
40. Planet spacer
41. Ex screw M16 x 1.5 x 30
42. O-Ring 620 x 5.34
43. Full filling straight roller bearings
44. Planet bearing spacer
45. Elastic ring 140
46. Circlip diam. 100
47. Crown securing ring
48. Allen screw m12 x 1.5 x 25
49. Taper roller bearing type m348449/1
50. Wheel support
51. Taper roller bearing type 31038
52. O-Ring 380.6 x 3.53
3-5

3-6
D350
FINAL DRIVES
3.2 REPAIR PROCEDURES

3.2.1 FINAL DRIVE (Removal/Installation)
Removal
To remove the final drive it is necessary first to drain
the oil contained inside, proceeding as follows:
- stop the machine with plugs (A), (B), (P) and (S)
located as shown in fig. 3-3 and 3-4;
- Loosen draining plugs (P) and (S);
P
- remove plugs (A) and (B) draining the oil;
D350M0028
Fig. 3-3
- repeat the operation on both sides.

Once this is over loosen the tension of the track chain,
in order to remove, later on, the track chain.
Then, proceed as follows:
- remove access cover (C) on track frame removing

securing screws (V).
Loosen the tension of the track chain loosening track
chain valve VR a few turns (fig. 3-5).
Ri
D350R0264
Fig. 3-4
WARNING
Fluid under pressure. Do not reduce the tension
of the track chain by loosening pressure relief
valve (Vs). Do not remove grease fitting (I) installed
on adjusting valve (VR).
Vs
VR
C
V
D350R0002
Fig. 3-5 Loosening the track chain

VR. Adjusting screw - Vs. Pressure relief valve - C. Cover - V. Securing screw.
D350M0061

D350
3-7
FINAL DRIVES
Remove the track chain as described in SECTION 5

- UNDERCARRIAGE.
S
T
WARNING
Never work under or in the vicinity of equipment
or parts of the machine not adequately supported
and blocked.
Lift and handle all heavy parts with lifting devices
of adequate capacity. Make sure that parts are properly slinged and hooked. Use the lifting eyes provided for this purpose. Pay attention to persons
in the vicinity of the parts to be lifted.
Rp
R
D350R0405
Fig. 3-6
To remove the final drive assembly it is recommended
that the toothed segments be removed first. Thus it is
necessary to remove screws (V) securing toothed
sectors (S) to final drive group (R).
Pay attention in moving the machine just the amount
required to prevent the interference with track frame
(T).
Also, remove track frame rear guards (Rp) and lower
guard (Ri fig. 3-4).
S. Toothed sectors - T. Track frame - V. Sector securing

screws - R. Final drive - Rp. Track frame rear guard.

3-8
D350
FINAL DRIVES
Disassembly
Hold the final drive with adequate chains or steel cables.
Remove the screws (type m20 x 1.5 x 90) securing
the final drive to the machine (fig. 3-7).
WARNING
proper slings and hooks.
D350R0262
Fig. 3-7
Rest the final drive on an appropriate stand (fig. 3-8)
and turn it 90 .
Pay attention that the drive gear does not get out from
the final drive during the rotation, since it is free.
90
D350R0261
Fig. 3-8
Extract the bearing holding cover from the drive gear
shaft (fig. 3-9).
D350R0260
Fig. 3-9

D350
FINAL DRIVES
3-9
Install a simple lifting eye on the drive gear (fig. 3-10)

and extract it, lifting with an appropriate hoist.
D350R0259
Fig. 3-10
Remove the two O-Rings from the outside of the bearing holding housing (fig. 3-11).
D350R0258
Fig. 3-11
Extract the bearing from its housing (fig. 3-12) and
the seal inside the housing.
D350R0257
Fig. 3-12

3 - 10
D350
FINAL DRIVES
Turn the final drive 180 .

Remove the screws M16 x 1.5 of the final drive group
(fig. 3-13) and the two plugs M10, and install the carrier cover puller screws.
D350R0250
Fig. 3-13
Remove the taper plugs M20x1.5 and install three lifting eyes on the carrier cover, using an appropriate
lifting device to separate the two parts. Remove the
O-Rings as described in fig. 3-14, paying attention to
prevent losing washers and shims of the sun shaft.
D350R0249
Fig. 3-14
Remove the 3 elastic rings securing the planet groups.
Then extract two by two all bearings (A) three gears
(B) and three rings (C) of fig. 3-15.
A
C
A
B
Fig. 3-15
D350R0267

D350
FINAL DRIVES
3 - 11
Install a lifting eye on the solar shaft, lift it with an

appropriate device and extract it from the final drive
(fig. 3-16).
WARNING
Avoid kinking chains and steel cables. Always wear
protective gloves when handling chains and cables.
D350R0244
Fig. 3-16
Remove the 12 screws M16 x 60 at the top (fig. 3-17).
Remove the cover and bearing pre-load shims.
D350R0243
Fig. 3-17
Install two lifting eyes on the crown group. Lift it complete with bearing with an appropriate device (fig. 3188) and extract the assembly.
D350R0242
Fig. 3-18

3 - 12
D350
FINAL DRIVES
Remove the screws M12 x 1.5 of ring (A) on top and

remove it (fig. 3-19). Extract bearing (B) from the
toothed crown.
D350R0241
Fig. 3-19
Install two eyes on the sprocket housing, hold it adequately and extract it from the splines of the sprocket
support (fig. 3-20).
WARNING
D350R0268
Fig. 3-20
Turn the group 180 .
Remove the screws M12 x 1.5 securing the cover to
the final drive housing and after holding it with an appropriate device, remove it using the puller screws
(fig. 3-21).
WARNING
Be sure chains and cables are anchored and the
anchor points are strong enough to handle the
expected load. Keep exposed personnel clear of
anchor points and cables or chains.
D350R0266
Fig. 3-21

D350
FINAL DRIVES
3 - 13
Remove the 12 screws m12 x 1.75 of securing plate

(A, fig. 3-22) separating it from the gear.
A
D350R0464
Fig. 3-22
Extract the splined sleeve from the centre of the driven
gear (fig. 3-23).
D350R0252
Fig. 3-23
Remove the elastic ring from the gear support.
Install two lifting eyes on the driven gear.
Lift it in an adequate manner (fig. 3-24) and extract it
from the shaft.
WARNING
D350R0231
Fig. 3-24

3 - 14
FINAL DRIVES
Use a press to extract roller bearing (A, fig. 3-25) to

separate it from the driven sprocket.
D350
D350R0234
Fig. 3-25
Remove the 20 screws M30 x 2 on top (fig. 3-26) and
extract the sprocket support.
D350R0233
Fig. 3-26
Extract the O-Ring (fig. 3-27) from its seat and extract the inner race with rollers from the sprocket support.
D350R0232
Fig. 3-27

D350
3 - 15
FINAL DRIVES
3.2.2 DESCRIPTION OF INSTALLATION

OF FRONT SEALS (LONG LIFE)
Examine accurately the metal rings, checking that

the relevant faces are free from scratches, dents and
signs of wear, due to misalignment or planarity errors.
2
Replace both metal rings (1), fig. 23 and rubber rings

(2), even if one only is defective.
b
Absolutely avoid mating a used metal ring with a new
one and rings salvaged from different seal pairs.
c
To install the seals, comply with the following rules:
4
1. Eliminate all sharp corners and burrs; clean accurately the rubber ring seats.
2. Clean accurately the rubber rings.
3. Press each metal ring (1) onto the relevant rubber
ring (2) (see detail a).
4. Make sure that the metal ring is properly installed,
by checking that dimension (3) (detail b) isconstant
on the entire circle.
5. Install manually each pair of rings into the relevant
seats on the rubber ring, as illustrated (see detail
c).
6. Before completing the assembly (detail d) clean
with a lint free rag sealing faces (4) and smear a
thin film of fluid oil on them.
d
Fig. 3-28
SM9335

3 - 16
FINAL DRIVES
D350
3.2.3 FINAL DRIVES

(Assembly)
Arrange the housing on an appropriate bench oriented
from the inner side (fig. 3-29).
WARNING
of adequate capacity. Make sure that parts are properly slinged and hooked. Use the lifting eyes provided for this purpose. Pay attention to persons
in the vicinity of the parts to be lifted.
D350R0230
Fig. 3-29
Lubricate the seat where the sprocket support with
vaseline or oil and insert the O-Ring (fig. 3.30).
WARNING
D350R0232
Fig. 3-30
Install the sprocket support and tighten the 20 screws
M30 x 2 on top (see fig. 3-31) to the torque of 186
daNm (1371.4 lb.ft.).
D350R0233
Fig. 3-31

D350
3 - 17
FINAL DRIVES
Press straight roller bearing (A, fig. 3-32) in its seat,

using a press or an appropriate punch.
Press the roller bearing on sprocket support (B) after
warming it up to 130 C (355 F). Let cool-off to ambient temperature so that the correct pre-load is
achieved.
D350R0248
Fig. 3-32
Then, install the first bearing (C, fig. 3-35) on the
sprocket support (after first turning the housing 180
and inserting the spacer) and the second one (D, fig.
3-34) on the crown group, helping with a punch (E, fig.
3-34). Let the parts to cool-off to ambient temperature
to obtain the correct pre-load on these two bearing as
well.
D350R0237
Fig. 3-33
D350R0240
Fig. 3-34

3 - 18
FINAL DRIVES
D350
Turn the final drive 180 , take the driven gear and
using a press or warming up the gear, install it with an
appropriate device on the sprocket (fig. 3-35).
WARNING
proper slings and hooks. Use lifting eyes if provided. Watch-out for people in the vicinity.
D350R0231
Fig. 3-35
Clean, degrease and lubricate with oil or vaseline the
driven gear (fig. 3-36).
WARNING
D350R0251
Fig. 3-36
Insert the splined sleeve at the centre of the driven
gear (fig. 3-37).
D350R0252
Fig. 3-37

D350
FINAL DRIVES
3 - 19
Secure the sleeve on the driven gear using securing

plate (A) with the 12 screws M12 x 1.75 (fig. 3-38)
torque tightened to 11 daNm (81.1 lb.ft.).
A
D350R0464
Fig. 3-38
Clean, degrease and lubricate the sprocket housing
(fig. 3-39) and press the taper roller bearing races,
after turning it upside down.
D350R0238
Fig. 3-39
After making sure that the driven gear is installed,
turn the housing 180 .
Hold the sprocket housing in an adequate manner and
insert it on the sprocket support (fig. 3-40).
WARNING
Be sure parts are supported by proper slings and
hooks anchored to points sufficient to hold the
load. Keep all persons away from anchor points,
cables or chains.
D350R0239
Fig. 3-40

3 - 20
D350
FINAL DRIVES
Take the crown support and secure it using ring (A)

and the 30 screws M12x 1.5 to the toothed crown to a
tightening torque of 12.2 daNm (92.2 lb.ft.) (fig. 3-41).
Use LOCTITE type 243 for the screws. Insert bearing
(B) on the shaft.
B
D350R0241
Fig. 3-41
Insert the crown group on the wheel support (fig. 342). To adjust the final drive bearings, proceed as follows:
- once the crown support is installed (30, fig. 3-2) and
after turning the outer hub to set the rollers, install
securing ring (47, fig. 3-2) in the appropriate seat;
- use a toque wrench to check the initial rolling torque;
- tighten at least 6 of the 12 screws, installing them
in an alternative sequence;
- tighten the screws until an increment in the rolling
torque is found; this is going to be the zero play /
zero pre-load condition;
- use a feeler gauge to measure the distance between
sprocket support (50, fig. 3-2) and securing ring (47,
fig. 3-2). the reading must be made in three points
at 120 in correspondence with the securing screws
and the value to be considered is the arithmetical
mean of the three readings;
D350R0242
Fig. 3-42
- determination of the thickness - value measured 0.100 to 0.150 mm (0.004 to 0.006 in) (pre-load desired);
- insert the above mentioned shims calculated, tightening the screws to the prescribed toque of 23 daNm
(169.6 lb.ft.) and check the rolling torque that must
fall within the prescribed range of 1.4 to 2 daNm
(10.3 to 14.7 lb.ft.).

D350
3 - 21
FINAL DRIVES
Once the adjusting is completed remove the screws,

ring, crown group and sprocket hub.
Install the rotating seal and reinstall the lot, tightening
the 12 screws M16 x 60 (fig. 3-43) to the toque of 28
daNm (206.4 lb.ft).
D350R0243
Fig. 3-43
Insert the solar shaft (fig. 3-44).
WARNING
D350R0244
Fig. 3-44
Take the carrier cover and after cleaning and lubricating it, insert three rings (A) as described in fig. 3-45.
D350R0246
Fig. 3-45

3 - 22
D350
FINAL DRIVES
After inserting tool (A) fig. 3-46, position planet gear

(B) fig. 3-46 and insert inside it the first needle bearing,
spacer and retaining circlip (diam. 100 mm, 3.9 in). Set
the assembly and insert the second spacer, then the
second needle bearing and bearing retaining outer
circlip (diam. 100 mm, 3.9 in).
Repeat the operation for all the planet gears.
D350R0270
Fig. 3-46
Lift the group with an appropriate device and install
the O-Ring (fig. 3-47).
WARNING
D350R0249
Fig. 3-47
Assemble the group onto the sprocket housing using
the 3 manoeuvre screws to facilitate and comply with
the single positioning between the crown and the holes
of the carrier cover.
Tighten the lot with LOCTITE 518 and screws m16 x
1.5 to the torque of 30 daNm (221.2 lb.ft.) (fig. 3-48).
D350R0250
Fig. 3-48

D350
3 - 23
FINAL DRIVES
Turn the final drive 180 , then take housing cover (A)
lift it with an adequate device and tighten it on the
final drive housing, using LOCTITE 518 and screws
M12 x 1.5 (fig. 3-49) to a torque of 9 daNm (66.4 lb.ft.).
D350R0254
Fig. 3-49
Take the drive gear and press the bearing inner race
(B, fig. 3-50) after warming it up in an induction oven.
D350R0255
Fig. 3-50
Using tool 380000920 insert the seal inside the bearing housing, then, using tool 380000923 bearing outer
race (D) and bearing (C) of fig. 3-51.
C
D350R0236
Fig. 3-51

3 - 24
FINAL DRIVES
D350
Install the two outer O-Rings of the bearing housing

(fig. 3-52).
D350R0258
Fig. 3-52
Take the drive gear and insert it in its seat (fig. 3-53).
WARNING
D350R0245
Fig. 3-53
Insert the bearing housing (fig. 3-54) on the drive gear
with the help of a puncher.
D350R0247
Fig. 3-54

D350
FINAL DRIVES
3 - 25
Turn the final drive 90 and hook it with an appropriate device (fig. 3-55).
WARNING
D350R0261
Fig. 3-55
Install the final drive on the machine, using LOCTITE
518 and screws TEM20 x 1.5 to a tightening torque of
60 daNm (442.4 lb.ft.) (fig. 3-56).
D350R0262
Fig. 3-56

3 - 26
D350
FINAL DRIVES
Dp = 996.25 mm (39.2 in)
C
D
3.3.1 FINAL DRIVE SHAFT AND BEARING FITTINGS
680 mm (26.7 in)
D350R0400
Fig. 3-64 Sectional view of final drive


D350
3 - 27
FINAL DRIVES
SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA FOR BEARING MOUNTING

mm
Min.
in
Max
Min.
Max
A.
- Inner diameter of bearing
- Outer diameter of drive gear
- Mounting interference
94.980 to
95.003 to
0.003 interf. to
95.000
95.025
0.045 interf.
3.739 to 3.740
3.740 to 3.741
0.0001 interf. to 0.0017 interf.
B.
- Outer diameter of bearing
- Inner diameter of bearing housing
169.975 to
169.993 to
0.043 clear. to
170.000
170.018
0.007 interf.
6.692
6.693
0.0017 clear.
C.
- Outer diameter of drive gear
119.980 to
120.003 to
0.003 interf. to
120.000
120.025
0.045 interf.
4.723 to 4.724
4.724 to 4.725
D.
- Inner diameter of final drive housing
214.970 to
214.993 to
0.052 clear. to
215.000
215.022
0.007 interf.
8.463
8.464
0.0020 clear.
to
to
to
8.464
8.465
0.0003 interf.
E.
- Diameter of carrier shaft
99.980 to
100.003 to
0.003 clear. to
100.000
100.018
0.038 interf.
3.936
3.937
0.0001 clear.
to
to
to
3.937
3.938
0.0015 interf.
F.
- Inner diameter of planetary gear
139.625 to 139.650
139.687 to 139.709
0.037 clear. to 0.084 clear.
5.497 to 5.498
5.499 to 5.500
0.0014 clear. to 0.0033 clear.
G.
- Outer diameter of sprocket support
189.970 to
190.004 to
0.004 clear. to
190.000
190.024
0.054 interf.
7.479
7.480
0.0002 clear.
to
to
to
7.480
7.481
0.0021 interf.
H.
- Inner diameter of driven wheel
259.965 to
259.959 to
0.026 clear. to
260.000
259.991
0.035 interf.
10.235
10.235
0.0010 clear.
to
to
to
10.236
10.236
0.0014 interf.
I.
- Outer diameter of sprocket support
- Interference
189.970 to
190.017 to
0.037 interf. to
190.000
190.037
0.067 interf.
7.479 to 7.480
7.481 to 7.482
L.
- Inner diameter of hub
- Interference
289.965 to
289.870 to
0.043 interf. to
290.000
289.922
0.130 interf.
11.416 to 11.417
11.412 to 11.414
M.
- Outer diameter of crown support
- Interference
247.620 to
247.700 to
0.050 interf. to
247.650
247.746
0.126 interf.
9.749 to 9.750
9.752 to 9.754
N.
- Inner diameter of hub
- Interference
346.035 to
346.013 to
0.014 clear. to
346.075
346.049
0.062 interf.
13.623
13.622
0.0005 clear.
to
to
to
to
to
to
6.693
6.694
0.0003 interf.
13.625
13.624
0.0024 interf.

3 - 28
D350
FINAL DRIVES
3.4 SPECIAL TOOLS

FINAL DRIVES
TOOL CODE
DESCRIPTION
Tool for mounting of seal on pinion sleeve
380000920
Tool for mounting of seal on pinion sleeve
380000921
Puncher for roller bearing outer race on pinion sleeve
380000923
380000925
380000926

D350
3 - 29
FINAL DRIVES
TOOL CODE
DESCRIPTION
Puncher for bearing outer race on epicyclic crown gear support
380000927
Puncher for bearing outer race on epicyclic crown gear support
380000928
Puncher for bearing outer race on sprocket support
380000929
Puncher for roller bearing on planet
380000930
Fitter for driven wheel with bearing on sprocket support
380000932
Caliper for check of washer play on gear carrier
380000933

3 - 30
D350
FINAL DRIVES
TOOL CODE
DESCRIPTION
Reference for caliper 380000933
380000934
SECTION 4
INDEX
PARAGRAPH SUBJECT
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
PAG.

Hydraulic braking system .................................................................................................. 4-3
Main components of brake system ................................................................................... 4-7
Brake/fan-drive pump ..................................................................................................... 4-7
Brake feed valve block ................................................................................................... 4-8
Brake pedal valve .......................................................................................................... 4-9
Brake oil filters .............................................................................................................. 4-11
Hydraulic steering system ................................................................................................ 4-15
Main components of steering system ...............................................................................4-16
Hydraulic motor .............................................................................................................4-16
Steering pilot valve block ..............................................................................................4-17
Ports on pilot valve block ..............................................................................................4-18
4.2
4.2.1
FAILURE DIAGNOSIS ........................................................................................................ 4-19

Diagnosis display .............................................................................................................4-19
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS.......................................................................................... 4-22

Check of hydraulic pressures ...........................................................................................4-22
Brake pedal adjustment ....................................................................................................4-24
Check and adjustment of brake feed valve block .............................................................4-25
Steering levers setting ..................................................................................................... 4-26
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
REPAIR PROCEDURES ..................................................................................................... 4-29

Brake pedal valve (Removal/Disassembly) ......................................................................4-29
Brake hydraulic pump (Removal/Disassembly/Reassembly) ............................................ 4-31
Brakes and steering differential ........................................................................................4-33
Removal (preliminary operations) ..................................................................................4-33
Removal of ring gear ..................................................................................................... 4-36
Disassembly of planetary carrier assy ........................................................................... 4-37
Disassembly of planetary carrier differential assy ......................................................... 4-37
Disassembly of twin sun gear ....................................................................................... 4-38
Disassembly of brakes assy ......................................................................................... 4-40
Reassembly of brakes drum assy ................................................................................. 4-43
Reassembly of twin sun gear ........................................................................................ 4-46
Reassembly of planetary assy ...................................................................................... 4-48
Reassembly and installation of ring gear assy ............................................................... 4-49
Reassembly of brakes/steering differential unit in rear housing ..................................... 4-50
Check and inspection of brake discs pack ....................................................................... 4-53
Support assemblies (Removal/Disassembly) ...................................................................4-54
Disassembly of steering differential supports ................................................................4-57
Support assemblies (Reassembly/Installation) ................................................................. 4-64
Adjustment of steering pinion bearing preload .................................................................. 4-75
Adjustment of steering bevel gear .................................................................................... 4-76
4.4.4
4.4.5
4.4.6
4.4.7
4.4.8
PARAGRAPH SUBJECT
4.4.9
4.4.10
4.4.11
4.4.12
4.5
PAG.
Bevel gear (Removal/Disassembly of bevel pinion and gear) ............................................ 4-78

Procedure for bevel gear adjustment ................................................................................ 4-93
Procedure for adjusting bevel pinion bearing preload ........................................................ 4-94
Reassembly of rear housing guards ................................................................................. 4-95
SPECIAL TOOLS ................................................................................................................4-96

D350
4-3

4.1.1 HYDRAULIC BRAKING SYSTEM
The hydraulic braking system is completely independent from the steering system and its main components are:
- A twin hydraulic pump for brakes and transmission
circuits (1, hydraulic circuit)
- An oil suction filter (10) and an oil delivery filter (2)
- A feed valve block (3)
- A brake pedal valve (4)
- A rear housing (8)
The hydraulic pump (1) sucks oil from the rear housing (8) through an oil strainer (10) and sends the oil to
port (P) on the feed valve block (3), through the filter
(2).
The feed valve (17) keeps the oil pressure in the circuit at 25 2 bar. An accumulator (5) guarantees pressure in the circuit in case of engine failure.
A brake pedal valve (directly controlled by a central

pedal in the cab) operates straight to the brakes, taking pressure out from the circuit.
The rear housing (8) is composed of bevel gear (driven
directly by the transmission), brake discs (oil bath)
and steering differential. The rear housing serves the
function of oil tank and is utilized for piloting the disc
packs and lubricating the mechanisms in the housing.
The brakes are engaged when the brake pedal is depressed, in this way pressure is taken out from the
circuit and consequently the compression of the
springs locks the brake discs pack by means of the
braking device.
The machine brakes are applied in the following conditions:
- machine stationary with engine stopped (parking
brake);
- machine stationary with engine running and safety
levers in lifted position;
- machine travelling, central brake pedal depressed
(service brake).

4-4
D350
DR
3
Set 25 bar
P
2
Q=65 l/min
3,5 bar
22=75
M18x1,5
M16x1,5
M18x1,5
B
M14x1,5
12
C
PP
V1
110 bar +- 2
11
B
2600 RPM
25 cc/REV
C1
2600 RPM
8,4 cc/REV
Q= 21,8 L/min
BRAKE DISCS
LUBRICATION
23 bar +- 1
BRAKES
CONTROL
14
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK

8
FAN-DRIVE HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

13
10
9
150 nom
D350R0071
Fig. 4-1 Hydraulic braking system

1. Twin hydraulic pump - 2. Oil filter (delivery) - 3. Feed valve block - 4. Brake pedal valve - 5. Accumulator - 6. Pressure relief valve - 7. Directional solenoid valve - 8. Rear housing - 9. Brake discs - 10. Oil filter (suction) - 11. Pressure check fitting - 12. Sequence valve - 13. Counterpressure valve - 14. Safety solenoid valve for quick decompression of brake piston oil.
4-5
D350

4-6
D350

D350
4-7
4.1.2 MAIN COMPONENTS OF

BRAKE SYSTEM
Pump delivery at maximum speed (2600 rpm) with

engine at maximum power speed (2000 rpm).
Section (1) brake system: 65 l/min
Section (2) fan-drive system: 21.8 l/min
Brake/fan-drive pump
(1, hydraulic circuit)
Pump type .............................................. gear pump
Make .................................. SAUER SUNDSTRAND
Model ................................. PNN 25+8S C041LBD.F
Double gear pump fitted on torque converter housing
cover, one section feeds the brake system and the
other section feeds the fan-drive system.
The arrow indicates the direction of

rotation of the drive shaft and the
delivery side
SUCTION
SUCTION
Sect. 1
2600 RPM
25 CC/REV
65 l/min
Sect. 2
2600 RPM
8.4 CC/REV
21.8 l/min
DELIVERY
DELIVERY
1
P1
P
C
D350R0092
Fig. 4-2 Brake/fan-drive pump

C. Torque converter - P. Brake pump - P1. Equipment pump - 1. Pump section for brake system - 2. Pump section for fandrive system.

4-8
D350
Brake feed valve block

(3, hydraulic brake system)
The feed valve block is installed on the left side under the cab. The valve block can be reached just by
opening the left cover under the cab.
1.
3.
5.
6.
7.
DR
7
Set 25 bar
1
P
Brake pump
Feed valve block
Accumulator (pre-charge at 13 bar)
Pressure relief valve (set at 25 bar)
Directional solenoid valve
2
2
3
6
1
Ports on the block:
PP
F14336
DR.
P.
C.
PP.
1.
2.
Drain
From hydraulic pump
Brakes lubrication
Pressure check fitting
To brake pedal valve
To brake pedal valve
Fig. 4-3
3
6
PP
DR
D350R0091
Fig. 4-4

D350
4-9
Brake pedal valve

(4, hydraulic brake system)
The brake pedal valve is installed at the bottom of the
cab and is operated through direct linkage to the brake
pedal.
Ports on the valve:
P.
DR.
T.
A.
B.
To the brakes (delivery)

To the brakes (drain)
To the housing (return)
To the feed valve block (pos. 1)
From the feed valve (pos. 2).
DR
(M12 x 1,5)
T
(M22 x 1,5)
A
(M16 x 1,5)
P
(M22 x 1,5)
B
(M14 x 1,5)
SM9186
Fig. 4-5 Hydraulic circuit of the valve
DR
D350R0089
Fig. 4-6
B
T
Fig. 4-7
D350R0090

4 - 10
D350
24
10
25
11
P
12
13
14
B
30
20
19
18
17
29
16
15
23
SM9188
33
26
26
28
27
21
24
T
22
31
32
SM9189
Fig. 4-8
Brake pedal valve section
1. Cover - 2. Spring - 3. Spring seat - 4. Piston - 5. Body assy - 6. Push rod - 7. Inner cup - 8. Washer - 9. Spring - 10. Outer
cup - 11. Guide - 12. Push pin - 13. Cover - 14. Cam - 15. Ring - 16. Seal - 17. Piston spring - 18. Piston - 19. Spacer 20. Gasket - 21. Pin - 22. Stop dowel - 23. Spring pin - 24. Seal ring - 25. O-Ring 2.62 x 34.59 - 26. Lock washer 27. Screw M8 x 55 - 28. Screw M8 x 35 - 29. O-Ring 2.62 x 20.29 - 30. O-Ring 2.62 x 18.72 - 31. Sealing washer - 32. Plug
M10 x 1.25 - 33. Screw M8 x 75

D350
4 - 11
Brake oil filters

Delivery filter (2)
The delivery filter of the brake system can be reached
by opening the cover on the left side of the machine
in engine compartment.
It is a full-flow spin-on filter with cartridge replaceable

every 500 operated hours (30 nominal and bypass
valve set at 3.5 bar).
Tightening torque: 4 daNm
D350M0108
Fig. 4-9
Oil delivery filter:
1 - Filter support
2 - Filter cartridge
F - Transmission / torque converter oil filter
SM9171
Fig. 4-10
Oil suction filter
The oil suction filter (Fa) of brakes / clutches circuit
can be reached by opening the right-hand cover.
It is a full-flow spin-on filter, replaceable every 1000
operated hours (150 nominal without bypass valve).
Fa
D350M0155
Fig. 4-11

4 - 12
D350
4 - 13
HYDRAULIC STEERING SYSTEM

Ma
Ls
T
380 +- 5 bar
MB
MA
2
T
2
A
MICROCONTROLLER
D
S
Vp
3
C
Y1
210 + 5
0
14
17
T
A4
K
5 bar
13
12
5 bar
B4
STEERING
SYSTEM
B
D
X1
210 + 5
0
b4
16
PM
A1
TL
PS
B1
b1
40 bar
TR
10
11
(170/350)
5 bar
3
380 10 bar
15
Mp
a1
15
a4
BLADE
SECTION
MLS
LS
P1
Va
P
18
35bar
Fig. 4-12
PR
1,3 - 1,5 bar

2 bar
P2
B 25 75
45bar
D350R0072
C. CONTROL UNIT - D. Equipment / Steering control valve - Ls. Steering control levers - M. Steering hydraulic motor - Ma. Blade control joystick - P. Hydraulic piston pump with variable displacement - Va. Feed valve block - Vp. Steering pilot valve block - S. Oil cooler 1. Steering control spool - 2. Steering spool safety valves - 3. Proportional solenoid valves - 4. Pressure reduction valve (40 bar) - 5. Accumulators - 6. Pressure reduction valve (35 bar) - 7. Feed block solenoid valve - 8. Feed block pressure relief valve (45 bar) - 9. LS line
decompression valve (0.7 l/min) - 10. Load Sensing limiting valve - 11. Pressure relief valve - 12. Blade control spool - 13. Blade spool safety valves - 14. Unloading valve - 15. Pressure compensators - 16. Three-way valve - 17. Pilot valve - 18. Oil return filter.
D350

4 - 14
D350

D350
4.1.3 HYDRAULIC STEERING SYSTEM

The steering and the equipment control circuits are
within one single hydraulic circuit using the same oil.
The two circuits, although they share some hydraulic
components, will be described separately.
The equipment control circuit is described in Section
6 - EQUIPMENT HYDRAULIC SYSTEM.
The two circuits have independent operating pressures:
- steering circuit max. press. 350 5 bar
- equipment circuit max. press. 200 5 bar.
The steering circuit main components are:

- An hydraulic piston pump for steering / equipment
circuits (P)
- An hydraulic motor (M)
- A steering / equipment control valve (D)
- A steering pilot valves block (Vp)
- A feed valve block (Va)
- Two steering control levers (Ls)
- An oil cooler (S)
- A CONTROL UNIT-Microcontroller (C)
The D350 is equipped with a steering differential that

allows a dozer to have continuous power on both
tracks when steering, varying track speed without ever
stopping it. The speed of a track will increase or decrease equally with respect to the other track, without
any power loss in load pushing cycle. This system is
particularly profitable also in finish dozing applications,
specially in restricted areas.
When the operator shifts the steering levers (Ls), their
4 - 15
movement is transformed into an electric signal that

is sent through the CONTROL UNIT (C) to the steering pilot valves block (Vp), that will operate piloting
directly the steering spool (1) of the control valve (D).
The piston pump (P) driven by the torque converter
feeds both the steering and the equipment circuits by
means of the control valve. The regulation of pump
delivery sharing system operates with steering priority logic, through the Load Sensing signal between
control valve and pump.
When the application requires high steering performances, during simultaneous steering and equipment
operation, it will occur that at the pressure of 200 bar,
the pump delivery to the equipment circuit will be nil,
because the delivery will be totally absorbed by the
hydraulic motor. Therefore the advance speed does
not change, because the power that is taken out from
one track is transferred equally to the other track, resulting in a continuous steering without any track stops
and with an exact control of the course. When the
machine is travelling on a straight course without operating the equipment the power is conveyed totally
to the bevel gear and then to the tracks that are kept
at the same speed because the hydraulic motor in
this case is stationary.
If the steering control levers are operated one by one
with transmission in neutral, the hydraulic delivery will
flow (without operating the equipment) completely to
the hydraulic motor. The hydraulic motor tries then to
force the two tracks to move at the same speed (from
0 to 2 km/h) but in relative opposite rotation. Therefore the machine can slue on its own axis with clockwise rotation by shifting the right-hand control lever
only and with anticlockwise rotation by shifting the
left-hand lever only.
An oil cooler (S) on the oil return circuit allows a constant reduction of the hydraulic oil temperature so as
to guarantee an adequate operation of the hydraulic
circuit.

4 - 16
D350

Hydraulic motor
4.1.4 MAIN COMPONENTS OF

STEERING SYSTEM
Make .......................................................REXROTH
Note For following components:

Type ................. fixed displacement A2 FE 180/61W
- Hydraulic piston pump with variable displacement
(P).
- Control valve (D).
- Feed valve block (Va).
Refer to Section 6 - EQUIPMENT HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT in this Manual.
T
3
MA
MB
1
2
A1
B1
Hydraulic motor circuit
D350R0088
Fig. 4-13
A. To control valve steering/equipment - B. To control valve steering/equipment - S. To oil cooler - 1. Hydraulic motor
REXROTH - 2. Seal - 3. Screw 16 x 1.5 x 45.

D350
4 - 17
Steering pilot valve block

(Vp, hydraulic circuit)
Steering control levers
The steering pilot valve block is installed on the lower

ROPS pillar and can be reached by opening the righthand door under the cab.
Hydraulic circuit
Vp.
3.
4.
16.
17.
Pilot valves block

Proportional solenoid valves
Pressure reducing valve. (40 bar)
Three-way valve
Pilot valve.
CONTROL UNIT
Microcontroller
4
S
40 bar
TR
T
TL
16
Vp
PS
B
PM
5 bar
17
T
3
P
D350R0087
Fig. 4-14

4 - 18
D350
Ports on pilot valve block

P.
T.
L.
R.
X.
S.
PM.
PS.
15.
15
From oil feed block

To oil tank
To b1 of control valve
To a1 of control valve
To y1 of control valve
To b4 of control valve
Joystick piloting
Lift piloting
Proportional solenoid valves
PM
PS
T
X
S
R
D350R0085
Fig. 4-15
D350R0086
Fig. 4-16

D350
4 - 19
4.2 FAILURE DIAGNOSIS

4.2.1 DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY
The display is provided with 5 text boxes to show up
the following messages:
5 text fields
A. Indication of operated hours

The engine running hours are indicated for about 1
second when the ignition switch is ON, while the
instrument panel runs a general test. To show again
the engine hours on the display, the operator must
turn the ignition switch OFF and ON again. The
hours will remain on the display with engine
stopped.
SM9191
or
Fig. 4-17
B. Indication of engaged gear + failure code
Failure error E = Error
- The first box indicates the engaged gear

- The second box indicates the letter E when there
is a failure.
Failure code
Engaged gear
1st gear
- The 3rd - 4th - 5th box indicate the failure code that
is of two types.
Failure codes of a single component of the brakes/
clutches and transmission control system (see
table 1).
Failure codes for more than one component (see
table 2).
Failure example
SM9192
Fig. 4-18

4 - 20
D350
When one of the following failure codes appears on

the display, the failed component can be identified
referring to table 1.
TABLE 1
Failed component
Failure
Code
Left proportional solenoid valve coil
001
Right proportional solenoid valve coil
002
Forward speed solenoid "F"
004
Reverse speed solenoid "R"
008
1st speed solenoid
016
3rd speed solenoid
032
Left steering lever solenoid
064
Right steering lever solenoid
128

D350
4 - 21
TABLE 2
Faulty component
Left proportional solenoid
valve coil
Left proport. Right proport. Forward

Reverse
solenoid
solenoid
speed
speed
valve coil
valve coil solenoid "F" solenoid "R"
001
Right proportional solenoid

valve coil
1st speed
solenoid
3rd speed
solenoid
Left steering
Right
lever
steering lever
solenoid
solenoid
003
005
009
017
033
065
129
002
006
010
018
034
066
130
004
012
020
036
068
132
008
024
040
072
136
016
048
080
144
032
096
160
064
192
Forward speed solenoid "F"

Reverse speed solenoid "R"
1st speed solenoid
3rd speed solenoid
128
Failure code reverse speed solenoid "R" = 008

Addition of failure codes on the display
If the failed components are two, make reference to

TABLE 2 where the failure code is defined by the
addition of the two single failure codes indicated in
TABLE 1. For example, the code 024 indicates that
there are two failed components: the cell on top of the
column indicates the 1st speed solenoid, while the
cell to the left indicates reverse speed solenoid "R".
In TABLE 2 the crossing of column and line corre-
Failure code 1st speed solenoid = 016
sponding to the two components, determines the failure code 024 that is the addition of the two single
codes.
Failure code reverse speed "R"
Failure code 1st speed
= 008 +
= 016
Failure code displayed for both
= 024

4 - 22
4.3
D350
CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
4.3.1 CHECK OF HYDRAULIC

WARNING
PRESSURES
The oil pressure of the brake circuit can be checked
connecting a pressure gauge, with engine stopped, to
the fitting on the diagnostic panel (BRAKE) after removal of the relevant plug.
When checking oil pressures in hydraulic circuits, be
sure that the instrument scale is adequate for measuring the pressures to be checked.
Start the engine and move the machine repeatedly in
forward and reverse speed, operating at the same time
the steering controls in order to warm up the oil in the
circuits.
WARNING
Do not run the engine of this machine in closed
areas without enough ventilation for driving away
harmful exhaust-gas emissions.
SPEED
LUBE
SPEED
FORWARD
SPEED
REVERSE
CONVERTER
Before operating the machine or its equipments,

be sure that no person is within the manoeuvring
area of the machine. Make a complete walk-around
inspection of the machine before mounting in
operator's compartment. Sound the horn.
Run the engine at maximum speed (2100 2200 rpm)
and check the relevant pressures that must
correspond to the nominal pressures of the following
table.
Nominal pressures table
Brake pressure
18 22 bar
Hydraulic motor pressure A1
350 5 bar
Hydraulic motor pressure B1
350 5 bar
Piloting pressure a1
30 2 bar
Steering pressure b1
350 5 bar
Equipment pressure b1
200 5 bar
PUMP
BRAKE
D350R0075
Fig. 4-19

D350
Remove the two plugs and connect two pressure

gauges to fittings (A1) and (B1) on the hydraulic motor
(Fig. 4-20).
When checking oil pressures in hydraulic circuits, be
sure that the instrument scale is adequate for measuring the pressures to be checked.
A1
4 - 23
WARNING
Before operating the machine or its equipments,
be sure that no person is within the manoeuvring
area of the machine. Make a complete walk-around
inspection of the machine before mounting in
operator's compartment. Sound the horn.
B1
D350R0077
Fig. 4-20
The pressures (a1) and (b1) (steering and equipment)

can be checked connecting the pressure gauges to
the two fittings of the control valve piloting feed block
(Fig. 4-21). The first fitting shows equipment control
spool piloting pressure, while the second fitting shows
the maximum hydraulic pressure and the maximum
pressure of the steering circuit. Connect two pressure
gauges to these two fittings and proceed to check
pressures.
a1
b1
Fig. 4-21
D350R0078

4 - 24
D350
4.3.2 BRAKE PEDAL ADJUSTMENT

Set the brake pedal (1) at the height of L = 175 mm
from cab floor, operating on the buffer (2).
4
Link tie-rod (3) to the adjustable clevis (4).
Adjust tie rod length (3) to be linked to lever (5) in full

stroke position.
Tighten locknut (6).

Unscrew the buffer (2) to eliminate almost completely
the clearance with the pedal and lock it with the relevant nut.
CAB FLOOR
Depress brake pedal (1) to full stroke taking care to
avoid forcing lever (5) beyond its end of stroke.
Adjust the screw (7) to come in contact with brake
pedal (1).
Release the brake pedal, loosen the screw (7) two

turns and lock the nut.
5
Adjust the contact of the push-rod (9) with the screw

(8), so as to have both brake pedal (1) and push-rod
(9) at end of stroke.
Lock the damper and the push-rod (9) with the two
locknuts (10-11).
D350R0084
Fig. 4-22
4
6
11
9
8
10
Fig. 4-23
D350R0079

D350
4 - 25
4.3.3 CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT OF

BRAKE FEED VALVE BLOCK
(Ref. 3 in hydraulic braking system)
Open the left side cover as indicated in Fig. 4-25 and
connect a pressure gauge (30 bar scale) to the pressure check fitting (PP) on the feed valve block.
Pressure relief valve
Start and run the engine at maximum power

(2100 2200 rpm) and check the pressure setting of
the pressure relief valve that should be 22.5 27.5
bar with an oil delivery of 50 l/min.
If the pressure is not correct, proceed as follows:
1
- Loosen the locknut (2) and turn screw (1) clockwise
or anticlockwise so as to adjust the pressure, setting it at 22.5 27.5 bar.
- Tighten locknut (2).

D350R0080
Fig. 4-24
Left side under cab door

WARNING
Disconnect and connect all fittings with engine
stopped and hydraulic system inactive. Oil escaping under pressure from loose fittings can cause
personal injuries and damages.
Use safety glasses with side shields or goggles.
PP
Quick coupling
for pressure
check
PP
F14340
Fig. 4-25

4 - 26
D350
The following special tools are necessary to carry out

the setting:
4.3.4 STEERING LEVERS SETTING

The setting procedure must be performed on the machine after any replacement or repair involving the
steering levers or the transmission/steering CONTROL
UNIT.
380001471 Cable with setting box

380001303 Instrument BB3.
The setting of the steering levers on the machine can

be made in two different ways.
Either using only the cable (BB3) and the cab controls or using in addition also the instrument (BB3).
From a functional point of view the two procedures

are equivalent, but the procedure that also includes
the use of the instrument (BB3) allows checking the
correctness of the parameters set by the Manufacturer, therefore it is recommended to choose always
this procedure.
4
Cable BB3
Setting box
Cable BB3
CAB
MENU
TEACH
PROC
- F1
ALT
CLEAR ENTER
BB3
F2
D350R0082
Fig. 4-26 Schema di collegamento

A. Setting switch - B. BASE/DSD switch - 1. Plate on cab pillar - 2. Plug - 3. Cab connector - 4. Connector of cable BB3.
(*) For the ROPS version, open the side cover on the left side of operator's compartment to have access to the
CONTROL UNIT compartment.

D350
Levers setting procedure without instrument BB3

Refer to the connection layout illustrated in Fig. 4-26
and proceed as follows:
Remove the plate (1*) from the front left pillar of the
cab and pull out the plug (2) fitted on the electrical
connector (3), then join connector (4) to connector
(3).
ON
4 - 27
1. Arrange the two switches on the setting box as

follows:
Switch A in position "CAL"
Interruttore B in posizione "DSD"
2. Lower safety levers
3. Turn ignition switch to position "ON" (second click
of the key-switch) and "0" will be displayed.
START
ACC.
OFF
H
Ignition key
DISPLAY
D350M0078
Fig. 4-27
4. Press the neutral pushbutton "N" on the arm and

the display will indicate "CAL0".
9.
5. Press again neutral pushbutton "N"; the display

will show "00" and successively "0" (setting of
control levers in neutral position completed).
10. Turn ignition key to position "OFF" and disconnect connector (4) from connector (3).
6. Press neutral pushbutton "N"; the display will show

"CAL1".
Release levers in neutral position (setting of control levers in full stroke position completed).
11. Put plug (2) on connector (3) and install again

plate (1) on the cab pillar.
12. Steering levers setting completed.
7. Move both levers at the same time to full stroke.

8. Keeping levers at full stroke press neutral
pushbutton "N"; "FF" will be displayed and successively "0".

4 - 28
D350
Levers setting procedure with instrument BB3

1. Connect cable BB3 to the machine connector as
illustrated in Fig. 4-26
2. Turn ignition switch to "ON" position (second click).

3. After monitor check, set switch on "CAL".
4. Press key "F1" on BB3.
5. Successively the BB3 display will show: "GO ON
ENTER".
6. Press key ENTER on BB3 (0 setting).
7. Successively the BB3 display will show:
D350R0083
Fig. 4-28
PUT T1 & T2 TO MAX START ENTER..

8. Move both levers to full stroke and keeping them
in this position press ENTER key on BB3.
9. The display shows: ADJUSTED and successively
the window MANNESMANN REXROTH previously
shown after monitor check.
Check of the setting

1. Press key on BB3 identified by an arrow ..
2. The display shows the window INPUT SIGNALS.

3. T / % indicates the stroke of the steering levers.
4. With levers in neutral position T / % should be
zero for both sides (L, R).
5. When the shifting of the levers starts to become
hard it should be 43% 1.
6. At full stroke it should be 100%.

D350
4 - 29

4.4.1 BRAKE PEDAL VALVE
(Removal/Disassembly)
Removal
Disconnect the hoses from the control valve, identify
each hose with a tag indicating location, and remove
the two screws (2) with washers that fix the control
valve to the bracket (3).
Remove the brake valve (1).
4
Disassembly
Remove all fittings and washers, remove the screws
(4) and relevant washers. Remove cover (5) from valve
body.
5
1
3 2
SM9207
Brake pedal valve linkage
Fig. 4-29 Brake pedal valve
Use an appropriate screw ( 4 mm - pitch 0.75 mm)

to remove dowel (9) from the cover, to let shaft (10)
axially free.
1. Brake control valve - 2. Valve fastening screws

M10 x 1.5 - 3. Valve bracket - 4. Upper cover screws M8 x
1.25 - 5. Cover.
Section view of valve cover (5)

Remove plug (7) and sealing washer (8) from cover
(5) in order to have access to the spring pin (23, Fig.
4-31) retaining the cam (14, Fig. 4-31). Pull out the
lever and relevant shaft, using a driver tool. Remove
the square key from the shaft and the relevant seal.
10
5
7
8
On the other side of the valve, remove the screws

(24, Fig. 4-31) from the cover (1). Hold the cover fast
when loosening the last two screws because of the
spring compression. Remove the cover and the
O-Ring, the spring (2) and the cup.
SM9208
Fig. 4-30 Section view of valve cover

6. Lip seal - 7. Plug M10 x 1.25 - 8. Sealing washer
10 x 16 x 1 - 9. Dowel - 10. Shaft.

4 - 30
D350
On the opposite side remove the guide (11), the push

rod (12) and the O-Ring (25), then remove the push
rod assy. (6). Compress the spring (9) and take out
the horseshoe cotter (8), the spacer, the spring (9)
24
and the cup (10). Pull out the ring (15) with the O-Ring
(29), the spring (17) and the shut-off valves, large and
small (18 and 19).
10
25
11
12
13
14
30
20
19
18 17 29
B
15 23
A
SM9188
Fig. 4-31 Section view of brake control valve

1. Cover - 2. Spring - 3. Spring seat - 4. Piston - 5. Body assy - 6. Push rod - 7. Inner cup - 8. Washer - 9. Spring - 10. Outer
cup - 11. Guide - 12. Push pin - 13. Cover - 14. Cam - 15. Ring - 16. Seal - 17. Piston spring - 18. Piston - 19. Spacer 20. Gasket - 23. Spring pin - 24. Cover fastening screw M8 x 75 - 25. O-Ring 2.62 x 34.59 - 29. O-Ring 2.62 x 20.29 30. O-Ring 2.62 x 18.72.

D350
4 - 31
4.4.2 BRAKE HYDRAULIC PUMP

(Removal/Disassembly/Reassembly)
3
The oil to the steering differential circuit is supplied

by the equipment hydraulic pump; for the relevant
disassembly instructions refer to Section 6 - EQUIPMENT HYDRAULIC SYSTEM, in this Manual.
6 7
9
10
Removal
3
To remove the pump from the torque converter cover

it is necessary to:
- tilt the cab and disconnect the piping from the pump
(1).
- remove the fastening screws of the front cover to
the converter housing (C) and take the pump out.
11
C1
1
SM9209
Fig. 4-32 Section view of brake hydraulic pump

C1. Torque value 5 daNm - 1. Pump fastening screw 2. Rear cover - 3. O-Ring - 5. Pump body - 6. Dowel pin 7. Supports - 8. and 9. Pump gears - 10. Key - 11. Front
cover.
Disassembly
The pump components can be split up by removing
the screws (1), the front and rear covers and pulling
out the supports (7) together with the gears (8 and 9).
Parts inspection
WARNING
Never use gasoline or solvents or other flammable fluids to clean parts. Use authorized commercial, non-flammable, non-toxic solvents.
Clean all parts thoroughly and blow them with dry

compressed air.
Inspect the support bushings of the pump gears; replace if they present scores, pitting or excessive wear.
Check if the pump body (5) is worn on the areas facing the gears. Replace damaged parts. Replace the
oil seals.

4 - 32
D350
Reassembly
The reassembly operations are in the opposite order of
disassembly. Lubricate the inner parts generously and
make sure that the gears (8 and 9, Fig. 4-32) run free
without jamming.
Install the pump on the converter cover spreading the
matching surfaces with sealing compound.
Install the piping.
P
C
D350R0098
Fig. 4-33 Torque converter cover

C. Converter cover - P. Brake pump.

D350
4 - 33
4.4.3 BRAKES AND STEERING

ON
DIFFERENTIAL
Removal (Preliminary operations)
OFF
T
NO ATE
DO PER
O
Before starting any service operation on the machine,

turn main switch to position "OFF" and put a warning
board in the cab on the ignition key "DO NOT OPERATE".
WARNING
Make sure that the lifting cables/chains are fixed
to a point that is strong enough to lift the load.
Keep all persons far from the fixing point, the cables or the chains.
D350R0100
Fig. 4-34
Drain completely the fuel tank, opening the cock (R).

Fuel tank capacity: 675 litres.
Disconnect the fuel feed pipe to the injection pump
and remove the four screws that fasten the tank to
the machine frame.
Hold the tank up by means of a hoisting tackle hooked
to the lifting eyes (A). Remove the screws that fasten
the fuel tank to the hydraulic tank (not necessary to
remove).
R
WARNING
D350R0101
Avoid twisting chains or steel ropes. Always wear

safety gloves when handling steel ropes or chains.
Fig. 4-35
A
Remove the fuel tank.
D350R0102
Fig. 4-36

4 - 34
D350
Drain the oil from the rear housing, removing the plugs
from the rear bottom of the machine, emptying the
housing completely (oil capacity: 175 litres).
Remove the track chain as described in SECTION 5
- TRACK CHAIN, of this Manual.
Remove the final drives as described in SECTION 3
- FINAL DRIVES, of this Manual.
Remove the cab as described in the OPERATION
AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
D350R0103
Fig. 4-37
Remove the piping (1) passing over the rear housing

and connecting the hydraulic motor (2). Then remove
the hydraulic motor. Remove the piping support (5)
and the three inspection covers (3, 4, 6).
2
1
3
6
4
D350R0104
Fig. 4-38

D350
4 - 35
Removal of right-hand module

C
Remove the 12 outer screws (C) fastening the brake/

differential group to the rear housing.
D350R0105
Fig. 4-39
Fit qty. 3 screws into the threaded holes provided for
pulling out the brakes/differential group.
WARNING
Lift and handle heavy items with lifting means of
suitable capacity. Make sure the load is held up
by suitable slinging and hooks.
D350R0106
WARNING
Handle all parts with great care. Do not put hands
or fingers between one part and the other. Wear
authorized safety equipment such as safety
glasses, heavy gloves and safety shoes.
Fig. 4-40
Install the special tool as illustrated in Fig. 4-41 and

pull the brakes/differential group out of the rear
housing.
Place the brakes/differential group on a stand with
suitable supports for parts disassembly.
D350R0107
Fig. 4-41

4 - 36
D350
After pulling the brakes/differential assembly out of

the rear housing by means of lifting hooks, remove
the 3 O-Rings indicated in the illustration because they
could be damaged during the disassembly operations
of the various parts.
WARNING
Wear authorized safety equipment such as safety
D350R0108
Fig. 4-42
Removal of the ring gear
A
Remove the snap ring A and the ring gear support B.
D350R0109
Fig. 4-43
Remove the snap ring from the ring gear groove.
D350R0110
Fig. 4-44
Split the assembly by removing the support from the
ring gear.
D350R0111
Fig. 4-45

D350
4 - 37
Disassembled parts of the ring gear group

1. Ring gear
2. Snap ring
3. Snap ring
4. Ring gear support
Thoroughly clean and wash the disassembled parts.

WARNING
2
3
D350R0112
Fig. 4-46
WARNING
Disassembly of planetary carrier assy.

Remove the snap ring as illustrated.
D350R0113
Fig. 4-47
Pull the planetary carrier assy. out using a tackle with
lifting hooks as illustrated.
D350R0114
Fig. 4-48
Disassembly of planetary carrier differential
assy.
Remove the snap rings as illustrated.
D350R0115
Fig. 4-49

4 - 38
D350
Successively, pull out the pins and all parts of the

planetary carrier group, paying particular attention to
the ball retainers of the pins.
D350R0116
Disassembled parts of the planetary carrier assy.

1. Planetary carrier
2. Pin - qty. 3
3. Planetary gear - qty. 3
4. Needle-roller cage - qty. 3
5. Thrust plate - qty. 6
6. Ball - qty. 3
7. Snap ring - qty. 3
Fig. 4-50
1
4
3
5
WARNING
D350R0117
Fig. 4-51
WARNING
Disassembly of twin sun gear

Remove the snap ring as illustrated.
D350R0118
Fig. 4-52
Pull the bearing out of the shaft assy.
D350R0119
Fig. 4-53

D350
4 - 39
Remove the spacer.
D350R0120
Fig. 4-54
Pull the twin sun gear out of the brake assy. using a
tackle with lifting hooks as illustrated.
D350R0121
Fig. 4-55
Remove the snap ring from the twin sun gear.
D350R0122
Fig. 4-56
Pull the bearing out of the sun gear.
D350R0123
Fig. 4-57

4 - 40
D350
Disassembly of brakes assy.

Remove the fastening screws (qty. 12) of the pressure plate to the brakes assy. and remove the pressure plate.
D350R0124
Fig. 4-58
Remove the discs from the outer drum, paying attention to keep the same sequence when reassembling.
D350R0125
Fig. 4-59
WARNING
Remove the 6 screws to allow the extraction of the

splined hub.
D350R0126
Fig. 4-60
Pull the planetary carrier splined hub out of the outer
drum.
D350R0129
Fig. 4-61

D350
4 - 41
WARNING
Remove the bearing retainer snap ring from the splined

hub and then use a puller to extract the bearings together with the two spacers.
D350R0127
Fig. 4-62
Disassembled parts of the splined hub.
1
2
3
4
6
5
WARNING
D350R0128

Fig. 4-63
1. Tothhed hub - 2. Bearing - 3. Inner spacer - 4. Outer
spacer - 5. Bearing retaing ring - 6. Circlip.
Turn the drum assembly upside-down and proceed to

disassemble the parts.
Remove fastening screws.
D350R0130
Fig. 4-64
Tighten two eyebolts to the outer plate as illustrated
and remove the outer plate using a tackle provided
with lifting sling.
D350R0131
Fig. 4-65

4 - 42
D350
Remove the 16 brake release springs from the piston.
D350R0132
Fig. 4-66
Pull the piston out of the brake drum.
D350R0133
Fig. 4-67
Remove the O-Ring from the drum rim.
D350R0134
Fig. 4-68
Remove the two O-Rings from the piston.
D350R0140
Fig. 4-69
Remove the 8 screws that fasten the bearing retainer
to the plate.
D350R0135
Fig. 4-70

D350
4 - 43
Separate the bearing retainer from the plate.

All disassembled parts of the brake drum assembly
must be thoroughly cleaned.
Disassembled parts of the brake drum assembly

1. Brake drum
2. Outer plate
3. Thrust plate
4. Bearing retainer
5. Piston
6. Springs qty. 16
D350R0136
Fig. 4-71
5
WARNING
2
1
6
D350R0137
Repeat the same disassembly procedure for the left

brake unit.
Fig. 4-72
Reassembly of the brake drum assy.

WARNING
Assemble the bearing retainer to the plate, making
sure that the bearing retainer holes are centred with
the plate holes.
D350R0138
Fig. 4-73
WARNING
Never use fingers to centre holes or slots: always
use an appropriate guide stud.
Insert the screws and relevant washers with the aid

of a guide stud and tighten with torque wrench at 11
daNm.
Note Take out residual grease and clean the sealing
surfaces, eliminating all debris or marks and successively apply a thin coat of oil taking care not to smear
the other parts with oil.
D350R0135
Fig. 4-74

4 - 44
D350
Insert the O-Ring into the drum rim.

D350R0139
Fig. 4-75
Insert the outer O-Rings into the piston grooves.
WARNING
D350R0140
Fig. 4-76
Turn the piston upside-down and assemble the plate
complete with O-Ring.
D350R0133
Fig. 4-77
Insert the 16 springs in the relevant seats on the
piston.
D350R0132
Fig. 4-78

D350
4 - 45
WARNING
Tighten two eyebolts to the outer plate as illustrated
and, using a tackle with lifting slings, lift the plate and
place it upon the piston assembly. When fastening,
guide the plate for a correct insertion.
D350R0131
Fig. 4-79
Note Pay attention, when reassembling, to the lubrication holes of the thrust plate that must be centred
with the lubrication holes of the piston, so as to match
the dowel pin on the piston assembly.
Firstly, install 3 longer screws so as to catch the piston and compress the springs.
Successively insert the other screws and remove the
three longer ones.
Insert the remaining screws and tighten them all to a
torque value of 11 daNm.
D350R0130
Fig. 4-80
WARNING
Turn the assembly upside-down to prepare it for assembling the splined hub and the discs pack.
D350R0141
Fig. 4-81
Assemble the parts on the hub in the following order:

bottom bearing, spacers, top bearing, snap ring.
D350R0127
Fig. 4-82
Insert the splined hub into the brake drum complete
with bearings.
Prepare the discs pack for reassembly.
Note Refer to paragraph 4.4.4 for check procedure
of discs pack.
D350R0142
Fig. 4-83

4 - 46
D350
Introduce the discs into the drum until the discs pack
is complete, paying attention to keeping the discs in
the same order arrangement found during disassembly.
D350R0143
Fig. 4-84
Connect an hydraulic pump, with at least 30 40 bar
pressure capacity, complete with hose and fitting to
the threaded feed hole. Operate the pump up to a pressure of 20 25 bar so as to overcome the pressure of
the inner springs, thus allowing the discs to move to
the bottom.
Fitting
D350R0144
Fig. 4-85
Keep the piston under pressure and assemble the remaining discs and the thrust plate onto the drum.
Install the 12 screws complete with washers and
tighten to a torque of 11 daNm.
D350R0145
Fig. 4-86
Reassembly of the twin sun gear
Use a bearing installation tool to introduce the bearing into the sun gear.
D350R0123
Fig. 4-87

D350
4 - 47
Assemble the bearing retainer snap ring.
D350R0122
Fig. 4-88
Using a tackle with lifting slings, fit the twin sun gear
onto the brake assy.
D350R0121
Fig. 4-89
Insert the spacer.
D350R0120
Fig. 4-90
Insert the bearing.
D350R0119
Fig. 4-91

4 - 48
D350
WARNING
Always wear approved individual protective devices such as helmet, safety glasses, gloves and
safety shoes.
Insert the bearing retaing circlip.
D350R0118
Fig. 4-92
Reassembly of the planet carrier assembly
Lubrificate freely the components, the gear, the pin,
spring and needles.
1
4
Exploded view of planet carrier assembly:

1. Planet carrier
2. Pin q.ty 3
3. Planet - q.ty 3
4. Needle cage - q.ty 3
5. Thrust ring - q.ty 6
6. Ball - q.ty 3
7. Circlip - q.ty 3
3
5
D350R0117
Fig. 4-93
Insert the pins and all the parts of the planet carrier
goup, pay special attention to balls (6) securing pins
(2).
D350R0116
Fig. 4-94
Install the pin retaining circlips in their seats.
D350R0115
Fig. 4-95

D350
4 - 49
Using a tackle with lifting slings as illustrated, lift and

couple the planetary carrier assy. with the brake drum.
WARNING
D350R0114
Fig. 4-96
WARNING
Lock the unit with the snap ring as illustrated.
D350R0113
Fig. 4-97
Reassembly and installation of the ring gear
assy.
Disassembled parts
1. Planetary ring gear
2. Snap ring
3. Snap ring
4. Ring gear support
2
3
D350R0112
Fig. 4-98
Assemble the support into the ring gear.
D350R0111
Fig. 4-99

4 - 50
D350
Insert the snap ring into the ring gear groove.
WARNING
D350R0110
Fig. 4-100
Introduce the ring gear support (A) into the rear housing and insert the snap ring (B) into the proper groove,
using a snap ring pliers.
Reassembly of brakes/steering differential unit into

the rear housing.
D350R0146
Fig. 4-101
Put the three O-Rings into their seats on the brake

module.
WARNING
D350R0108
WARNING
Fig. 4-102

Lift the brakes/steering differential unit by means of a
tackle equipped with the special tool as illustrated.
D350R0147
WARNING
Fig. 4-103
Clean the unit thoroughly in correspondence of

the contact surfaces with the rear housing.
Lubricate adequately the parts of the unit and the rear
housing that are in mutual contact.
Insert two guide studs into the rear housing in order

to facilitate the installation of the brakes/steering unit.
D350R0148
Fig. 4-104

D350
4 - 51
WARNING
Draw the brakes/steering unit near to the rear housing
very carefully in order to prevent any damages to the
components.
D350R0107
Make sure the gears are meshing together correctly.

Fig. 4-105
Install some screws and tighten them progressively

so as to allow an adequate settling of the brake unit.
D350R0106
Fig. 4-106
Remove the two studs, install the remaining screws

C2 and tighten progressively and crosswise, to guarantee an even fastening (screws C2, torque value: 11
daNm).
C2
For reassembly operations, refer to paragraph 4.4.3

(preliminary operations), reversing the illustrated procedure.
D350R0149
Fig. 4-107
Repeat the reassembly of the left-hand brakes unit
following the same sequence as has been described
for the right-hand brake unit.
Note Before fitting the left-hand brake unit to the
bevel gear shaft, insert the spacer (refer to section
view illustrated in the following page).

4 - 52
D350
D350R0150
Fig. 4-108

D350
4 - 53
4.4.4 CHECK AND INSPECTION OF

BRAKE DISCS PACK
Check the maximum warping of each disc (2) of the
discs pack; it must be less than 0.03 mm. Check also
the driven discs (1) conditions:
- the maximum thickness difference between the surfaces of sintered material cannot be more than 0.05
mm;
- the abovementioned surfaces should not have abnormal wear, due usually to foreign material contained in the oil or operating conditions with dry discs
or pitted areas;
After completion of the above checks, assemble each

discs pack (A) (8 driven discs and 7 driving discs)
into the drum and check the total pack thickness (A)
that should be 47.5 0.5 mm under an hydraulic press
force of 294 392 daN. In case of insufficient thickness, add one or more driving discs of normal or thinner type from the side indicated by the arrow.
A
qty. 8 driven discs
(sintered)
47.5 0.5 mm
P = 300 400 Kg
294 392 daN
qty. 7 driving discs (steel)

D350R0151
Fig. 4-109
DETERMINATION AND CHECK OF BRAKE

DISCS PACK
Take dimension A with an hydraulic press force P,

selecting suitable disc thickness (1 and 2).
A
D350R0152
Fig. 4-110
Quantity of brake discs and thickness
1 - Driven (sintered) ................................................................................... Qty. 8 discs, thickness: 3.8 3.9 mm
2 - Driving (steel) ........................................................................................ Qty. 7 discs, thickness 2.1 2.4 mm

4 - 54
D350
4.4.5 SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

(Removal/Disassembly)
Removal of left-hand support
WARNING
D350R0153
Remove the fuel tank as previously described in this

manual. Remove the hydraulic motor as illustrated.
Fig. 4-111
Remove all internal piping bound to the left-hand support.
D350R0154
Fig. 4-112
Remove the fitting indicated in Fig. 4-113 because it

would prevent pulling the support out of its seat.
D350R0155
Fig. 4-113

D350
4 - 55
Remove the screws fastening the left-hand support

to the rear housing.
WARNING
D350R0156
WARNING
Fig. 4-114
Hook the support to a suitable lifting tackle equipped

with lifting hooks fit for the load to be taken, and pull
the group out of the rear housing as illustrated. Place
the support onto a suitable overhaul stand.
D350R0157
Fig. 4-115
Removal of right-hand support

Remove the screws fastening the right-hand support
to the rear housing. Disconnect the pipe C.
C
Fig. 4-116
D350R0158

4 - 56
D350
WARNING
WARNING
D350R0159
Fig. 4-117
Lift the support and take it out of the rear housing,

and at the same time pull the linking shaft out as
illustrated.

D350
4 - 57
DISASSEMBLY OF STEERING DIFFERENTIAL

SUPPORTS
Disassembly of left-hand support
WARNING
Place the left-hand steering differential support onto
a suitable overhaul stand.
D350R0426
Fig. 4-118
Remove the 6 mounting screws of the central pinion

support and pull the support out. Remove the shims
indicated in the illustration.
D350R0427
Fig. 4-119
Remove the O-Ring from the groove on the support.
D350R0428
Fig. 4-120

4 - 58
D350
WARNING
Remove the gear A and then the gear B together with

the support. Pull gear B out of the support using 2
screws fitted into the threaded holes as illustrated.
When pulling the supports out of the gears pay attention to the adjusting shims of pinion and spur gears
lash.
A
B
D350R0429
Fig. 4-121
Disassembly of left-hand differential gear

Use tool 380000949 to carry out this operation.
Remove the crimps on the bearing retainer hexagonal
ring nut and remove the ring nut using a torque wrench.
D350R0430
Fig. 4-122

D350
4 - 59
Use an hydraulic press to extract the gear together

with the shaft top bearing. Remove the existing shims
and the spacer.
D350R0431
Fig. 4-123
Remove the bottom bearing with a puller.
D350R0432
Fig. 4-124
Disassembled parts of left-hand differential gear

4
3
1
Complete the disassembly removing the tapered bearings outer races from the twin gear.
2
6
D350R0433
Fig. 4-125
1. Left-hand twin gear (complete of bearings outer races) 2. Bearing - 3. Shaft - 4. Hexagonal ring nut - 5. Shims 6. Drilled spacer.

4 - 60
D350
Disassembly of right-hand differential gear

Use tool 380000949 to carry out this operation.
Remove the crimps on the bearing retainer hexagonal
ring nut and remove the ring nut using a torque wrench.
D350R0434
Fig. 4-126
Remove the spur gear.
D350R0435
Fig. 4-127
Use an hydraulic press to pull support and top bearing together out of the shaft and then remove the bearings preload adjusting shims and relevant spacer.
D350R0436
Fig. 4-128
Complete the disassembly pulling the bottom bearing
and the bearings outer races out of the support.
2
1
Disassembled parts of right-hand differential gear

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Bearing retainer
Right-hand gear
Bearing
Shaft
Ring nut
Bearing outer races
Non-drilled spacer
Shims.
5
4
3
3
8
Fig. 4-129
6
7
D350R0437

D350
4 - 61
Disassembly of right-hand support

WARNING
Place the left-hand steering differential support, by

means of lifting hooks, onto a suitable overhaul stand.
Remove the mounting screws from the gear support.
Introduce 2 screws in the threaded holes as illustrated
and pull the support out.
D350R0438
Fig. 4-130
Disassembly of right-hand support gear

Refer to the instructions related to the illustration.

4 - 62
D350
Disassembly of steering differential pinion

Place the steering differential pinion support group on
tool 380000949 and, after removing the crimps on the
ring nut, remove the ring nut as illustrated using tool
A and its guide B.
D350R0439
Fig. 4-131
Use an hydraulic press to pull the pinion shaft out of

the top bearing.
D350R0440
Fig. 4-132

D350
4 - 63
Remove the spacer and the existing shims.
D350R0441
Fig. 4-133
WARNING
Remove the support from the pinion complete with

bearing.
D350R0442
Fig. 4-134
Use a puller to remove the bottom bearing and complete disassembly removing the bearings outer races
remained in the support.
D350R0443
Fig. 4-135
Reassembly of steering differential pinion
The reassembly of the steering differential pinion complete with support is in the reverse order of the disassembly, with following supplements:
- warm up the bottom bearing before installation at a
temperature of 100C, using a suitable heating device.
- tighten the pinion ring nut to a torque of 100 110
daNm.
- after completion of pinion bearings preload (refer to
paragraph 4.4.7) crimp the ring nut with a calking
chisel on both sides of the pinion.

4 - 64
D350
4.4.6 SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

(Reassembly/Installation)
4
Reassembly of differential left-hand gear

Disassembled parts of differential left-hand gear.
1
3
2
5
6
D350R0433
Fig. 4-136
WARNING
Wear protective gloves when handling parts to
avoid hand injuries caused by heat.
1. Left-hand twin gear (complete of bearings outer races) 2. Bearing - 3. Shaft - 4. Hexagonal ring nut - 5. Shims 6. Drilled spacer.
Warm the half bearing at a temperature of approximately 110C.
D350R0179
Fig. 4-137
Fit the half bearing on the shaft.
D350R0432
Fig. 4-138

D350
4 - 65
Press fit the two bearings outer races onto the twin
gear.
D350R0447
Fig. 4-139
Install the twin gear on the shaft provided with bearing.
D350R0448
Fig. 4-140
Successively, insert the spacer and relevant adjusting shims as illustrated.
D350R0446
Fig. 4-141
Press fit the front bearing onto the shaft using the
bearing guide tool 380000956.
D350R0449
Fig. 4-142

4 - 66
D350
Tighten the ring nut to a torque of 100 daNm. Use the

stand 380000949.
D350R0430
Fig. 4-143
Check torque reaction; admitted value: 0.05 0.07
daNm.
D350R0450
Fig. 4-144
If the torque reaction measured value is not correct,

remove the ring nut and select shims conveniently,
then crimp the ring nut with a calking chisel on both
sides of the shaft.

D350
4 - 67
Reassembly of differential right-hand gear

2
5
4
3
3
8
6
7
D350R0437
Fig. 4-145
WARNING
Wear protective gloves when handling parts to
avoid hand injuries caused by heat.
1. Bearings retainer - 2. Right-hand gear - 3. Bearing 4. Shaft - 5. Ring nut - 6. Bearing outer races - 7. Nondrilled spacer - 8. Shims.
D350R0179
Fig. 4-146

4 - 68
D350
Use the stand 380000949.

Fit the bearing onto the shaft as illustrated, meeting
the abutment.
D350R0451
Fig. 4-147
Install the bearing retainer.
D350R0436
Fig. 4-148
Insert the shims pack and relevant spacer.
D350R0452
Fig. 4-149
Press fit the second front bearing onto the shaft using the bearing guide tool 380000956.
D350R0453
Fig. 4-150

D350
4 - 69
Successively, install the spur gear.
D350R0435
Fig. 4-151
Tighten the ring nut to a torque of 100 daNm.
D350R0454
Fig. 4-152
Check torque reaction; admitted value: 0.05 0.07
daNm.
If the torque reaction measured value is not correct,
remove the ring nut and select shims conveniently,
then crimp the ring nut with a calking chisel on both
sides of the shaft.
D350R0455
Fig. 4-153
Reassembly of right-hand gear support

Refer to the sequence described for reassembly of
differential right-hand gear (see relevant description
in paragraph Reassembly of differential right-hand
gear).

4 - 70
D350
Reassembly of steering differential left-hand

support
WARNING
Place the steering differential left-hand support on a

stand.
D350R0456
Fig. 4-154
Firstly insert 2 studs to facilitate the installation of
the support with larger diameter, then assemble the
shims previously removed and successively, install
the support complete with gears tapping it with a lead
hammer.
Tighten the mounting screws to a torque of 11 daNm.
WARNING
It is dangerous to strike hardened steel parts with
anything other than a soft iron or non-ferrous hammer. When removing or installing these parts, always wear safety goggles or safety glasses with
side shields, heavy gloves, etc. to reduce injury
hazards.
D350R0457
Fig. 4-155
Reassemble the other gear proceeding in a similar

way.
Insert the O-Ring in its seat on the support.
D350R0458
Fig. 4-156

D350
4 - 71
Consequently, place the bevel gears lash adjusting

shims.
WARNING
D350R0459

Fig. 4-157
Using a lifting device, insert the bevel pinion group

into the support seat and then tighten the 6 screws to
a torque of 11 daNm.
D350R0460
Note For the adjustment procedure of the steering bevel gears (bearings preload shims for torque
reaction, backlash adjustment) refer to paragraph
4.4.8 in this Section.
Fig. 4-158

4 - 72
D350
Reassembly of steering differential right-hand

support
Place the steering differential right-hand support on a
stand.
Firstly insert 2 studs to facilitate the installation of
the support, then assemble the shims previously removed and successively, install the support complete
with gears tapping it with a lead hammer.
Tighten the mounting screws to a torque of 11 daNm.
WARNING
hazards.
D350R0463
Fig. 4-159

D350
4 - 73
WARNING
WARNING
Installation of right-hand support

Using suitable lifting hooks, install the right-hand support into the relevant seat on the rear housing, paying
attention to join the shaft A correctly as illustrated.
D350R0160
Fig. 4-160
After having thoroughly cleaned the matching surfaces

of the cover and the rear housing, apply a coat of
LOCTITE 518 or similar sealing compound. Fasten
the support to the rear housing tightening the relevant
screws to a torque of 11 daNm. Connect the lubrication pipe B to the fitting C as illustrated.
C
B
D350R0161
Fig. 4-161

4 - 74
D350
Installation of left-hand support
WARNING
glasses, heavy gloves and safety shoes.WARNING
WARNING
Using suitable lifting hooks, introduce the left-hand

support into the rear housing.
D350R0157
Fig. 4-162
Apply a coat of LOCTITE 518 to the matching surfaces and fasten the support to the rear housing, tightening the screws to a torque of 11 daNm.
D350R0156
Fig. 4-163
Connect all piping to the relevant fittings as illustrated.
D350R0162
Fig. 4-164

D350
4 - 75
4.4.7 ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING PINION

BEARING PRELOAD
1. Join the pinion (5) complete with bearing (6) to the
support (1) complete with half bearings (3) and insert the spacer (4).
2. Install the dial gauge 380000947 on the bevel pinion, tightening it to a torque of 0.1 daNm. Measure
dimension X with the probe, then remove the dial
gauge and introduce a shims pack of the measured value X (refer to detail A) plus 0.07 0.1 mm.
Install the bearing (7) and the ring nut (2).
3. Tighten the ring nut to a torque of 100 110
daNm.
D350R0444
Fig. 4-165
4. Check the torque reaction at the ring nut that should
be 0.08 0.1 daNm.
5. Lock the ring nut with a crimp
Detail A
1
2
3
4
Dial gauge
Gauge
probe
Support
6
Support level
Spacer level
Spacer
3
5
Fig. 4-166
D350R0445

4 - 76
D350
4.4.8 ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING

BEVEL GEAR
Adjust bearings preload following the steps described
here below:
B. After having preloaded the bevel gear shafts bearings, as per point (A), adjust the position of the
bevel pinion support, by means of the shims (3),
until the bevel pinion/gear tooth contact corresponds to the indications illustrated in detail (E).
A. Select shims packs (1 and 2) suitable for getting a

torque reaction of the bevel gear shafts (with bevel
pinion removed) equivalent to 0.05 0.07 daNm.
Detail E
1/4L
3/8L-1/2L
1/8L
1/2L
6
4
5
D350R0461
Fig. 4-167 Section view of the steering bevel gear group

1. Spacer - 2. Spacer - 3. Adjusting shims - 4. Gear adjusting shims - 5. Adjusting shims - 6. Differential gear pin - 7. Bearing
retainer.

D350
4 - 77
C. After achieving the tooth contact specified in point

(B), share out the shims (4) and (5) between the
gear supports (6) and (7) in order to get a bevel
pinion/gear backlash of 0.25 0.33 mm. Check
again the tooth contact and the bevel gear shaft
bearings preload, to confirm the correspondence
with the specifications described in points (A) and
(B).
D. Check the total torque reaction measured at the
pinion that should be equivalent to 0.13 0.17
daNm.
D350R0462
Fig. 4-168

4 - 78
D350
4.4.9 BEVEL GEAR

(Removal/Disassembly of bevel pinion
and gear)
Pinion removal
Preliminary operations:
WARNING
WARNING
Removal
Remove the cab as described in the OPERATION
AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
Remove the fuel tank, as described in SEZ. 6 - EQUIPMENT HYDRAULIC SYSTEM of this manual.
Remove the transmission group, as described in SEZ.
2 - TRANSMISSION of this manual.
Drain the oil from the rear housing, removing the plug
located at the bottom as described in paragraph 4.4.3.
Remove the final drives and the brake modules, as
indicated at paragraph 4.4.3 of this section.
Successively, proceed as follows:

- Remove the mounting screws of the pinion group.
D350R0163
Fig. 4-169

D350
4 - 79
Introduce 3 screws into the holes illustrated and tighten

to get free the adjusting shims located at the rear part
of the pinion cover.
D350R0164
Fig. 4-170
Set the shims apart after removal.
WARNING
D350R0165
Fig. 4-171
Pull the pinion cover out using the 3 puller screws.
D350R0166
Fig. 4-172
Remove the lip seal, indicated by the arrow, from the
pinion cover.
D350R0167
Fig. 4-173

4 - 80
D350
Remove the lubrication pipe of the pinion bearing as

illustrated.
D350R0168
Fig. 4-174
Using a tackle provided with suitable lifting hooks,

pull the pinion group out.
Use 2 guide studs to facilitate this operation.
D350R0169
Fig. 4-175

D350
4 - 81
Pinion disassembly
After removing the pinion group from the rear housing, lock it on a stand and proceed removing the Allen
screws located on the ring nut.
D350R0170
Fig. 4-176
Fit the special tool, as illustrated in Fig. 4-177, to the
pinion ring nut and remove the ring nut.
D350R0171
Fig. 4-177
Remove the drilled spacer as illustrated in Fig. 4-178.
D350R0172
Fig. 4-178

4 - 82
D350
Use the special tool illustrated in Fig. 4-179 for pulling

the pinion out of the support.
D350R0173
Fig. 4-179
Remove the top bearing.
WARNING
D350R0174
Fig. 4-180
Use a tackle equipped with lifting hooks and remove

the support from the pinion as illustrated.
D350R0175
Fig. 4-181
Remove the spacer.
D350R0176
Fig. 4-182

D350
4 - 83
Remove the relevant adjusting shims.
D350R0177
Fig. 4-183
Use a bearing guide tool and remove the bottom bearing with an hydraulic press.
Complete the disassembly by pulling the outer races

of the tapered roller bearings out of the pinion support.
Reassembly of bevel pinion

WARNING
D350R0178
Fig. 4-184
D350R0179
Fig. 4-185

4 - 84
D350
Install the half bearing onto the pinion.
D350R0180
Fig. 4-186
Install the adjusting shims.
D350R0177
Fig. 4-187
Install the bearing spacer.
D350R0176
Fig. 4-188
Prepare the bearing retainer, introducing the bearing
outer races.
Use an hydraulic press to facilitate the fitting.
D350R0181
Fig. 4-189

D350
4 - 85
Assemble support and pinion.
SM9240
Fig. 4-190
D350R0179
Fig. 4-191
Lubricate the half bearing with clean oil and fit it into
the relevant outer race.
WARNING
hazards.
D350R0074
Fig. 4-192
Install the drilled spacer as illustrated.
D350R0172
Fig. 4-193

4 - 86
D350
Position the bevel pinion ring nut.
D350R0093
Fig. 4-194
Lock the bevel pinion group on a stand and tighten
the ring nut to a torque of 100 110 daNm.
WARNING
D350R0171
Fig. 4-195
Tighten the Allen screws on the upper part of the ring

nut as illustrated.
Installation of the bevel pinion

D350R0170
WARNING
Fig. 4-196
Lubricate all contacting surfaces of the pinion.

Arrange the bevel pinion unit for installation to the
rear housing, using a tackle and a lifting hook.
Use two guiding screws to facilitate the installation.
D350R0094
Fig. 4-197

D350
4 - 87

Install the bevel pinion unit, complete with cover, onto

the rear housing, after replacing all O-Rings and existing seals.
Tighten the mounting screws M16 x 70 to a torque of
28 daNm and the three screws M10 x 35 to a torque
of 6.5 daNm.
D350R0163
Fig. 4-198
Adjust the bevel pinion position as described in paragraphs 4.4.10 and 4.4.11.

4 - 88
D350
Disassembly of bevel gear

Lock the bevel gear to the rear housing, so as to prevent it from either turning or falling accidentally when
pulling the bevel gear shaft out.
During this process, the serviceman must leave at
least 2 screws fastening the bevel gear to the shaft.
D350R0095
Fig. 4-199
Remove the mounting screws of the right-hand bearing retainer of the bevel gear shaft.
D350R0096
Fig. 4-200
Repeat the same procedure for the left-hand bearing
retainer.
D350R0097
Fig. 4-201

D350
4 - 89
Install 2 guiding studs in the holes indicated by the

arrows and pull the right-hand bearing retainer out using
2 screws as puller tool.
D350R0099
Fig. 4-202
Also remove the relevant adjusting shims, noting down

the dimension of the shims pack.
D350R0076
Fig. 4-203
Repeat the same procedure for the left-hand bearing
retainer.
Pull the left-hand bearing out using a bridge type puller

with separator.
D350R0418
Fig. 4-204

4 - 90
D350
Hold the bevel gear shaft with a lifting device. Remove the 2 screws fastening the gear to the shaft
that were previously left.
D350R0419
Fig. 4-205
Using the special tool illustrated in Fig. 4-206, pull the

shaft complete with bearing out of the right-hand side
of the rear housing.
Complete disassembly by pulling the right-hand bearing out using a puller tool.
D350R0420
Fig. 4-206
Remove the bevel gear from the rear housing.

D350
4 - 91
Bevel gear reassembly

Introduce the bevel gear into the rear housing and
lock it to the rear housing as illustrated.
D350R0421
Fig. 4-207
Using the special tool illustrated in Fig. 4-208, introduce the bevel gear shaft through the right-hand side
of the rear housing.
Provisionally, fix the bevel gear to the shaft using some

finger tightened screws and then remove the bevel
gear supporting device.
D350R0420
Fig. 4-208
Warm the right-hand bearing at a temperature of approximately 110C and then fit the bearing onto the
shaft, meeting the abutment.
D350R0179
Fig. 4-209

4 - 92
D350
Follow the same procedure for the left-hand bearing.
Prepare 2 shim packs with the dimensions previously

noted down during disassembly and install the shim
packs on the two shaft ends, respectively.
Use 2 guiding studs for the installation of the 2 bevel

gear shaft supports and tap the supports into the housing with a lead hammer.
Pull the 2 guiding studs out and tighten all mounting
screws to a torque of 11 daNm.
Fit the remaining screws to the bevel gear tightening

to a torque of 60 daNm.
D350R0422
Fig. 4-210
Carry out the bevel gear shaft bearings preload procedure with bevel pinion removed as described in point
A of paragraph 4.4.10.

D350
4 - 93
4.4.10 PROCEDURE FOR BEVEL GEAR

ADJUSTMENT
Adjust bearings preload following the steps described
here below:
A. Select shims packs (1 and 2) suitable for getting a
torque reaction of the bevel gear shaft (with bevel
pinion removed) equivalent to 0.3 0.5 daNm.
B. After having preloaded the bearings, as per point
(A), adjust the position of the bevel pinion support
(3), by means of the shims (4), until the bevel pinion/gear tooth contact corresponds to the indications illustrated in detail E.
C. After achieving the tooth contact specified in point

(B), share out the shims (1) between the gear retainers (5) and (6) in order to get a bevel pinion/
gear backlash of 0.25 0.33 mm. Check again
the tooth contact and the bevel gear shaft bearings preload, to confirm they comply with the specifications described in points (A) and (B).
D. Check the total torque reaction measured at the
pinion, that should be equivalent to 0.5 0.8 daNm.
Detail E
1/4L
3/8L-1/2L
1/8L
5
1
1/2L
4
3
Bevel gear set
D350R0424
Fig. 4-211 Section view of the bevel gear set

1. Shims - 2. Shims - 3. Bevel pinion support - 4. Shims - 5. Left-hand bearing retainer - 6. Right-hand bearing retainer.

4 - 94
D350
4.4.11 PROCEDURE FOR ADJUSTING

BEVEL PINION BEARING
PRELOAD
Adjust bearing preload following the procedure illustrated here below:
A. Join the bevel pinion, complete with bearing (1), to
the pinion support complete with half bearings (2).
Insert the spacer (3).
B. B. Install the dial gauge on the bevel pinion, tightening it to a torque of 0.3 0.4 daNm. Measure
dimension "x" (detail A) with the probe, then re-
move the dial gauge and introduce a shims pack

of the measured value "x" plus 0.07 0.1 mm.
Install the bearing (5) and the ring nut (4).
C. Tighten the ring nut to a torque of 100 110 daNm.
D. Check the torque reaction at the ring nut that should
be 0.3 0.5 daNm.
E. Lock the ring nut.
Detail A
Dial gauge
Support
Gauge probe
Support level
Spacer level
Spacer
2
1
D350R0423
Fig. 4-212 Section view of the bevel pinion

1. Tapered roller bearing - 2. Bearing retainer - 3. Spacer - 4. Ring nut with screw - 5. Bearing - 6. Shims.

D350
4 - 95
4.4.12 REASSEMBLY OF REAR HOUSING

GUARDS
WARNING
Connect brake lubrication piping (Tf) and pinion lubrication piping (Tp) to the relevant fittings, as illustrated.
Tf
Tf
Tp
D350R0425
Fig. 4-213
Install the guards 3, 4 and 6, illustrated in Fig. 4-214,

onto the rear housing, tightening the screws TE
M12 x 35 to the torque of 11 daNm.
Fill to full level the hydraulic motor (2) with hydraulic
oil, and install the hydraulic motor with mounting
screws M20 x 50 tightened to the torque of 54 daNm.
Successively, fix the pipe support clamp (5) and connect pipes (1) to the hydraulic motor.
2
1
3
6
4
D350R0104
Fig. 4-214

4 - 96
4.5 SPECIAL TOOLS

BEVEL GEAR SET PINION
TOOL CODE
DESCRIPTION
Caliper for bevel gear set pinion bearing play check
380000935
380000936
Tool for pressing and extraction of bearing on bevel pinion
380000937
Puncher for bevel pinion upper bearing
380000938
Puncher for upper bearing outer race on bevel pinion bearing support
380000939
D350

D350

TOOL CODE
4 - 97
DESCRIPTION
Puncher for lower bearing outer race on bevel pinion bearing support
380000940
Puncher for bearing outer race on right housing bearing housing
380000942
Bearing for bearing outer race on left bearing housing
380000943
STEERING DIFFERENTIAL
TOOL CODE
DESCRIPTION
Caliper for steering differential crown gear bearing dimension measurement
380000944
Caliper for steering differential shafts/crown gears bearing play measurement
380000945

4 - 98

TOOL CODE
DESCRIPTION
Reference for calipers 380000944 e 380000945
380000946
Caliper for steering differential pinion bearing dimension measurement
380000947
380000948
Tool for steering differential pinion installation
380000949
Support for bearing pressing on differential bevel pinion
380000950
Puncher for bearing outer race on steering pinion support
380000951
D350

D350

TOOL CODE
DESCRIPTION
Puncher for steering differential pinion bearing inner race
380000952
Puncher for bearing outer race on steering differential crown gear shaft
380000954
Puncher for bearing inner race on steering differential pinion support
380000955
Puncher for bearing outer race on steering differential pinion support
380000956
4 - 99
SECTION 5
UNDERCARRIAGE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
SUBJECT
PAGE
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2

Generalities ....................................................................................................................... 5-3
Main components .............................................................................................................. 5-5
5.2
TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................................................................................... 5-8
5.3
5.3.1
INSPECTIONS .................................................................................................................... 5-9

Inspection and adjustment of track chains ........................................................................ 5-9
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
5.4.5
REPAIR PROCEDURES ..................................................................................................... 5-11

Track chain (removal/Installation) .....................................................................................5-11
Replacement of a damaged link and reinstallation ............................................................ 5-13
Idler (Removal/Installation/Overhaul) ................................................................................ 5-15
Track chain support roller (Removal/Installation) .............................................................. 5-18
Track chain bottom roller (Removal/Installation) ............................................................... 5-20
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.5.5
5.5.6
5.5.7
5.5.8
SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA ............................................................................................. 5-22

Idler ..................................................................................................................................5-22
Sprockets ........................................................................................................................ 5-23
Track chains ..................................................................................................................... 5-23
Bottom rollers ...................................................................................................................5-24
Support rollers.................................................................................................................. 5-26
Track tensioner device ..................................................................................................... 5-27
Front cross-member pivots ............................................................................................... 5-28
Wear limits ....................................................................................................................... 5-32
5.6
EQUIPEMENTS SPECIFIQUES ......................................................................................... 5-33

5-2
UNDERCARRIAGE
D350

D350
5-3
UNDERCARRIAGE

5.1.1 GENERALITIES
When evaluating the undercarriage conditions, it is
appropriate to consider that an accurate inspection, a
proper preventive maintenance and a correct operation of the machine, are the elements contributing most
to extend the life of components. It is good practice
to clean, lubricate, adjust and repair the undercarriage
at regular intervals, not limited to quick and incomplete inspections.
To evaluate exactly the conditions of components,
proceed with a systematic and thorough inspection. If
the machine was subject to excessive stress, the track
frames could be deformed. Excessive or strange wear
patterns on the idlers, the roller edges and the sprocket
segments could be caused by deformed track frames.
Considerable and apparently inexplicable signs of wear
on the idlers, on the roller rims and the sprocket segments could be caused by the fact that the track frames
are deformed.
It is important to consider also the conditions in which
the crawler is often operating.
TERRAIN
Obviously, it is not always possible to choose the
terrain and the operating conditions, but it is necessary to consider the geological configuration and the
gradients which could influence the wear type and
speed the undercarriage shall be subject to.
Working uphill - It results in moving weights and
loads towards the rear end of the machine. The wear
on the rear bottom rollers and the forward motion side
of the sprocket segments and bushes increases.
Working sideways - The weight of the machines is

bearing on the side located on the downhill side, with
a wear of the flanges and other components guiding
the track chain.
Working on a cat's back - It causes a concentration
of the loads on the inner side of the components. It
increases the wear of the inner side of rollers and
idlers and the inner tip of the grousers.
Working into a ditch - It causes the concentration of
loads on the outer flanges of rollers and the outer race
of idlers.
The environment and the type of materials moved are
the elements determining the life of undercarriage,
since some materials are more abrasive than others.
Also, the abrasive action is generally higher when they
are. Under this point of view, the most common materials can be classified as follows:
Gravel and rocks
sand (in water)
wet sand
sand (dry)
top soil (wet)
clay (wet)
clay
(dry or slightly wet)
talcum
gypsum
coal
phosphates
- intense breakage and wear

- fast wear
- packing and high wear
- high wear
- moderate wear
- light - moderate wear
- slight wear
- very slight wear
Working downhill - It results in moving weights and

loads towards the side of the machine facing downhill. There is a higher wear of the components, such
as flanges a link sides, working in this position.

5-4
UNDERCARRIAGE
Also, it is important, when the undercarriage is overhauled, to check the operation of the track tensioner
device. An inefficient tack tensioner can cause a premature wear of pins and bushes, the torsion of idler
shafts, and, as a limit, troubles on the sprocket shafts
and the final drives.
The more components are worn the faster wear occurs. When components are new, hardened surfaces
are thick and resistant; with the wear progression of
components between them and contact with the
ground, their harder outer surfaces are replaced by
softer layers of material, thus the wear becomes faster.
D350
What said above can be summarised in a few preventive rules and operations:
- do not operate the machine at high speed, unless
this is strictly necessary. This is particularly true
when operating in reverse;
- reduce the load when it is felt that the track chain
starts slipping;
- avoid parking the machine in mud, water or conditions facilitating corrosions;
- inspect daily the components, check the tightening
of bolts and nuts, eventual leakages from seals or
signs of abnormal wear;
- clean mud and debris accumulated during the work
shift from the undercarriage.

D350
5-5
UNDERCARRIAGE
5.1.2 MAIN COMPONENTS

The main components of the undercarriage are:
1. Sector type sprocket
2. Track frame bottom rollers
3. Track chain support rollers
4. Track chains
5. Track frames
6. Track tensioner device and pressure relief valve
7. Idler.
7
6
1
5
D350R0001
Fig. 5-1 Undercarriage components
1. Sprocket toothed sectors
2. Track frame bottom rollers
The sprocket drives directly the motion received from

the final drive to the track chain. The sprocket is incorporated in the final drive. The three toothed sectors are bolted to the crown, thus they are replaceable individually. The profile of the teeth is self-cleaning. T replacement of the toothed sectors can be done
without removing the track chains.
The rollers (q.ty 7) are three double flange and 4 single flange made with special steel, surface treated to
prevent wear and abrasion. Such rollers, mounted on
the bottom part of each track frame support the weight
of the machine; the rollers turn on lubricated bushes.
The sealing is provided by metal seals (long-life).

5-6
D350
UNDERCARRIAGE
3. Track chain support rollers

The support rollers support the upper part of the track
chain. Each roller is secured, by supports, to the track
frames. The rollers turn on lubricated bushes and the
sealing is provided by metal seals (long-life).
4. Track chain
The track chain is essentially made of:
- pins
- bushes
- links
- shoes
3
SM9351
Fig. 5-2 Permanently lubricated chains (SALT)

Pins and bushes are the parts of the track chain that
are most subject to wear. The symptoms characterising the wear of pins and bushes are the side wear of
track links, the fast wear of the sprocket teeth and
the excessive bending of the track chains.
1. Pin with lube oil reserve hole - 2. Rubber plug - 3. Lube

radial holes - 4. Seal - 5. Thrust washer - 6. Bush - 7. Link
- 8. Pin.
The shoes are single ribbed. The ribbing, besides providing traction, reinforces the shoe. Worn shoes, besides increasing the slipping of the track chains, let
the shoes to get easily deformed.
The track chain is of a permanently lubricated type
and the wear between pins and bushes is greatly reduced.
In fact, each pin (1) see fig. 5-2 is equipped with an
axial hole and two radial holes (3) perpendicular to the
first one providing a constant lubrication. The movement between pin and bush provides the distribution
of lubricant over all the contact surfaces.
Seals (4) provide the sealing preventing the entry of
foreign materials and keep the lubricant in. Rubber
plug (2) provides the oil filling and sealing.
Note Also it is not recommended to turn pins and
bushes on lubricated track chains.

D350
UNDERCARRIAGE
5-7
5. Track frames
7. Idler
Each track assembly is made of a frame made with

highly mechanical resistant material with boxed
beams. Inside fully enclosed track tensioner devices
are mounted, protected against any possible intrusion
of loose material.
The two track frames are pivoting at the rear on the
PIVOT-SHAFT, whereas in the front the connection is
provided by a suspension cross-member, centrally
pivoted to the machine frame and on the sides to the
track frames.
Thus, each track frame is oscillating independently
from each other.
The alignment of the track frames is provided at the
front by a compensating device.
The idler is of a spring type, located in the front side

of each track frame and is connected to the hydraulic
tensioner device of the track chain by a fork and a rod
connected to the piston of the adjusting cylinder.
Through this system the tension effort and the absorption of the stresses on the track chain during the
operation are transmitted. For this reason, the idler is
not secured to the track frame, but it is free to slide
on the guides that are correctly aligned by adjusting
shims. The idler turns on lubricated bushes. The sealing is provided by metal seals (long-life).
The following items are mounted on the track frame:

- track frame bottom rollers;
- support rollers;
- idler and track tensioner
6. Track tensioner
The track tensioner device provides a dual function:
to keep the track chains tensioned; to absorb the
stresses transmitted by the idler.
The track tensioner is provided by a hydraulic device
made of a cylinder and a piston connected to the fork
of the idler through a rod.
To tension the track chain, grease is pumped inside
the cylinder. This causes the forward movement of
the piston and the idler connected to it.
It must be noted that the spring is normally compressed, but it does not provide its action against the
track chain.
Track tensioner spring disassembly/assembly tool.

5-8
UNDERCARRIAGE
D350
5.2 TROUBLESHOOTING
The major causes for premature or abnormal wear of
the undercarriage components are listed here below.
High track chain tension

Troubles
Slack track chain tension

Troubles
1. Low speed and insufficient traction power. The

machine fails to develop the prescribed pushing
capacity.
1. Very fast wear on links, pins and bushes of the

track chain.
2. The machine turns rightward or leftward, caused

by the track chain which is tighter.
2. Fast wear of the sprocket teeth and the rib of the

shoe.
3. Fast wear of pins, bushes and links.

4. Wear of the final drive bearings.
3. Possible damage or breakage of the idler, idler supports both during the forward and reverse motion.
The track chain can derail from the sprocket when
the machine steers.
4. The track chain could fail to engage correctly the
sprocket teeth, both when moving forward or reverse. The track chain could jump the idler, w h e n
the machine is steering.
5. Noisy track chain.
6. The track chains fills with foreign materials (*).
(*) Note When the machine operates under conditions facilitating the entry of foreign materials into the
undercarriage components, it is recommended that
the tension of the system is checked frequently.
In fact, the tension can increase the rubbish included
between the track chain components and the idler
tensioner device.
The presence of foreign materials inside, could cause
delay or prevent the movement of the idler. This preclusion could result in a dangerous load on the track
chain (pins, bushes, links), on the idler shaft and the
final drives.
Insufficient tightening of the screws securing the

shoes to the track chain
Troubles
Elongation of the screw holes on the link.
Remedies
The loosening can be caused by a thinning of the
shoe due to wear, or by an incorrect torque tightening
of the screws to the prescribed values. Make sure
that the mating faces between shoe and track chain
are perfectly clean and free from paint.
Working on steep slopes

Troubles
Wear at the tips of pins, on the side of the master
link, on the inner and outer rims of the bottom rollers,
the sprockets and idlers.
Remedies
Operating on steep slopes, causes strong stress to
the undercarriage components, with subsequent fast
wear. Whenever possible, change frequently the direction and/or the trajectory of the machine.

D350
5-9
UNDERCARRIAGE
5.3 INSPECTIONS
5.3.1 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
OF TRACK CHAINS
In sealed and lubricated track chains, strong phenomena of internal wear do not occur, if the track chain
adjustment is done timely, when required.
When the track chain is too tight, it is subject to useless and dangerous stress. The wear speed increases
and drawbar traction power is lost. When it is too slack,
the links are hitting the undercarriage, increasing the
wear of all parts involved.
Keep in mind that a normal adjustment is proper for
dry, stony or rocky terrains, whereas it is necessary
to slack further the track chains in muddy, very wet
and clayey conditions, or when sand, gravel, snow or
ice are present.
= 3040to 40 m (1.18 to 1.57 in)

L =L30
D350M0064
Fig. 5-3 Track chain sag
Tensioning the track chain

When the track chain is loosen it is necessary to
increase its tension. Prior to any operation, measure the sagging of the chains in the zone (L, fig. 5-3)
included between the support roller and the idler. When
sag (L) exceeds 30 to 40 mm (1.18 to 1.57 in) (regular
sag) pump grease into the fitting of valve (VR) of the
adjusting cylinder, until the correct tension is obta.

5 - 10
D350
UNDERCARRIAGE
Loosening the track chain

When disassembly operations must be performed or
the track chain is excessively tensioned, the tension
must be loosened. Prior to slackening the track chain,
check that the sag on section (L) is lower than
30 to 40 mm (1.18 to 1.57 in). If loosening is required,
proceed as follows:
WARNING
Fluid under pressure. Do not release the track chain
tension by loosening pressure release valve (Vs).
Do not loosen adjusting screw (VR).
- Remove access cover (C) on the track tensioner

frame, removing retaining screws (V).
- With a 24 mm (0.9 in) wrench, loosen slightly adjustment valve (VR) and back-up the machine a few
metres, if required. Re-tighten the valve and check
sag (L).
Vs
VR
C
V
D350R0002
Fig. 5-4 Adjusting the track chain

VR. Adjustment valve; VS. Pressure relief valve; I. Grease fitting; C. Cover; V. Securing screws.
D350M0061

D350
UNDERCARRIAGE
5 - 11

5.4.1 TRACK CHAI (removal / installation)
Removal
Place blocks of an appropriate thickness under the
transmission housing and the cross-member so that
the track chains do not touch the ground.
Remove the cover on the track frame and loosen the

tension of the track chain, as described in item 5.3
LOOSENING THE TRACK TENSION.
SM9360
Fig. 5-6
WARNING
Fluid under pressure. Do not release the track
chain tension by loosening pressure release valve
(Vs)(fig. 5-4).
Remove the screws securing the shoe indicated (Fig.
5-7) from the master link.
Remove the shoe and split the master link.
D350R0003
Using a proper hoist and sling, remove the chain from

the machine.
Fig. 5-7
WARNING
of adequate capacity. Make sure that parts are properly slinged and hooked. Use the lifting eyes provided for this purpose.
WARNING
When removing the track chains, sling the two end
links and spread the track chain slowly, using a
hoist. Make sure that the zone where the track chain
is going to be placed is completely free and no
by-standers are in the vicinities.
SM9361
Fig. 5-8
Start the machine and moving forward slowly, disengage the track chain from the sprocket, the support
rollers and the idler.

5 - 12
D350
UNDERCARRIAGE
Re-installation
WARNING
Handle all parts with extreme care. Never place
hands and fingers between one piece and another.
Wear approved personal protection equipment
such as glasses, gloves and safety shoes.
1. Position the track chain so that the junction point

is corresponding to the sprocket (fig. 5-9).
SM9362
Fig. 5-9
2. Start the machine and move it slowly forward, guiding, at the same time, the track chain over the
sprocket, using a strong bar placed through the
holes of a link.
3. Place a wooden block under the rib of the shoe
nearest the junction point. Connect half links (1),
install the master shoe and tighten the screws to
the prescribed torque indicated in fig. 5-11.
Note Before installing, degrease screws (C) and the

treaded seats on master link (1).
Apply LOCTITE Super Rapid 242 on the screw thread
and tighten to the prescribed torque. Lubricate with
engine oil the other screws and tighten to the same
torque.
D350R0019
Fig. 5-10
Tighten the master link screws with the relevant shoes

to a torque C = 30 daNm (221.2 lb.ft.), plus a further
180 (half turn).
For the screws securing the screws , tighten to a
torque C1 = 30 daNm (221.2 lb.ft.) plus a further 120
(1/3 turn).
4. Reset the correct track chain tension, making reference to item 5.3.1 TIGHTENING THE TRACK
CHAIN.
C1
3
SM9364
Fig. 5-11 Track chain master link

1. Master SPLIT link - 2. Master shoe - 3. Link pin - C. Master
link hinging securing screws (35 daNm, 258.1 + 1/2 turn) C1. Shoe and split link securing screws (35daNm, 258.1 +
1/3 turn).

D350
5 - 13
UNDERCARRIAGE
5.4.2 REPLACING A DAMAGED LINK

AND RE-INSTALLATION
5 9
a
7
8
To replace a damaged link, not adjacent a master link,

it is possible to perform the operation, without removing the track chain assembly, proceeding as follows.
10 8
11
5
6
1
1. Remove shoe (1, fig. 5-12) secured to the link to be

replaced (2) and the two adjacent shoes: Spread
the track chain.
2. Pull-out the hinging pins (3 and 4) of the damaged

link, using portable press (A, fig. 5-13).
SM9365
Fig. 5-12
3. Cut with a torch a section of bush (5) 20 to 30 mm
(0.8 to 1.2 in) long.
M
H
SM9366
Fig. 5-13
SM9367
Fig. 5-14

5 - 14
D350
UNDERCARRIAGE
6. For the re-installation, use a portable hydraulic press

complete with the tooling illustrated in figure 5-15.
WARNING
Wear welder personal protection equipment, such
as mask or dark glasses, helmet, apron, shoes and
heavy gloves, every time arc cutting or welding is
performed. Always wear dark protective glasses
near welding in progress. NEVER LOOK DIRECTLY
AT THE ARC WITHOUT APPROPRIATE EYE PROTECTION.
7. Install a master bush (9) on a new link (11) and

secure it to the track chain.
8. Reinstall the second link (6) on the master bush.
9. Install the two master bush rings (10) on links (7
and 8) and complete the operation reinstalling pins
(3 and 4).
4. Remove the damaged link (2).

5. Remove link (6) and pull-out the section from it remaining in bush (5).
C
A
B
11
SM9368
b
SM9369
Fig. 5-15 Installation phases of bushes on the links of the track chain
a. Installation phase of the bush on the first link - b. Installation phase of the second link.

D350
5 - 15
UNDERCARRIAGE
Re-assembly of a lubricated track chain

Prior to reassembling the components of the track
chain, follow the notices and procedures listed in item
5.4.1.
1. Press the pins using the portable hydraulic press.
2. Press the rubber plug into the pin hole using tool
(A, fig. 5-16). Take care in positioning the plug inside 8 to 10 mm (0.3 to 0.2 in) from the rim of the
pin.
A
SM9370
Fig. 5-16
3. Check the tightness of the seals and the oil filling

into the pins, using tool (B) fig. 5-17.
D350R0004
Fig. 5-17
5.4.3 IDLER
(Removal/Installation/Overhaul)
Removal
1. Split the track chain (see item 5.4.1 TRACK CHAIN
- Removal).
2. Loosen the screws located at the ends of the idler
support (1, fig. 5-18).
3. Extract the idler and the relevant supports from
the guides, after ensuring the supporting of the
assembly with the appropriate tool (see fig. 5-19).
D350R0310
Fig. 5-18
WARNING
Handle all components with extreme care. Never
place hands and fingers between one piece and
another.
4. Remove the idler supports extracting its shafts.
D350R0006
Fig. 5-19

5 - 16
D350
UNDERCARRIAGE
Reinstallation
1. Fill the idler with oil (see fig. 5-20).
WARNING
D350R0007
Fig. 5-20
2. Install the two supports on the idler shafts (see fig.
5-21).
3. Lift the idler using the appropriate tool and insert
the guides (se fig. 5-22).
WARNING
proper slings and hooks. Use lifting eyes if
provided. Watch-out for people in the vicinity.
D350R0310
Fig. 5-21
4. Check that the centre line of the idler is aligned

with the centre line of the bottom rollers.
5. Tighten screws (1) located in the rear side of the
idler supports (see fig. 5-21).
6. Join the track chain (see 5.4.1 TRACK CHAINN Installation) and adjust correctly.
D350R0006
Fig. 5-22

D350
5 - 17
UNDERCARRIAGE
5. Check that the pusher of the hydraulic press is

extended against hydraulic piston (3).
Overhaul
Remove the idler from the machine (see removal).
6. Remove the four short screws (B and C, fig. 523).
1. Support the idler in an appropriate manner. Remove

the screws securing the bottom roller interfering with
the removal of the tensioner spring (third roller, from
the idler).
7. Loosen the two long screws (A) and at the same

time release slowly the hydraulic pressure from
the press.
2. Lift the track frame about 150 mm (6 in) and place

a support block under it.
8. Repeat this manoeuvre until the tensioner spring

is fully unloaded.
9. Remove bracket (5, fig. 5-23) and hydraulic press
(6).
WARNING
10. Extract the cylinder support, cylinder (2) and piston (3).
3. Remove the guide plate.
Check the tensioner spring: if this is damaged, remove it from the housing using a hoist and replace it.
4. Making reference to fig. 5-23 install bracket (5) on

the track frame and install press (6).
Check the inner surface of cylinder (2). Any scratching warrants its replacement.
1
C
5
D350R0020
Fig. 5-23 Removal of the track chain tensioner spring

A-B-C. Flange securing screws - 1. Retaining flange - 2. Cylinder - 3. Piston - 4. Swinging cross-member - 5. Bracket 6. Hydraulic press.

5 - 18
D350
UNDERCARRIAGE
WARNING
of adequate capacity. Make sure that parts are properly slinged and hooked. Use the lifting eyes provided for this purpose. Beware of by-standers in
the vicinity of the load to be lifted.
D350R0010
Fig. 5-24
5.4.4 TRACK CHAIN SUPPORT ROLLERS

(Removal/Installation)
Each track frame is equipped with two support rollers.

Removal
For the removal, proceed as follows:
D350R0011
WARNING
Fig. 5-25
1. Loosen the tension of the track chain, using adjusting valve (VR) previously seen, so that a quantity of grease sufficient to decrease the tension gets
out (see paragraph 5.3.1 CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE TRACK CHAINS - Loosening the
track chain).
2. Lift the chain over the support roller.
3. Remove screws (1) securing the roller support to
the track frame and remove it.
In the event the roller must be disassembled, it is
necessary to remove it from the support.
WARNING
tension by loosening pressure release valve. Do
not remove the grease fitting installed on the adjustment valve.
D350
UNDERCARRIAGE
5 - 19
Reinstallation
4. To reinstall the rollers, reverse the sequence
previously described. Tighten the securing screws
of the roller support to the track frame.
WARNING
D350R0012
Fig. 5-26
Reassemble the track chain and readjust the track

chain tension (see paragraph 5.3.1 CHECK AND
ADJUSTMENT OF THE TRACK CHAINS Tensioning the track chain).
WARNING
of adequate capacity. Make sure that parts are properly slinged and hooked. Use the lifting eyes provided for this purpose. Beware of by-standers in
the vicinity of the load to be lifted.
SM9412

5 - 20
D350
UNDERCARRIAGE
5.4.5 TRACK CHAIN BOTTOM ROLLERS

(Removal / Installation)
Removal
If the intervention is limited to one or few rollers, to
remove them, it is sufficient to follow the procedure
described here below.
1. Remove screws (1 and 2, fig. 5-33) and remove the

bottom roller inner and outer guards. Salvage the
spacers mounted coaxial with screws (2).
2. Split the chain (see 5.4.1 TRACK CHAIN - Removal).
SM9386
Fig. 5-27
3. Lift the machine using an hydraulic jack (3, fig.

5-34) of adequate capacity. Immediately support
the machine using a strong wooden block (4) capable of supporting its weight (fig. 5-35).
4. Loosen screws (5) securing the rollers to the track
frame.
5. Insert tool (A), remove the screws and remove the

roller, as illustrated in fig. 5-35.
SM9387
WARNING
Fig. 5-28
Every time groups of the machine must be removed or installed, requiring to be supported by
jacks, make sure that the contacts under the jack
and between jack and machine are appropriate for
the load to be supported. Immediately transfer the
load to appropriate supports or stands. Do not
work under or near a machine or its components
which are supported only by jacks or other lifting
devices, according to current national or local regulations.
D350
5 - 21
UNDERCARRIAGE
Re-installation
1. Place the roller on tool (A, fig. 35) and arrange it on
the track frame. Install screws (5) and tighten to
the prescribed torque (see 5.5.4 SPECIFICATIONS
AND DATA - Bottom rollers).
2. Re-install the roller guards, placing the spacer previously removed, and lower the machine to the
ground.
4
A
3. Reassemble the track chain and set the correct

tension (see 5.4.1 TRACK CHAIN - Installation).
SM9388
Fig. 5-29

5 - 22
D350
UNDERCARRIAGE

5.5.1 IDLER
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Type ........... permanently lubricated, equipped with

rotating metal seals (long-life).
Q.ty 12 screws 7/16" 14 UNC (C1),

to tightening torque ........................ 6.1 to 7.1 daNm
(45 to 52.3 lb.ft.)
Thickness of adjusting shims between end plates and

idler guide slides 0.5 mm (0.02 in).
* Fill with oil type:

90% AGIP ROTRA LSX +
10% AGIP ROCOL A50 R
Quantity ............................................ 0.6 Kg (1.3 lb)
Idler assembly ......................... 310.85 Kg (685.3 lb)

Note Degrease and clean the front sealing seal seats.
Eliminate all signs of dust or imprints then smear a
thin film of oil, taking care not to oil other parts.
2
3
C1
4
5
6
7
14
13
11
12
10
9
8
D350R0017
Fig. 5-30 Idler

1. Naked idler - 2. Shaft - 3. By-metal bush - 4. Thrust washer - 5. Cover flange - 6. Flange securing screw - 7. Flange seal
- 8. Inner sealing ring - 9. Inner elastic ring - 10. Outer sealing ring - 11. Outer elastic ring - 12. Stabilising ring - 13. Plug 14. plug pin.
D350
5 - 23
UNDERCARRIAGE
5.5.2 SPROCKETS
Type .............................................. w/ bolted sectors
Number of teeth of crown .................................... 27
Pitch diameter .......................... 936.25 mm (36.9 in)
+0.04
Width of sector .......................... 93+1
mm (3.7 +0
in)
-0
Nuts for sprocket sector securing screws M24.
D350R0018
Fig. 5-31 Section view of sprocket

1. Toothed sector - 2. Hub.
5.5.3 TRACK CHAINS
Tightening torques
Type ......................................... links w/ master pins

Number of shoes per track chain......................... 44
Number of master links per track chain ................. 2
Master link securing screws C (35 daNm, 258 lb.ft.)

plus an additional 1/2 turn.
Shoe securing screws C1 (35 daNm, 258 lb.ft.) plus
an additional 1/3 turn.
Width of shoes:
- standard ....................................... 610 mm (24 in)
- upon request ................................. 711 mm (28 in)
C1
SM9364
Fig. 5-32 Master link

1. Half master link (SPLIT) - 2. Master shoe - 3. Link pin - C. Master link securing screws - C1. Shoe and master link securing
screws.

5 - 24
D350
UNDERCARRIAGE
5.5.4 BOTTOM ROLLERS
Tightening torque

metal (long-life) front seals.
Screws (6) securing side

covers ................................. M12/16.2 to 19.1 daNm
(119.4 to 140.8 lb.ft.)
Quantity of bottom rollers per track chain:

- double flange ..................................................... 2
- single flange ....................................................... 5
Screws securing rollers to track

frame M22x1,5 ....................... 80 daNm (589.8 lb.ft.)
Single flange
-
Note Before assembling, degrease and clean the

front seal seats. Eliminate all traces of dust or imprints from the surfaces then cover them with a thin
film of oil, making sure that th e other surfaces remain dry.
weight of roller assembly ............. 89 Kg (196.2 lb)

diameter of race ........................... 242 mm (9.5 in)
diameter of outer flange ............. 276 mm (10.9 in)
quantity of oil (SAE 30/40) ........... 0.67 Kg (1.5 lb)
SAE 40 oil
1
12
10
11
15 6 5
13
Axial clearance 0,15 +00,4
14
(each sae)
D350R0008
Fig. 5-33 Single flange roller

1. Bottom roller shell - 2. Shaft - 3. Bush - 4. Thrust washers - 5. Cover flange - 6. Screw - 7. Flange seals - 8. Inner sealing
ring - 9. Inner elastic ring - 10. Outer sealing ring - 11. Outer elastic ring - 12. Stabiliser ring - 13. Plug - 14. Expanding pin
- 15. Flat washer.
D350
5 - 25
UNDERCARRIAGE
Double flange
-
weight of roller ass.ly .............. 97.56 Kg (215.1 lb)

diameter of race ........................... 242 mm (9.5 in)
diameter of outer guide .............. 276 mm (10.9 in)
quantity of oil (SAE 30/40) ......... 0.670 Kg (1.5 lb)
SAE 40 oil
1
12
10
11
7 15
13
14
Axial clearance 0,15 +00,4
(each sae)
D350R0009
Fig. 5-34 Double flange roller

1. Bottom roller shell - 2. Shaft - 3. Bush - 4. Thrust washers - 5. Cover flange - 6. Screw - 7. Flange seals - 8. Inner sealing
ring - 9. Inner elastic ring - 10. Outer sealing ring - 11. Outer elastic ring - 12. Stabiliser ring - 13. Plug - 14. Expanding pin
- 15. Flat washer.

5 - 26
D350
UNDERCARRIAGE
5.5.5 SUPPORT ROLLERS
Tightening torques

metal (long-life) front seals.
Screws (13) securing roller cover

3/8 - 16 UNF .................................. 3.8 to 4.5 daNm
(28 to 33.2 lb.ft.)
Quantity of rollers per track chain ......................... 2

- weight of roller assembly ......... 50.67 Kg (111.7 lb)
- diameter of race ........................... 191 mm (7.5 in)
- diameter of outer flange ............... 223 mm (8.8 in)
- quantity of oil (SAE 40) .................. 0.5 Kg (1.1 lb)
- diameter of shaft .................. 73.15 h9 mm (2.9 in)
- specs of material of support roller body
according to standard ......................... PDQB 4000
- material of body .................................. 35 MB4 - 2
Plug (15) 3/4 - 16 UNF ................. 15.2 to 19 daNm

(112.1 to 140.1 lb.ft.)
Adjusting ring-nut (8) ..................................... M58x2
(*) Apply LOCTITE no. 243
Note Before assembling, degrease and clean the front

seal seats. Eliminate all traces of dust or imprints from
the surfaces then cover them with a thin film of oil,
making sure that the other surfaces remain dry.
*
Axial clearance 0,05
0.25
16
13
14
15
12
10
11
D350R0013
Fig. 5-35 Support roller

1. Roller shell - 2. Shaft - 3. Roller radial bearing - 4. Cover - 5. Cover O-Ring - 6. Elastic ring - 7. Sealing ring - 8. Adjusting
ring-nut - 9. Stop ring - 10. Cover flange - 11. Flange O-Ring - 12. Spacer ring - 13. Ex. screw - 14. Spring washer - 15. Plug
- 16. Plug O-Ring.
D350
5 - 27
UNDERCARRIAGE
5.5.6 TRACK CHAIN TENSIONER
Pressure relief valve (1) ......... 5.4 daNm (39.8 lb.ft.)

Adjusting valve (3) ................. 5.4 daNm (39.8 lb.ft.)
Specifications of track tensioner spring:
- free length of spring ................. 1142 mm (44.9 in)
- length of pre-loaded spring
(29500 Kg, 65036.4 lb) ............... 932 mm (36.7 in)
WARNING
tension by loosening pressure release valve. Do
not loosen the adjusting valve.
Type ..................................................... single spring

Track chain tension adjustment ................. hydraulic
Setting of pressure relief
valve (1) ................................... 689 bar (9993.1 psi)
5
9
2
10
11
12
13
14
15
D350R0021
Fig. 5-36 Track tensioner

1. Pressure relief valve - 2. Cylinder - 3. Adjusting valve - 4. Grease fitting - 5. Cylinder grease fitting - 6. Cylinder housing
- 7. Plate - 8. Spring - 9. Piston seal - 10. Pusher rod - 11. Piston - 12. Puller hole - 13. Guide plate - 14. Mud scraper seal
- 15. Mud scraper seal.

5 - 28
D350
UNDERCARRIAGE
5.5.7 FRONT LINKAGE PIVOTS
SWINGING
CROSS-MEMBER
FRAME
CROSS-MEMBER
1
2
5-6
6-7
D350R0014
Fig. 5-37 Front cross-member pivots

1. Cross-member - 2. Cross- member shim - 3. Central cross-member bush - 4. Central cross-member pin - 5. Screw TE
M12 x 1.75 x 170 - 6. Washer 12 x 24 x 2.5 - 7. Front nut M12 x 1.75.

5 - 29
D350
UNDERCARRIAGE
A. Side pivot
- Pin diameter
- Ball joint inner diameter
- Clearance
Min.
76.181
76.185
0.000
to
to
to
Max
76.200
76.200
0.019
120.610
120.630
0.020 clear.
to
to
to
120.650
120.650
0.040 interf.
B. Central pivot
- Pin diameter (100 h8)
- Phenolic bush inner diameter (*)
- Play
100.000
100.480
0.126
to
to
to
99.946
100.580
0.334
3.937 to
3.956 to
0.0049 to
3.935
3.959
0.0131
B1. Central pivot

- Diameter of bush seat (120 h8)
- Phenolic bush outer diameter (*)
- Interference
120.000
120.354
0.304
to
to
to
120.054
120.304
0.354
4.724 to
4.738 to
0.0119 to
4.726
4.736
0.0139
mm
A1. Side pivot

- Joint seat diameter
- Joint outer diameter
in
Min.
2.999 to
2.999 to
0.000 to
4.748 to
4.749 to
0.0008 clear. to
(*) Dimension referred to prior press fitting into seat.
Max
3.000
3.000
0.001
4.750
4.750
0.0016 interf.

5 - 30
D350
UNDERCARRIAGE
PIVOT SHAFT
(mm)
C. PIVOT SHAFT
- Shaft larger diameter
- Phenolic bush inner diameter
- Play
- Shaft smaller diameter
- Phenolic bush inner diameter
- Play
Min.
179.937
180.673
0.131
149.937
150.581
0.496
to
to
to
to
to
to
in
Max
180.000
180.773
0.416
150.000
150.736
0.700
Min.
7.084
7.113
0.0051
5.903
5.928
0.0195
to
to
to
to
to
to
Max
7.086
7.117
0.0164
5.905
5.934
0.0275
1
2-3
TRANSMISSION HOUSING
4-5
6
7
8
9
10
11
TRACK FRAME BODY
12
13
14
15 16-17
D350R0015
Fig. 5-38 PIVOT SHAFT

1. PIVOT SHAFT - 2. Screw TE M24x 3 x 90 - 3. Washer 24.4 x 55 x 9 - 4. Screw TE M 10x35 - 5. Washer 10x21 - 6. Inner ring
- 7. Mud scraper ring - 8. Ring - 9. Bush - 10. Bush - 11. Ring - 12. Shim - 13. Guide disc - 14. Screw TE M16 x 2 x 50 - 15.
Side cover - 16. Screw TE M20 x 60 - 17. Washer 20 x 37.
D350
5 - 31
UNDERCARRIAGE
CROSS MEMBER PIVOT SUPPORT ON TRACK FRAME

mm
in
D. Cross-member large pivot

- Bush inner diameter
- Pin diameter
- Play
Min.
84.63
84.146
0.18
to
to
to
Max
84.73
84.200
0.438
Min.
3.332 to
3.313 to
0.0071 to
Max
3.336
3.315
0.0172
D3. Cross-member smaller pivot

- Pin diameter
- Play
68.60
68.154
0.046
to
to
to
68.66
68.20
0.226
2.701 to
2.683 to
0.0018 to
2.703
2.685
0.089
D1. Cross-member large pivot

- Bush outer diameter
- Interference
98.454
98.200
0.200
to
to
to
98.504
98.254
0.304
3.876 to
3.866 to
0.0079 to
3.878
3.868
0.0119
D2. Cross-member smaller pivot

- Support inner diameter
- Max. outer diameter
- Interference
82.200
82.434
0.180
to
to
to
82.254
82.484
0.284
3.236 to
3.245 to
0.0071 to
3.238
3.247
0.0112
2
3-4
1
12
6
5
Fill with
grease
7-8
9
7-8
Fill with grease
11
10
TRACK
FRAME BODY
D350R0016
Fig. 5-39 Cross-member support

1. Ball joint - 2. Bush - 3. Screw TE M8 x 1.25 x 20 - 4. Washer 8 x 17 - 5. Centre cross-member pivot pin - 6. Ring - 7. Screw
TE M12 x 1.75 x 30 - 8. Washer 12 x 24 x 2.5 - 9. Cover - 10. Bush - 11. Cover ass.ly - 12. Bush.

5 - 32
D350
UNDERCARRIAGE
5.5.8 WEAR LIMITS

Measuring procedure
Pitch
4XP
Nominal dimension
mm (in)
Wear limit
mm (in)(*)
863.6 0.8
(34 0.03)

Link
(height)
HEIGHT
OF TRACK
CHAIN LINK
Bottom
roller
(diameter)

ROLLER

DIAMETER

Support
roller
(diameter)
150 0.5
(5.9 0.02)
138
(5.4)
191 0.5
(7.5 0.02)
177
(6.9)
242 0.5
(9.5 0.02)
222
(8.7)
123.2 0.5
(4.8 0.02)
120.7
(4.7)
81.6 0.3
(3.2 0.01)
76.6
(3.0)
98
(3.8)
75
(2.9)
22
(0.9)
27.5
(1.1)
71.4 1
(2.8 0.04)
45.4
(1.8)

ROLLER
DIAMETER
SHOE
SURFACE

Bushes
(diameter)
Track chain
bush
diameter
Wear on
forward
travel side

BUSH
SHOE
DISTANCE

A Radial
wear
D = min (A, B, C)
DRY
C
Wear on reverse travel side
Outer diameter
Idler
(distance)
Ruota
(distance)

CENTRAL
FLANGE
HEIGHT

Shoes
(height)
Sprocket
(rim)
HEIGHT

OF RIB

6 wear average
(*) The wear limit listed corresponds generally to the thickness of the hardened layer at 100 % of the wear.
D350
UNDERCARRIAGE
5.6 SPECIAL TOOLS

UNDERCARRIAGE
TOOL CODE
DESCRIPTION
Z caliper track chain alignment
380000959
5 - 33
SECTION 6
DOZING EQUIPMENT HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
SUBJECT
PAGE
6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
GENERAL DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................. 6-3

Operation of the hydraulic system .................................................................................... 6-3
Diagram equipment hydraulic system diagram ................................................................. 6-5
6.2
6.2.1
TESTS ............................................................................................................................... 6-9

Flow test in single circuits ................................................................................................ 6-9
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.3
6.3.4
REPAIR PROCEDURES ..................................................................................................

Hydraulic oil reservoir (removal / installation) .................................................................
Equipment hydraulic pump (removal ) ............................................................................
Hydraulic control valve (overhaul) ...................................................................................
Installation of blade ........................................................................................................
6-10
6-10
6-12
6-13
6-14
6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
6.4.5
6.4.6
6.4.7
6.4.8
6.4.9
6.4.10
6.4.11
6.4.12
SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA ..........................................................................................

Hydraulic control valve ...................................................................................................
Hydraulic power pump ....................................................................................................
Blade cylinder support fork ............................................................................................
Blade lifting control cylinder ...........................................................................................
Blade Tilt control cylinder (Bulldozer version) .................................................................
Blade Tilt control cylinder (Angledozer version) ..............................................................
Ripper lift cylinder ..........................................................................................................
Ripper pitch cylinder .......................................................................................................
Push arms and blade rods ..............................................................................................
C-frame and rods ...........................................................................................................
Single shank ripper .........................................................................................................
Tightening torque ...........................................................................................................
6-15
6-15
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-20
6-21
6-22
6-23
6-24
6-25
6-26

6-2
D350

D350
6-3

6.1.1 OPERATION OF THE HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM
The dozer D350 can be equipped with a Bulldozer or
a 1-cylinder Angledozer.
In the Angledozer version, a fully mechanical Tilt configuration is also available in which the relevant spool
is not used.
The equipment hydraulic circuit is equipped with a
variable displacement piston power pump (P) mounted
on the torque converter, sucking oil from tank (S)
through metal filter (Fa). The steering circuit and the
equipment circuit are separate, but they have in common the same power (piston) pump and the same
control valve. Thus, the two circuits use the same
hydraulic oil, but operate at different pressures.
The operating pressures of the single circuits are:
- equipment circuit 200 5 bar (2900.7 72.5 psi);
- steering circuit 350 5 bar (5076.3 72.5 psi).
The pump powers the steering circuits through a section of the control valve dedicated to the steering.
Pilot valve (Mr) controlling the ripper can move into
three positions corresponding to: raising, neutral and
lowering.
Pilot valve (Ma) controlling the blade can move into
four position corresponding to: raising, neutral, lowering and floating and also blade tilting (Tilt) rightward
or leftward.
Two safety levers, located on the right and left sides
of the drivers seat, cut-off electrically (in raised position) with a proximity sensor, the powering of the control pilot valves, preventing accidental movements of
the pilot valve. When the machine is standing still and
the lever is lowered, allowing the machine to perform
all working operations.
The actuation of indicator light (4) on the monitor panel
in the cab signals that oil return filter (9) is clogged
and must be promptly replaced.
Oil sucked by pump (P) powers control valve (D),
powering block (Va) reaching pilot valves (Ma and Mr)
through steering piloting block (Vp) providing the hydraulic piloting of the control valve spools (Powering
pressure of the pilot valves 30 bar, 435.1 psi).
The movement of any spool occurs through the check
valves in the actuator circuit selected. The pressure
that is established in the delivery circuit is proportional to the effort required and it is limited by pres-
sure relief valve (4) set at 190 bar, 2755.7 psi. Also,
the following valve are installed on the control valve.
The circuit is equipped with a L.S. (Load Sensing)
system. A connection between power pump and control valve, allows the sending of a signal from the control valve to the pump regulating the oil flow according to the effective requirements of the actuators,
changing the pump flow up to maximum delivery at
max. speed (248 lt/min, 65.5 gpm).
Also, the circuit regulates the distribution of the flow
according to a logic of priority for the steering, prevailing over the equipment circuit, when the operation
of both of them is required.
QUICK DROP VALVES (OPTIONAL)

Quick drop valves (V) inserted on the bottom of the
blade lift cylinders operate during the lowering phase
of the blade to accelerate its movement.
When the operator pushes the blade control pilot valve
into lowering position, oil flowing out the lower chamber of the cylinder, under the effect of the weight of
the blade and the flow of oil to the cylinder upper chamber, pushes the ball which actuates the plunger, which,
by moving, opens the oil delivery port from the valve
to the cylinder upper chamber, thus speeding up the
descent of the blade.
When the operator pushes the blade control lever
slightly forward, the condition occurs when the blade
drops by gravity instead of pushed by the oil pressure. The ball is blocked in its seat and the oil is prevented from flowing from one end of the cylinder to
the other.
Stroke-end valves are mounted in the blade control
cylinders. They are made by ducts inside the piston,
in which seats and a plunger are located. The plunger
cuts-off the passage when the oil pressure blocks it
against the relevant seat. It stays closed until the piston ends its stroke. The plunger is moved away from
its seat by the contact of the plunger rod against the
end of the cylinder. Oil flows from one end of the cylinder to the other, limiting the movement of the piston. These valves are necessary, as a result of the
blade Tilt action. Thus it is possible that the piston of
a blade control cylinder is at stroke-end, whereas the
other one still has to travel part of it.

6-4
D350
BLADE HYDRAULIC TILT

The Tilt control is obtained by a sideways movement
of the lever. The rightward movement of the lever
causes the rightward tilting of the blade (clockwise
rotation); in the same manner, the leftward movement
of the lever causes the leftward tilting of the blade
(anticlockwise rotation).
The Tilt control circuit is equipped with a flow reduction (7) limiting the flow of oil to the cylinder, facilitating the control of the blade. When the pump flow is
reduced, oil operates lifting the valve plunger.
BLADE CONTROL LEVER POSITIONS

The lever controls the lifting, lowering and tilting of
the blade.
To lift or lower the blade, move the lever respectively
backward into position (D) or forward into position (H).
The holding of the blade into a desired position occurs, in both instances, by releasing the lever, which
returns automatically into neutral (N).
To make the blade floating, bearing on the ground just
under the effect of its weight, push the lever full stroke
forward, into position (F), where it is held by an appropriate detent.
The floating condition ends when returning the lever
into neutral position (N).
Moving the lever leftward into position (A), or rightward into position (B), the tilting of the blade is obtained. The lever must be held until the blade reaches
the desired position.
F
H
A
D
D350R0031
Fig. 6-1 Blade control lever positions decal
POSITIONS OF THE RIPPER CONTROL LEVER

-
With lever forward = ripper lowering.

With lever backward = ripper lifting.
With lever forward + button = pitch opening.
With lever backward + button = pitch closing.
With lever in the centre = neutral position.
D350M0036
Fig. 6-2 Ripper control lever positions decal

D350
6.1.2 DOZER EQUIPMENT HYDRAULIC

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
P.
Variable displacement piston power pump

(380 lt/min to 2100 rpm, 100.4 gpm to 2100 rpm)
D. Piloted control valve
S. Hydraulic oil tank
Va. Pilot valve powering block
Fr. Filter on return oil to tank
Ls. Load-Sensing signal
V. Quick drop valves
Connecting ports
- Control valve - Cylinders
A1. Ripper pitch cylinder
loweri
B1. Ripper pitch cylinder
lifting
A2. Ripper cylinder
lowering
B2. Ripper cylinder
lifting
A3. Tilt cylinder
lowering
B3. Tilt cylinder
lifting
A4. Blade control cylinder
lowering
B4. Blade control cylinder
lifting
Delivery
Q = 350 lt/min (92.5 gpm)
Q = 300 lt/min (79.3 gpm)
Q = 350 lt/min (92.5 gpm)
Q = 300 lt/min (79.3 gpm)
Q = 137 lt/min (36.2 gpm)
Q = 103 lt/min (27.2 gpm)
Q = 350 lt/min (92.5 gpm)
Q = 300 lt/min (79.3 gpm)
- Blade control pilot valve - Control valve (piloting)

Blade lowering
Floating
Blade tilt
Blade raising
Blade tilt
1
5
2
3
4
a4
x
a3
b4
b3
- Ripper control pilot valve - Control valve (piloting)

Raising
Lowering
1
2
b2
a2
6-5

6-6
D350
EQUIPMENT HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM D350

RIPPER
LIFT
TILT
PITCH
BLADE
1 soll.
4
Ma
B2
A2
25
B1
A1
Q=350L/min
(92.5 gpm)
b1
28
5 float
Q=350L/min
(92.5 gpm)
27
Q=350L/min (92.5 gpm)
Q=300L/min (79.3 gpm)
Q=350L/min (42.5 gpm)
Mr
Q=300L/min (79.3 gpm)
Q=100L/min (26.4 gpm)
HYDRAULIC
MOTOR
2 abb.
Q=100L/min (26.4 gpm)
b2
b3
15 bar (217.56 psi)
3 soll.
STEERING
SECTION
22
23
b4
X1
B4
Y1
A4
5 bar
72.5 psi
gpm)
19
0,7 L/min (0.18
Vp
TL
A3
T
25 bar (362.59 psi)
B3
2105
2105
2105
2105
2105
2105
210
+5bar
+5bar
210 bar
+5
210
+5 bar
210
+5
210 bar
210 bar
+5
(3045.872.50psi) (3045.872.5
0 psi) (3045.872.50psi) (3045.872.5
0 psi)
0 psi)(3045.872.50 psi) (3045.872.5
1 abb.
507.6 psi
35 bar
10
(170/350) (2465.6/5076.3)
5 bar
72.5 psi
(580.15
psi)
40 bar
(72.5 psi)
5 bar
380 10 bar
(5511.4 145 psi)
B
B
18
a1
14
21
a2
TR
PS
Mp
a3
a4
MLS
24
20 24
24
LS
PM
P1
19
15
Va
16
35bar
(507.63
psi)
17
45bar
(652.67 psi)
P2
PR
20+21
20
to 21 (290 to
bar 304.6 psi)
bar
LOAD
SENSING
VALVE "S"
11
PRESS.
CUT-OFF
"D"
1,3 to
- 1,5
bar
1,3
1,5
bar
(18.8 to 21.7 psi)
25 75
2 bar
OIL
HI-TECH 46
12
CONSTANT
POWER
"LR"
26
Volume of oil
4
tank 145 lt (38.3 gal.)
380 bar (5511.4 psi)
170KW
2100 RPM
(228 HP)
13
33
37bar
bar (478.6 to
33 to
37
STAND-BY 536.6 psi)
PRESS
1912 RPM
190
CC/REV
(Qmax=190 cc/rev;
Qmin=16 cc/rev)
D350R0036
Dozer hydraulic diagram

1. Blade control spool - 2. Tilt control spool - 3. Ripper control spool - 4. Hydraulic oil filter clogging indicator light - 5. Load sensing limitation valve (170 5 bar/350 5 bar, 2465.6 72.5 psi/5076.3 72.5 psi) - 6. Blade control spool safety valves (210 + 50 bar, 3045.8
72.5 psi) - 7. Tilt control spool safety valve (210 5 bar, 3045.8 72.5 psi) - 8. Ripper control spool safety valves (210 5 bar, 3045.8 72.5 psi) - 9. Bypass valve - 10. Unloading valve (37 bar, 536.6 psi, 38 lt/min, 10.03 gpm) - 11. Load sensing signal regulating valve 12. Cut-off signal valve - 13. Constant power control valve - 14. Accumulator 0.7 lt (0.18 gal.) - 15. Flow reduction valve - 16. Supply block max. Pressure valve 45 bar (652.67 psi) - 17. Supply block solenoid valve - 18. Reduction valve - 19. Electro proportional valves - 20.
Line LS decompression valve (stabilising the float function signal) - 21. General safety valve - 22. Piloting valve - 23. Selector valve - 24. Pressure compensators - 25. Ripper pitch function control diverter valve - 26. Ripper pitch function piloting solenoid valve - 27. Float
function piloting solenoid valve - 28. Float function pressure switch - C. Hydraulic oil radiator - D. Equipment/steering control valve - M. Steering hydraulic motor (see Sect. 4 Steering) - P. Variable displacement piston power pump 170 kW/2100 rpm (228 HP/2100 rpm) - Ma.
Blade control pilot valve - Mr. Ripper control pilot valve - Va. pilot valves supply valve - Vp. Steering piloting valve - S. Tank.
6-7
D350

6-8
D350

D350
6-9
6.2 TESTS
6.2.1 FLOW TEST IN SINGLE CIRCUITS
REFERENCE PERFORMANCE TABLE
Plug the delivery pipes to the blade and tilt actuating

cylinders, so that they can be loaded. Since the cylinders are equipped with stroke-end valves on the pistons, the load needed cannot be obtained when actuating the cylinders to stroke-end. On the other hand,
the ripper circuit can be tested working at stroke-end
in both directions.
PRESSURES
DANGER
equipment on the ground. Cut-off the engine, move
the control levers a few times, prior to disconnecting the connections of the system.
VALUES REQUIRED
Equipment (Max)
200 5 bar
(2900.7 72.5 psi)
Equip. control valve

piloting (Pick-up M)
31.5 to 35 bar
(456.9 to 507.6 psi)
Pump w/pilot valve

in neutral (Pick-up P)
33 to 37 bar
(478.6 to 536.6 psi)
Pump w/pilot valve

in float (Pick-up P)
33 to 37 bar
(478.6 to 536.6 psi)
Steering
Brakes control
Transmission
340 to 360 bar

(4931.3 to 5221.3 psi)
18 to 22 bar
(261 to 349 psi)
15 to 16.5 bar
(217.5 to 239.3 psi)
WARNING
DO NOT USE YOUR HANDS to identify pressure
leakages. Jets of fluid under pressure have enough
force to penetrate the skin. Start the engine and
wait that the hydraulic oil reaches the operational
temperature, then accelerate the engine to maximum speed.

6 - 10
D350

6.3.1 HYDRAULIC OIL RESERVOIR
(Removal / Installation)
ON
OFF
Removal
T E
NO AT
DO PER
O
Turn the main switch into "OFF" to cut-off the electrical system and apply a signal "DO NOT OPERATE"
on the switch as illustrated.
D350R0038
Fig. 6-3 Electrical system main switch
Then, proceed as follows:

- drain the hydraulic oil from the tank into a container
of appropriate capacity of at least 160 litres (42 gal.).
loosening the relevant plug (T) located under the
tank on the right side, as indicated in the figure.
- disconnect suction (4, fig. 6-5) and return pipes on
the tank;
- disconnect the oil return filter clogging sender (3,
fig. 6-5).
T
D350M0182
Fig. 6-4 Hydraulic oil reservoir

D350
- remove the four upper screws securing the oil tank

to the fuel tank;
- remove the four lower screws securing the tank to
the right fender;
- remove the tank using lifting eyes (7).
6 - 11
DANGER
Be sure chains and cables are anchored and the
anchor points are strong enough to handle the
expected load. Keep exposed personnel clear of
anchor points and cables or chains.
1
7
6
5
4
D350R0034
Fig. 6-5 Hydraulic oil tank and filters

1. Oil filler cap with breather and filter - 2. Return filter - 3. Oil filter clogging sensor - 4. Suction pipe - 5. Oil return sleeve 6. Oil level indicator - 7. Lifting eye.
FILTERS
The cleaning of the oil of the hydraulic system is provided by a full flow filter (2) located inside the hydraulic oil tank located on the pump return, equipped with
paper filtering element, by-pass valve to cut it off in
the event of clogging. A sender (3) signals the clogging of the filter with an indicator light on the dashboard.
The filter is reached by removing the relevant cover,
after removing the securing screws.
Return filter (2) must be periodically replaced every
500 hours work, to prevent the oil is not filtered by a
clogged filter.
WARNING
Reinstallation of filter on tank

The reinstallation of the filter and tank is done by reversing the removal sequence.

6 - 12
D350
Only after disconnecting all pipes, proceed with the

removal of the torque converter pump.
Hold the pump appropriately with cables and loosen
screws securing the pump. Then, remove the pump
from torque converter cover (3).
6.3.2 EQUIPMENT HYDRAULIC PUMP

Removal
Operate as described, here below:
- Drain the oil from equipment tank (5).
- Start the engine and let it run for a few seconds, to
empty pump (P) suction pump (1).
WARNING
Avoid kinking chains or steel cables.
Always wear safety gloves when handling chains
and cables.
- Remove the cab/operator seat and rops.

- Disconnect suction pipe (1) from pump (P), loosening retaining screws.
Make sure that the cables are secured and that the
securing point is strong enough to hold the load
applied.
Keep all by-standers away from the lifting point,
the cables or chains.
- Staccare la tubazione (2) svitando le viti sulle

semiflange.
- Disconnect draining pipes (6) from the pump side.
1
2
3
D350R0035
Fig. 6-6 Equipment hydraulic pump and pipes

P. Equipment hydraulic pump - 1. Suction pump from tank - 2. Delivery pipe to control valve - 3. Torque converter cover - 4.
Control valve - 5. Tank - 6. Draining pipe.

D350
6 - 13
6.3.3 HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE

(Overhaul)
The control valve is located on the right fender (see
fig. 6-7). to overhaul it is not necessary to remove it,
then proceed as follows:
- tag and disconnect all hydraulic pipes from the control valve (see fig. 6-8);
D350R0022
Fig. 6-7
WARNING
equipment on the ground. Cut-off the engine, move
the control levers a few times, prior to disconnecting the connections of the system.
- drain all the residual oil;

- proceed with the disassembly.
D350R0023
Fig. 6-8

6 - 14
D350
F. Tilt cylinder rear pivot or side rod

G. Push beam rear pivot
G1 = 100 + 10 daNm (737.3 + 73.7 lb.ft.)
L. Blade cutting edge securing nuts (102 to 106
daNm) (752 to 781.5 lb.ft.)
6.3.4 INSTALLATION OF BLADE

A. Push beam front pivot
B. and C. Cross rods pivot
D. Blade control cylinder rods pivot
E. Blade central link pivot
E
L
A
G1
F
G
D350R0030
PREPARATION
Print to installing any blade component, eliminate all
protective wrappings, paint or scales from the mounting or mating faces. Remove all plugs from the mounting holes.
INSTALLATION
Install a joint (G) on each track frame, tightening the
relevant securing screws.
Clean accurately the joint ball and the ball seats on
the beams and the pin covers. Smear generously the
ball joints and the joint ball seats with grease.
Position the blade and block it in a secure manner.

Position the individual blade push beams and install
the lower pins.
Install the blade cross rods, install the lever pins and
the locking plates.
Move the machine forward in between the push beams,
aligning the beams with the ball joints.
Remove the pin covers and grease the ball joint.
Install the shims and the cover, then lubricate the
screws prior to tightening them.
Install the blade lifting cylinder pins and locking.
Install the hoses and eventual tilt cylinder guards.
Grease accurately all linkages.

D350
6 - 15

6.4.1 HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE
Single, 4-spool control valve, made by Rexroth
Max. operating pressure 200/350 bar (2900.7/5076.3 psi)
Oil temperature - 20 C through 80 C (- 4 F through
176 F)
Recommended hydraulic oil HI-TECH 46 (ISO VG46)
Ports supply
SPOOL
A1 - B1 Hydraulic motor
supply ports
A2 - B2 RIPPER cylinders
supply ports
A3 - B3 TILT cylinders
supply ports
A4 - B4 BLADE cylinders
supply ports
A1
B1
A2
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
X1
6
A = Lowering
B = Lifting
STEERING
2
RIPPER
8
TILT
7
BLADE
6
MP
MSL
Y1
LS
Spool piloting
SPOOL
a1 - b1
a2 - b2
a3 - b3
a4 - b4
=
=
=
=
STEERING
RIPPER
TILT
BLADE
b1
a1
STEERING
b2
a2
RIPPER
b3
a3
TILT
a4
BLADE
b4
Steering hydraulic motor control

safety valves, setting 380 5 bar
(5511.4 72.5 psi)
M
T T
T
SM1607
Fig. 6-10 Hydraulic control valve and connections (Ref. D hydraulic system diagram)
2. Steering hydraulic motor control safety valve setting 380 5 bar (5511.4 72.5 psi) - 5. Equipment circuit main safety
valve (setting 190 bar, 2755.7 psi) and steering circuit (350 5 bar, 5076.3 72.5 psi) - 6. Ripper spool safety valves
(setting 230 5 bar, 3335.8 72.5 psi) - 7. Tilt spool safety valves (setting 230 5 bar, 3335.8 72.5 psi) - 8. Blade spool
safety valve (setting 230 5 bar, 3335.8 72.5 psi) - T. To hydraulic oil tank - P. From powering pump.

6 - 16
D350
6.4.2 HYDRAULIC POWER PUMP

Leftward rotation
SM1608
R
Fig. 6-11 Hydraulic pump
S. Suction from tank - M. Pressure pick-up - X. To control valve - A. Power to control valve - R. To powering block.
Power to control valve
To piloting
block
M
20 to 21 bar
(230 to
304.6 psi)
LOAD
SENSING
VALVE "S"
11
PRESS
CUT-OFF
"D"
380 bar
(5511.4 psi)
CONST ANT
POWER
"LR"
170 kW
(228 HP)
@ 2100 RPM
TORQUE
CONVERTER
12
13
33 to 37 bar
(478.6 to 536.6 psi)
STAND-BY
PRESS
130
CC/REV
(Qmax = 190 cc/re v;

Qmin = 16 cc/re v)
P
S
Hydraulic diagram
D350R0300
Brand ................................................................................................................................................. REXROTH

Variable displacement piston type .......................................................................................................... A11VL0
Total nominal delivery at 2000 rpm ............................................................................. 380 litri/min (5511.4 gpm)

D350
6 - 17
6.4.3 BLADE CYLINDER SUPPORT FORK
D350R0024
Fig. 6-12 Blade cylinder support fork
- Diameter of inner bush seat .....................................................

Outer diameter of inner bush ....................................................
Installation interference ............................................................
111.861 to 111.921 mm (4.404 to 4.406 in)

111.965 to 112.000 mm (4.408 to 4.409 in)
0.044 to 0.139 mm (0.001 to 0.005 in)
- Diameter of outer bush seat .....................................................

Outer diameter of inner bush ....................................................
Installation interference ............................................................
154.837 to 154.900 mm (6.093 to 6.098 in)

154.960 to 155.000 mm (6.100 to 6.102 in)
0.006 to 0.163 mm (0.0002 to 0.0064 in)
- Inner diameter of inner bush .....................................................

Outer of pin in correspondence with inner bush ........................
Play .........................................................................................
100.2 to 100.270 mm (3.944 to 3.497 in)

99.965 to 100.000 mm (3.935 to 3.937 in)
0.200 to 0.305 mm (0.008 to 0.012 in)
- Diameter of outer bush .............................................................

Outer diameter of pin in correspondence with outer bus ...........
Play .........................................................................................
140.210 to 140.280 mm (5.520 to 5.522 in)

139.960 to 140.000 mm (5.510 to 5.511 in)
0.210 to 0.320 mm (0.008 to 0.012 in)
- Inner diameter of cylinder pin (in its seat) .................................

Outer diameter of cylinder joint ................................................
Play .........................................................................................
60.050 to 60.112 mm (2.364 to 2.366 in)

59.954 to 60.000 mm (2.360 to 2.362 in)
0.050 to 0.158 mm (0.002 to 0.006 in)
- Joint plate securing screws tightening torqu (1) ........................
21 to 23 daNm (154.8 to 169.6 lb.ft.)

6 - 18
D350
6.4.4 BLADE LIFTING CONTROL CYLINDER
11
3
13
1
12
10
6
D350R0025
Fig. 6-13 Blade lifting cylinders
Nominal diameter of rod ....................... 70 mm (2.756 in)

Nominal diameter of piston ................. 120 mm (4.724 in)
Stroke of cylinder rod ......................... 1250 mm (49.2 in)
Tightening torque of front sleeve (6) . (13.7 daNm, 101 lb.ft.)
Tightening torque of piston securing
nut (9) ................................... (221.4 daNm, 1632.4 lb.ft.)
- Tightening torque of dowel (1) .......(3.1 daNm, 22.8 lb.ft.)
1.
Rod assembly
2.
Sleeve assembly
3.
Rod seals
4.
Front sleeve
5.
O-Ring
6.
Screw TCEI M12 x 45
7.
Piston seals
8.
Piston
9.
Nut
10.
Ring
11.
Dowel
12.
Ball joint
13.
Circlip

D350
6 - 19
6.4.5 BLADE TILT CONTROL CYLINDER (Bulldozer version)
7 9-10 8 2 1 15 14 13
12 17 16
11
D350R0026
Fig. 6-14 Section of blade tilt cylinder
Nominal diameter of rod ....................... 90 mm (3.543 in)

Stroke of cylinder rod ......................... 180 mm (7.087 in)
Tightening torque of front sleeve
screws (4) ..................................... 44 daNm (324.4 lb.ft.)
- Tightening torque of piston
securing nut (12) .......................... 120 daNm (884.7 lb.ft.)
- Tightening torque of dowel (17) ....... 5.7 daNm (42 lb.ft.)
1.
Sleeve assembly
2.
Rod assembly
3.
Ball joint flange
4.
Front sleeve
5.
Mud scraper seal
6.
Seal assembly
7.
Retaining ring
8.
Guide ring
9.
O-Ring
10.
Retaining ring
11.
Screw TCE M20 x 2.5
12.
Piston
13.
Piston seal
14.
Piston guide
15.
Piston seal
16.
Nut
17.
Dowel

6 - 20
D350
6.4.6 BLADE TILT CONTROL CYLINDER (Angledozer version)
6 54 3
10
D350R0027
Fig. 6-15 Blade tilt cylinder assembly
Nominal diameter of cylinder rod .......... 90 mm (3.543 in)

Cylinder rod stroke ............................. 130 mm (5.118 in)
Tightening torque (5) .............. 595.5 daNm (4390.6 lb.ft.)
Tightening torque (6) .................. 35.8 daNm (263.9 lb.ft.)
Piston tightening torque (10) ...... 60.3 daNm (444.6 lb.ft.)
1.
Sleeve asembly
2.
Rod assembly
3.
Piston
4.
Piston seal
5.
Nut
6.
Dowel
7.
Front sleeve
8.
O-Ring
9.
Rod seal
10.
Screw TCE M22 x 2.5 x 55

D350
6 - 21
6.4.7 RIPPER LIFTING CYLINDER
10
3
6
D350R0028
Fig. 6-16 Ripper lifting cylinder
- Nominal diameter of rod ...................................................................... 90 mm (3.543 in)

- Nominal diameter of piston .................................................................. 180 mm (7.087 in)
- Stroke of cylinder rod .......................................................................... 533 mm (20.984 in)
- Outer diameter of rod/sleeve bush ...................................................... 89.000 to 88.976 mm (3.502 to 3.503 in)
Diameter of bush seat ......................................................................... 88.87 to 88.93 mm (3.498 to 3.501 in)
Installation interference ....................................................................... 0.130 to 0.046 mm (0.005 to 0.002 in)
- Inner diameter of rod/sleeve bush ....................................................... 76.581 to 77.012 mm (3.015 to 3.031 in)
Play .................................................................................................... 0.939 to 0.254 mm (0.036 to 0.010 in)
- Tightening torque of sleeve ........ 71.6 daNm (527.9 lb.ft.)
- Tightening torque of rod
securing nut ........................... 596.4 daNm (4397.2 lb.ft.)
- Tightening torque of dowel ............ 3.6 daNm (26.5 lb.ft.)
1.
Rod assembly
2.
Sleeve assembly
3.
Rod seal
4.
Front sleeve
5.
O-Ring
6.
Screw TE M20 x 2.5 x 85
7.
Piston seal
8.
Piston
9.
Nut
10.
Dowel

6 - 22
D350
6.4.8 RIPPER PITCH CYLINDER

4
10
1
D350R0029
Fig. 6-17 Ripper pitch cylinder
- Nominal diameter of rod ...................................................................... 80 mm (3.149 in)

- Nominal diameter of piston .................................................................. 160 mm (6.299 in)
- Stroke of cylinder rod .......................................................................... 622 mm (24.488 in)
- Outer diameter of rod/sleeve bush ...................................................... 89.000 to 88.976 mm (3.503 to 3.502 in)
Mounting interference .......................................................................... 0.130 to 0.046 mm (0.005 to 0.002 in)
- Inner diameter of rod/sleeve bush ....................................................... 76.581 to 77.012 mm (3.015 to 3.032 in)
Outer diameter of pin .......................................................................... 76.327 to 76.073 mm (3.005 to 2.995 in)
Play .................................................................................................... 0.939 to 0.254 mm (0.037 to 0.010 in)
- Sleeve tightening torque ............. 56,9 daNm (419.5 lb.ft.)
- Rod nut tightening torque ........... 470,8 daNm (3471.2 lb.ft.)
- Dowel tightening torque ................. 3,6 daNm (26.5 lb.ft.)
1.
Rod assembly
2.
Sleeve assembly
3.
Rod seal
4.
Front sleeve
5.
O-Ring
6.
Screw TE M20 x 2.5 x 85
7.
Piston seal
8.
Piston
9.
Nut
10.
Dowel

D350
6 - 23
6.4.9 BLADE PUSH ARMS AND RODS
A
G1
C
G
D350R0030
Fig. 6-18 Bulldozer equipment linkage
A - Outer diameter of push arm front joint pin ....................................

Inner diameter of ball joint ............................................................
Play .............................................................................................
79.954 to 80.000 mm (3.148 to 3.150 in)

80.200 to 80.274 mm (3.157 to 3.160 in)
0.200 to 0.320 mm (2.008 to 0.012 in)
B - Outer diameter of rear rod and tilt cylinder pin ..............................

Inner diameter of pin bush ............................................................
Play .............................................................................................
79.954 to 80.000 mm (3.148 to 3.150 in)

80.220 to 80.290 mm (3.158 to 3.161 in)
0.220 to 0.336 mm (0.008 to 0.013 in)
C - Diameter of bush on rod and tilt cylinder ......................................

Outer diameter of bush ................................................................
Play .............................................................................................
91.895 to 91.949 mm (3.618 to 3.620 in)

91.965 to 92.000 mm (3.620 to 3.622 in)
0.016 to 0.105 mm (0.0006 to 0.004 in)
D - Outer diameter of diagonal main rod and blade main pin ..............
Inner diameter of bushes .............................................................
Play .............................................................................................
79.954 to 80.000 mm (3.148 to 3.150 in)

80.220 to 80.290 mm (3.158 to 3.161 in)
0.220 to 0.336 mm (0.008 to 0.013 in)
E - Inner diameter of cross link and blade main pin bush seat ...........
Outer diameter of bushes .............................................................
Installation interference ................................................................
91.875 to 91.929 mm (3.617 to 3.619 in)

91.965 to 92.000 mm (3.620 to 3.622 in)
0.036 to 0.125 mm (0.0014 to 0.0049 in)
F - Outer diameter of front diagonal pin .............................................

Inner diameter of ball joint ............................................................
Play .............................................................................................
69.954 to 70.000 mm (2.754 to 2.755 in)

70.200 to 70.274 mm (2.763 to 2.766 in)
0.200 to 0.320 mm (2.008 to 0.012 in)
G - Outer diameter of push arm joint pin ............................................

Inner diameter of push arm rear pin bush (in its seat) ...................
Play .............................................................................................
137.7 to 137.9 mm (5.421 to 5.429 in)

138.12 to 138.493 mm (5.437 to 5.452 in)
0.212 to 0.793 mm (0.008 to 0.031 in)

6 - 24
D350
6.4.10 C-FRAME AND RODS
C-D-E
H-F
D350R0032
Fig. 6-19 Angledozer equipment pivots
A - Outer diameter of C-frame pivot joint ............................................

Inner diameter of C-frame rear pin bush (seated) ..........................
Play .............................................................................................
137.7 to 137.9 mm (5.421 to 5.429 in)

138.112 to 138.493 mm (5.437 to 5.452 in)
0.212 to 0.793 mm (0.0008 to 0.031 in)
B - Inner diameter of blade ball joint seat ...........................................

Outer diameter of blade ball joint pin ............................................
170.000 to 171.000 mm (6.692 to 6.732 in)

169.750 to 170.000 mm (6.683 to 6.693 in)
C - Diameter of small seat of flange for rod pin ..................................

Outer diameter of small pin ..........................................................
Play .............................................................................................
69.740 to 69.900 mm (2.746 to 2.752 in)

69.088 to 68.986 mm (2.720 to 2.716 in)
0.652 to 0.914 mm (0.025 to 0.036 in)
D - Diameter of large seat of flange for rod pin ...................................

Outer diameter of small pin ..........................................................
Play .............................................................................................
95.140 to 95.300 mm (3.745 to 3.752 in)

94.386 to 94.488 mm (3.716 to 3.720 in)
0.652 to 0.914 mm (0.025 to 0.036 in)
E - Outer diameter of ball pin .............................................................

Inner diameter of rod pin ..............................................................
50.546 to 51.054 mm (1.990 to 2.010 in)

50.800 to 51.181 mm (2.000 to 2.015 in)
F - Inner diameter of pin seat ............................................................

Outer diameter of pin ...................................................................
Play .............................................................................................
50.292 to 50.546 mm (1.980 to 1.990 in)

49.900 to 50.000 mm (1.964 to 1.968 in)
0.292 to 0.646 mm (0.011 to 0.025 in)
G - Diameter of upper rod pin in lower rod ..........................................

Outer diameter of upper rod .........................................................
Play .............................................................................................
51.130 to 51.358 mm (2.012 to 2.022 in)

50.749 to 50.876 mm (1.998 to 2.002 in)
0.254 to 0.609 mm (0.010 to 0.024 in)
H - Inner diameter of pin seat ............................................................

Outer diameter of pin ...................................................................
Play .............................................................................................
63.246 to 63.500 mm (2.490 to 2.500 in)

62.738 to 62.865 mm (2.470 to 2.475 in)
0.381 to 0.762 mm (0.015 to 0.030 in)

D350
6 - 25
6.4.11 SINGLE SHANK RIPPER

Model .......................................................
Type .........................................................
PVD-350
Parallelogram, actuated by four double stroke cylinders, equipped
with a semi-curved shank with interchangeable tip, three positions
Maximum work depth ...................................................................................................... 1172 mm (46.142 in)

Maximum work width ...................................................................................................... 1250 mm (49.215 in)
Maximum ground clearance of teeth ............................................................................... 1020 mm (40.157 in)
Nominal diameter of lift cylinder piston ................................................................................ 180 mm (7.086 in)
Nominal diameter of lift cylinder rod ...................................................................................... 90 mm (3.543 in)
Maximum stroke of lift cylinder rod ................................................................................... 533 mm (20.984 in)
Nominal diameter of pitch cylinder piston ............................................................................ 160 mm (6.299 in)
Nominal diameter of pitch cylinder rod .................................................................................. 80 mm (3.149 in)
Maximum stroke of pitch cylinder rod................................................................................ 622 mm (24.488 in)
Ramp angle ................................................................................................................................................ 24
Ground clearance under shank bar with ripper lowered ................................................................... 0 mm (0 in)
Ground clearance under shank bar with ripper lifted:
pitch cylinders extended

pitch cylinders retracted
- position 1 ............................................................... 124 mm (4.881 in) ............................. 584 mm (22.992 in)
- position 2 ..............................................................381 mm (15.000 in) ............................. 737 mm (29.015 in)
- position 3 ..............................................................630 mm (24.803 in) ........................... 1020 mm (40.157 in)
2500 (98.425)
2212 (87.086)
1064 (41.889)
MIDSIDE POSITION
1172 (46.142)
90 (3.543)
2600 (102.362)
2190 (86.220)
38 CH
PIT
1250 (49.215)
D350R0033

6 - 26
D350
6.4.12 TIGHTENING TORQUE
ITEMS TO BE TIGHTENED
THREAD
TIGHTENING
TORQUE
daNm
Attachment hydraulic pump

Screws securing covers to pump bodies .........................................
M20 x 1.5
60
Angledozer attachment
Nuts for rear struts pivot flange securing
screws ............................................................................................
M20 x 1.5
60
Bulldozer attachment
Screws securing the pivot pin retaining plates for cross rods
and control cylinder rods .................................................................
M16 x 2
23
Blade lifting cylinders

Front sleeve ....................................................................................
Piston locking nut ...........................................................................
M12 x 1.75
M42 x 3
13.7
221.4
Quick drop valves

Screws securing front and rear covers ............................................
M16 x 1.5
30
Tilt control cylinder (Angledozer with hydraulic tilt)

Front sleeve securing screws ..........................................................
M22 x 2.5
M52 x 3
60.3
595.5
Tilt control cylinder (Bulldozer)

Front sleeve securing screws ..........................................................
M20 x 2.5
M40 x 2
44
600
Ripper PVD350
Screws securing the ripper to transmission housing ........................
.......................................................................................................
1.250-12 x 4"
1.500-12 x 4"
193 213.5
346 373
Lift control cylinders

Sleeve rod side ...............................................................................
Piston locking nut (o) .......................................................................
M20 x 2.5
M52 x 3
71.5
595.5
(o) Lubricate with engine oil
SECTION 7
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH
SUBJECT
PAGE
SAFETY RULES ................................................................................................................ 7-3

7.1
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
7.1.4
7.1.5
7.1.6
PROTECTION TREE WIRING DIAGRAM ........................................................................... 7-4

Fuses ............................................................................................................................... 7-5
Link fuses and cold starting ............................................................................................. 7-6
Main switch ...................................................................................................................... 7-7
Engine starter switch ....................................................................................................... 7-7
Back-up alarm .................................................................................................................. 7-8
Starter motor .................................................................................................................... 7-8
7.2
7.2.1
INSTRUMENT PANEL/MONITOR - OPERATION ............................................................... 7-9

Wiring diagram of instrument panel/monitor .................................................................... 7-11
7.3
MONITOR SENDERS ...................................................................................................... 7-12
7.4
7.4.1
DISPLAY .......................................................................................................................... 7-17

Diagnoses on display ..................................................................................................... 7-17
7.5
BUZZER .......................................................................................................................... 7-20
7.6
RELAY GROUP - DIODE BOXES - DIVERTER BOX, POWER RELAY ........................... 7-21
7.7
MAIN CONNECTORS ...................................................................................................... 7-24

7-2
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Carefully read personal and machine SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (at the beginning of this manual)
D350

D350
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
7-3
SAFETY RULES
WARNING
When working on the electrical system, always wear
safety glasses and remove rings, wrist watches and
any metal jewellery.
DISCONNECT
WARNING
Prior to inspection or repair interventions on electrical
components, DISCONNECT GROUND CABLE (A)
from the battery negative terminal (B). DISCONNECT
CABLE (D) FROM POSITIVE TERMINAL (D).
A
B
C
D
BATTERY 12V x 2
TO GROUND
WARNING
NEVER REST METAL OBJECTS on the battery to
prevent dangerous short-circuits.
WARNING
SM9500
FUMES FROM THE BATTERY ELECTROLYTE ARE FLAMMABLE.

Never generate sparks nor bring free flames near the batteries. The emission of fumes is stronger when recharging.
WARNING
BATTERY FUMES ARE DANGEROUS if in contact with the skin or materials.
WARNING
Beware when maintaining the battery.
SM9538
CORRECT
SM9539
Use a flashlight to inspect the level of the battery electrolyte.

Always perform the inspection with engine inoperative.
Do not charge the battery or start the engine with jumper
cables if the battery is frozen-up. warm-up the battery to 15
C (60 F) otherwise it could explode.
SBAGLIATO
F1A - 5A
F10B - 7,5A
F4A - 5A
F11B - 5A
F5A - 5A
F7B - 20A
F9A - 7,5A
COMPRESSOR SOLENOID
CONDENSER FAN
RADIO - OPTIONAL
VOLTAGE REDUCTION
CIGARETTE LIGHTER
CAB CEILING LIGHTS
HORN
ENGINE CONTROLLER
ENGINE CONTROLLER
ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS
STARTER MOTOR CONTROL
CAB SERVICES POWER
ALTERNATOR
F9B - 5A
F8B - 5A
F6B - 7,5A
F5B - 7,5A
F4B - 7,5A
F3B - 7,5A
F2B - 20A
F4D - 4A
F1B - 7,5A
F11A - 7,5A
F10A - 7,5A
F8A - 5A
F7A - 7,5A
SEAT COMPRESSOR
HEATED SEAT
FRONT WIPERS
D350M0066
FRONT & REAR WASHER PUMP
REAR WIPERS
DOOR WASHER
LEFT DOOR WIPER
RIGHT DOOR WIPER
CONDITIONER RELAY SOLENOID
HEATER ELECTRIC FAN
SENTINEL SYSTEM
SWITCH SYMBOL LIGHTS
FRONT LIGHTS
REAR WORK LIGHTS
MICROCONTROLLER
(PIN 1,2,33,46)
MICROCONTROLLER
(PIN 12,13,14,24,39,40,41,43,52)
FRONT WORK LIGHTS
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
CAB SERVICES RELAY COIL
SERVICES RELAY COIL
OPTIONAL
FLOAT RELAY AND SOLENOID VALVE
RIPPER SOLENOID VALVE
RESISTOR
MULTIPLE INSTRUMENT
F6A - 7,5A
F10A - A
STARTING WAITING INDICATOR
FC - 10A
FB - 10A
BUZZER
LINK
MACHINE SERVICES POWER
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
INDICATOR
ENGINE WARNING INDICATOR
ENGINE CUT-OFF INDICATOR
BRAKE QUICK DISCHARGE

SOLENOID VALVE
ENGINE CONTROLLER
SAFETY SWITCH
PILOT VALVE POWER CUT-OFF
STEERING SAFETY
SOLENOID VALVE
OPERATOR PROXIMITY SWITCH
STARTER RELAY COIL
ENGINE CONTROLLER
ST M ACC Q2 Q1 B
OFF
ACC
ON
START
FUSE 80A
STARTER MOTOR
7-4
F2A - 5A
F3A - 5A
FC - 5A
KEY SWITCH
LINK
FUSE 50A
WIRING DIAGRAM - PROTECTION TREE

D350

D350
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
7-5
7.1.1 FUSES
They protect the electrical system from damages
caused by overloaded circuits. Replace the fuse when
burnt-out. In the event a fuse of a determined circuit
burns frequently, check the circuit and repair it, as
required.
Remove the pressure fitted covers on fuse boxes (A)
and (B) in the cab.
B
SM9501
WARNING
Always replace fuses with parts of the same type
and capacity. Otherwise the electrical system could
be damaged.
on CAB
on ROPS
WARNING
In the event it is necessary to replace frequently
fuses, an electrical problem could exist.
Contact a FIAT KOBELCO Dealer.
The fuses protect:

FUSE HOLDER A
(upper mounted)
Box A
1 = Machine/cab services coil - 5 Amp

2 = Electric cut-off (holding)
Operator safety lever - 5 Amp
3 = Safe starting - 5 Amp
4 = Horn - Monitor - Optional - 5 Amp
5 = Operator safety relay - 5 Amp
6 = Horn - 7,5 Amp
7 = Micro Controller - 7,5 Amp
8 = Gearshifting buttons - 5 Amp
9 = Cab ceiling lights - Cigarette lighter
Voltage converter - 7,5 Amp
10 = Front work lights - 7,5 Amp
11 = Rear work lights - 7,5 Amp
Box B
SM9502

7-6
D350
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
FUSE HOLDER B
WARNING
1
2
3
4
5
6
=
=
=
=
=
=
7 =
8 =
9 =
10 =
11 =
Front lights - Symbol lighting - 7,5 Amp

Heater electric fan - 20 Amp
Right door wiper - 7,5 Amp
Left door wiper - Door washer pump - 7,5 Amp
Rear wipers - 7,5 Amp
Front wipers - Front & rear washer
pump - 7,5 Amp
Condenser fan - 20 Amp
Pre-heating relay - Pre-heating indicator
light - 5 Amp
Socket and epron - 5 Amp
Optional - 7,5 Amp
Not used - 5 Amp
Always disconnect the ground cable of the battery prior to cleaning, repairing, connecting or disconnecting any wire of the electrical system, to
prevent personal injuries.
Always keep all lights equipping the machine efficient. Replace burnt-out bulbs at onc.
7.1.2 LINK" FUSES AND COLD STARTING FUSE

"LINK" fuses are seen when opening the left side engine hood, located on the inner side of the frame beam.
Fuse 1 protects the machine services - 50 Amp.
Fuse 2 protects the alternator - 80 Amp.
2
1
D350M0065
1-2. LINK fuses
MACHINE SERVICES "LINK" FUSE (50 AMP)

WIRES
777 AL + batteries
772 To diverter box
777
772
774
773
ALTERNATOR "LINK" FUSE (80 AMP)

WIRES
774 AL + batteries
773 To alternator
SM9504

D350
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
7-7
7.1.3 MAIN SWITCH

LOCATION - Inside the left panel, under the cab.
ON
OFF
T E
NO AT
DO PER
O
D350R0021
Battery
To ground
SM9508
7.1.4 ENGINE STARTING SWITCH

LOCATION - Right console in the cab.
OFF
H
AC
C
A-G G-R
H-R
M-V
ON
START
SM9505
B
WIRES
Red
Yellow/Red
Brown/Green
Grey/Red
Light blue/Yell
position B
position G1
position ACC
position M
position ST
G1
G2 ACC
ST
H
OFF
ACC
ON
START
SM9506

7-8
D350
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
7.1.5 BACK-UP ALARM

WIRES
163
000
To electronic controller
To ground
LOCATION - Right rear side of machine, under fuel

tank.
D350R0039
7.1.6 STARTER MOTOR

Brand: DELCO - REMY
Type: 400 24 Volt
To batteries
To engine starting
power relay 90 Amp
SM9510

D350
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
7.2
7-9
INSTRUMENT PANEL / MONITOR
The monitor is visible in the cab in front of the operator's seat and is made of a panel on which no repairs
are possible, formed by a circuit board and LEDs.
ON
OFF
- Turn the main switch of the electrical system ON.

T E
NO AT
DO PER
O
- Turn the engine starter switch in the cab onto the

first position.
D350R0038
Operation
When activated, the instrument performs a short test
for 1 second switching all LEDS, segments of the
display and buzzer ON; then the display (ref. S) indicates the engine hours.
The indicator lights and instruments indicate the state
of the machine. Once the engine is started, pointer
(R) shows the engine r.p.m., with 100 rpm increments.
To return visualising the engine hours, it is necessary
to switch off and re-power the system using the key;
the hours stay ON until the engine is cut-off.
In the event of any malfunction, this is signalled by
L
A
M
B
G H
N O P
the relevant LED indicators, identified by the appropriate "ISO standard" symbols, and, for part of them,
a sound alarm during 3 seconds is associated; in case
the malfunction persists, the alarm warns the operator with one minute cycles, lasting one second.
The engine work hours are recorded only when the
engine speed exceeds 500 rpm.
The instrument receives data from an outer control
unit, through serial line RX for the indication of the
speed selected and eventual error codes.
These codes are indicated on the 5-digit numerical
display (S).
2 6MA SCREWS SECURING THE SUPPORT
FH
15
90
0
12
40
50
REAR VIEW CONNECTOR SIDE
20
10
70
PIN 1
PIN 2
25
PPM
X 100
CONNECTEUR CONNECTEUR
8 VOIES
12 VOIES
T
SM9511
SM9512

7 - 10
D350
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
REF. DESCRIPTION
ALARM
Signal
CON. 12
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
CON. 8
Red LED, engine air cleaner

NO
IN (-)
2
Red LED, hydraulic oil filter
NO
IN (-)
1
Red LED, transmission oil pressure
YES
IN (-)
8
Red LED, Engine oil pressure
YES
IN (-)
2
Red LED, general alarm
YES
activated by ind.
C, D, L, M, N, O, P
Green LED, front work lights
NO
IN (+24V)
3
Green LED, rear work lights
NO
IN (+24V)
7
Green LED, head lights + instr. light.
NO
IN (+24V)
12
Red LED, engine coolant temperature
YES
IN (-)
10
Red LED, transmission oil temperature
YES
IN (-)
9
Red LED, battery
YES
IN (-)
4
Red LED, brakes failure
YES
IN (-)
4
Red LED, fuel reserve
NO
IN (-)
11
Engine coolant temperature indicator at 10 lcd YES
IN (var. -)
1
Engine rpm analogical display at 24 lcd
IN (+24V)
6
5 digit display for No. speeds and
"engine hours"
NO
IN (-) (NPN-NO)
3 (RX)
T
Fuel level indicator at 10 lcd
YES
IN (var. -)
5
BUZZER OUTPUT
OUT (-)
8
POWER INLET "positive"
IN (+24V)
6
GROUND INPUT (GND)
IN (-)
7
Then connectors are male, one 8-way and one 12-way.
The corresponding connectors for the harness are of a female type, 12-way and 8-way, both with female contacts.

D350
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
7 - 11
7.2.1 ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM OF INSTRUMENT PANEL/MONITOR
924
8 / 12
924
5/8
949
924
105
924
557
557
23 / W
555
555
8/8
1/8
552
552
ENGINE COOL
TEMP. SENSOR 107C
P / N 7603258
837
10 / 12
21 / A
RESISTANCE
82 0
9W
558
558
ENGINE COOL
TEMPERATURE S.W 114C
P / N 76076946
2 / 12
663
000
663
23 / B
637
637
000
23 / D
MONITOR
P / N 76045846
(OPTIONAL) M
637
000
23 / F
DIODE
VF5406
600V
3A
FUSE 7.5A (BOX 10b)

P / N 11054890
000
23 / W
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

WHIT RESERVE INDIC.
P / N 76070631
924
949
FUSE 5A (BOX 4a)

P / N 11054690
11 / 12
BUZZER
P / N 76028370
AIR CLEANER
RESTRICTION S.W
P / N 79102142
637
4 / 12
19 / 5
1 / 12
580
580
000
23 / U
12 / 12
HYDRAULIC OIL
RESTRICTION SW.
P/ N 79094756
000
229
9 / 12
3 / 12
7/8
2/8
ENGINE SPEED INDICATOR
559
23 / K
TRASMISS. OIL
HIGT TEMPERATURE SW. 119C
P / N 76032582
225
DATA TRANSMISSION
559
N - sc
G - sc
503
503
000
23 / D
3/8
ENGINE OIL
LOW PRESS. SW. 0.5 bar
P / N 76040394
6/8
8 / 12
581
581
000
23 / H
N-t
TRANSMISSION OIL
LOW PRESS. SW. 1 bar
P / N 79102096
7 / 12
4/8
611
611
611
000
23 / O
CLUTCH - BREAK OIL

LOW PRESSURE SW. 11.5 bar
P / N 79102095
D350R0044
PIN. 1
PIN. 2
8-12 way rear

connectors
CONN.
8 WAY
CONN.
12 WAY
D350R0048

7 - 12
D350
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
7.3 MONITOR SENDERS

Location on engine
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Air cleaner clogging sensor.

Engine coolant max. temperature switch.
Engine rpm sensor.
Engine oil low pressure sensor.
Alternator.
1
2
4
Location on the oil - fuel tank

5
6.
7.
8.
Fuel level sensor.

Hydraulic oil filter clogging sensor.
Brakes - clutches low oil pressure sensor
(set at 11.5 bar, 166.8 psi).
9. Transmission oil low pressure sensor
(set at 1 bar, 14.5 psi).
10. Transmission oil temperature sensor
(119 C, 247 F).
D350R0047
6
Hydraulic oil
reservoir
Fuel
reservoir
D350R0046
9
Torque converter
10
SM9516

D350
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
7 - 13
1. AIR CLEANER CLOGGING SENSOR

663
000
WIRES
663 To monitor
000 To ground
Setting: (closing of contact) 62 mbar 8C (0.89 psi
46.4 F).
LOCATION - Left front side of machine, over the air
cleaner.
Installation notes
SM9517
The depression switch must be tightened manually,

without using tools.
2. ENGINE COOLANT
MAX. TEMPERATURE SWITCH
552
528
WIRES
528
552
To monitor
To monitor
Thread:
Setting:
Wrench:
Torque wrench:
M16 x 1.5
100 3C (212 37.4 F)
22 mm (0.87 in)
2.5 daNm (18.4 lb.ft.)
LOCATION - Right front side of machine, on engine.
3. ENGINE RPM
Thread:
Wrench:
Torque wrench:
D350R0040
Monitor
3/4 - 16 UNF
29 mm (1.14 in)
1.9 to 2.5 daNm
(14 to 18.4 lb.ft.)
Electronic
controller
LOCATION - On engine flywheel housing.
SM9519

7 - 14
4. ENGINE OIL LOW PRESSURE SENSOR
503
000
WIRES
503
000
D350
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
To monitor
To ground
Thread:
Setting:
Wrench:
Torque wrench:
M10 x 1 taper
0.7 bar (10.1 psi)
27 mm (1.06 in)
3.5 daNm (25.8 lb.ft.)
The sensor is normally closed, it opens when the pressure drops or reaches the setting value.
SM9520
5. ALTERNATOR
To Link fuse 80 Amp
Batteries
BRAND: DELCO - REMY 70A

Power voltage:
24V
LOCATION - On engine.
503
000
Grounding
wire
SM9521
6. FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

WIRES
555
557
000
To monitor
To monitor
To ground
LOCATION - Rear side of machine over the fuel

reservoir.
557
555
000
SM9522

D350
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
7 - 15
7. HYDRAULIC OIL FILTER CLOGGING SENSOR

000
580
WIRES
580
000
To monitor
To ground
Thread:
Setting:
Wrench:
M18 x 1.5
2 to 2.2 bar (29 to 31.9 psi)
22 mm (0.87 in)
LOCATION - On hydraulic oil reservoir.
SM9523
8. BRAKES AND STEERING CLUTCHES

OIL LOW PRESSURE SENSOR
611
000
WIRES
611
000
To monitor
To ground
Thread:
Setting:
M10 x 1 taper
12.5 to 11 bar
(181.29 to 159.5 psi)
27 mm (1.06 in)
3.5 daNm (25.8 lb.ft.)
Wrench:
Torque wrench:
The sensor is normally closed, it opens when the pressure drops or reaches the setting value.
9. TRANSMISSION OIL LOW PRESSURE

SENSOR
SM9524
581
000
WIRES
581
000
To monitor
To ground
Thread:
Setting:
Wrench:
Torque wrench:
M10 x 1 taper
12.5 to 11 bar
(181.29 to 159.5 psi)
27 mm (1.06 in)
3.5 daNm (25.8 lb.ft.)
The sensor is normally closed, it opens when the

pressure drops or reaches the setting value.
SM9525

7 - 16
D350
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
10. TRANSMISSION OIL LOW PRESSURE

SENSOR
559
WIRES
559
000
To monitor
To ground
Thread:
Setting:
Wrench:
Torque wrench:
M16 x 1.5
119 3C (246.2 37.4 F)
22 mm (0.87 in)
2.5 daNm (18.4 lb.ft.)
SM9526

D350
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
7 - 17
7.4 DISPLAY
The display indicates three functions:
A) - Digital hourmeter, indicating the total hours work
and is automatically actuated when the engine
operates.
B) - Speed engaged
C) - Troubleshooting the transmission operation
DISPLAY
7.4.1 DIAGNOSIS ON DISPLAY
1st
2nd
3rd
D350R0050
4th
5th digit
The display has 5 digit fields providing the following

messages.
D350R0049
A - Work hour indication

Or
B - Speed engaged indication + failure code
Segnalazione contaore lavoro

The engine hours are indicated when the instrument
panel is switched ON, for about one second, when
the instrument undergoes a general test. To return to
display the engine hours, it is necessary to disconnect and re-power with the starter key.
The hours stay on until the engine is cut-off.

7 - 18
D350
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Speed engaged signal + failure code

The first digit indicates the speed engaged (ex. 1st
speed).
The second indicates (in case of failure) letter E.
st nd
1
2 (digit)
The 3rd, 4th and 5th digits identify the failure code (ex.
failure code No. 024).
When the components failed is one only, the codes
listed in TABLE 1 appear.
For each failure code, identify the corresponding component listed.
3rd
SM9528
4th
5th (digit)
SM9528
TABLE 1
Failed component
Failure code
Left proportional solenoid valve coil
001
Right proportional solenoid valve coil
002
Forward "F" speed solenoid
004
Rear "R" speed solenoid
008
1st speed solenoid
016
3rd speed solenoid
032
064
128
TABLE 2
Failed component
Left prop. solenoid valve coil

Right prop. solenoid valve coil
Reverse "R" speed solenoid
1st speed solenoid
rd
3 speed solenoid
LH
prop.
sol.
valve
coil
RH
prop.
sol.
valve
coil
For.
"F"
speed
solen.
Rev.
"R"
speed
solen.
1st
speed
solen.
3rd
speed
solen.
LH
steer.
lever
solen.
RH
steer.
lever
solen.
001
003
005
009
017
033
065
129
002
006
010
018
034
066
130
004
012
020
036
068
132
008
024
040
072
136
016
048
080
144
032
096
160
064
192
128

D350
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Example of identification of a trouble co
7 - 19
As an example, code 024 indicates that two parts are

in trouble. On the top, the column identifies, in correspondence with the "1 st speed " solenoid (first failed
component).
When the failed components are two, the display

shows a trouble code listed in TABLE 2, (given by the
addition of two single codes listed in TABLE 1).
TABLE 2
LH prop. sol. RH prop. sol.
Failed component
Left prop. solenoid valve coil
Right prop. solenoid valve coil
For. "F"
Rever. "R"
speed solen. speed solen.
1st speed
3rd speed
LH steer
LH steer
solen.
solen.
lever solen.
lever solen.
valve coil
valve coil
001
003
005
009
017
033
065
129
002
006
010
018
034
066
130
004
012
008
020
036
068
132
024
040
072
136
016
048
080
144
032
096
160
064
192

Reverse "R" speed solenoid"
1st speed solenoid
3rd speed solenoid
128
Reverse "R" speed solenoid trouble code

Trouble code on display
1st speed solenoid trouble code
Whereas on the left reverse solenoid "R" is identified,

the crossing in TABLE 2 of these two components
determines failure code 024 given by the addition of
the two.
Reverse "R" speed solenoid trouble code

1st speed solenoid trouble code
= 008 +
= 016
Trouble code for both
= 024

7 - 20
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
D350
7.5 BUZZER
SM9529
LOCATION - Inside the cab, behind the instrument

panel.

D350
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
7 - 21
7.6 RELAY GROUP - DIODE BOXES - DIVERTER BOX, POWER RELAY

The group is visible when opening the rear left panel of the machine, near the power batteries.
5
10
8 5
6 5
11
D350R0041
1. Engine cable complete with fuse - 2. Cable complete with sentinel system - 3. cable complete with relay - 4. Box ass.ly
- 5. Screw TE M6 x 12 with washer TR diam. 6 - 6. Bracket - 7. Nut EM 6 x 1 with washer TR diam. - 8. Diverter box C/Coper
- 9. Starter relay - 10. Washer w/ nut - 11. Battery 12V x 2.
CAB
SERVICES
891 A
543
E.V.
RELAY
50A
DIODE
DIODE
DIODE
801
F
MACHINE SERVICES
PROX. SENSORS
542 G
D 163
611
RELAY
10/20A
RELAY
10/20A
RELAY
10/20A
TEMPOR
RELAY
10/20A
RELAY
10/20A
Fuses
4 Amp
H
E
OPERATOR SAFETY
SENTINEL SYSTEM
Engine centr.
fuses 10 Amp
RELAY
50A
907
STARTER SAFETY
924
LOWERING
IN FLOAT
930
LOWERING
IN FLOAT
037
818/623
D350R0042

7 - 22
D350
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
1. DIODE BOXES (Ref. B - D - L)

- For the wires and the connections of the components, please refer to the principle electrical diagram.
87a
30
87c
87b
87c
30
87a
87b
87c
87d
SM9532
2. RELAY 24 VOLT - 50 Amp (Ref. A - F - I - E)
85
30
86 87 87a
SM9533
3. RELAY 24 VOLT - 10/20 Amp (Ref. C - M - G - H)
87
24V-10/20A
1880
85 87
87a
86
85
87a
30
86
30
Electrical diagram
Nominal current
85 87 87a
86
30
SM9534

D350
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
7 - 23
4. DIVERTER BOX
OUTPUT
INPUT
SM9535
5. POWER RELAY (ENGINE STARTING)
14
g
e
G TERMINAL
WIRING DIAGRAM
B TERMINAL
D350R0045

7 - 24
D350
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
7.7 MAIN CONNECTORS

24-21
H
X
W
24-23
J
W
H
V
F
E
S
19
L
18
17
C
N
20
31
30
21
19
F
N
24-31
10
29
M
G
24-19
6
16
O
P
15
1
5
14
18
28
10
3
7
6
16
12
24
14
26
13
23
13
15
27
22
11
17
11
12
25
D
D350R0043
A. A. MACHINE CABLE 24-21 WAYS

CONTACT
NUMBER
WIRE
SECTION
(CAB)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
1
2.5
1
2.5
2.5
1
2.5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LAYOUT
EMPTY
ELECTRIC FAN III SPEED
CONDITIONER THERMOSTAT
ELECTRIC FAN II SPEED
GROUND FOR CAB
EMPTY
ELECTRIC FAN I SPEED
EMPTY
EMPTY
ELECTRIC PUMP DOOR WASHER
ELECTRIC PUMP FRONT/REAR
DA RH PROX. SWITCH W/ DISCOUPLING DIODE
F/R TRANSMISSION SOLENOID VALVE
F INPUT TRANSMISSION SOLENOID VALVE
R INPUT TRANSMISSION SOLENOID VALVE
DA RH PROX. SWITCH W/ DISCOUPLING DIODE
1ST/3RD TRANSM. SOLENOID VALVE
1ST/3RD INPUT 1 ST SOLENOID VALVE
1ST/3RD INPUT 3RD ST SOLENOID VALVE
EMPTY
EMPTY
WIRE
NUMBER
WIRE
COLOUR
WIRE
SECTION
706
824
709
000
745
885
886
156
009
549
548
157
008
546
547
-
B
M
M
N
L
G-V
C-B
B
V-N
A-G
A-N
G-N
C-B
B-R
V-B
-
2.5
1
2.5
2.5
2.5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-

D350
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
7 - 25
B. MACHINE CABLE 24 - 23 WAYS

CONTACT
NUMBER
WIRE
SECTION
(CAB)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
1
1.5
1.5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LAYOUT
FROM BRAKE PEDAL S.V. TO CONTROLLER
AIR CLEANER CLOGGING
FROM ACCEL. TO BRAKE PEDAL VALVE PRESS. SWICTH (+)
COOLANT HIGH TEMPERATURE INDIC. LIGHT
EMPTY
COOLANT TEMP. SENSOR (TEMP. GAUGE)
LOWERING IN FLOAT RELAY
TRANSM. OIL LOW PRESSURE IND. LIGHT
EMPTY
TRANSM. OIL HIGH TEMP. INDICATOR LIGHT
HORN +
(1ST WIRE)
HORN GROUND
(2ND WIRE)
LOWERING IN FLOAT S.V.
ENGINE OIL LOW PRESSURE IND.LIGHT
EMPTY
BRAKE OIL LOW PRESSURE IND. LIGHT
EMPTY
BACK-UP ALARM
EMPTY
EQUIPMENT OIL FILTER CLOGGING IND. LIGHT
FUEL RESERVE INDICATOR LIGHT
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
EMPTY
WIRE
NUMBER
WIRE
COLOUR
WIRE
SECTION
166
663
143
528
552
931
581
559
119
000
598
503
611
163
580
555
557
-
C-L
B-N
M-N
V-B
V
N-I
C-N
S-N
L-N
N
A
H
H-N
A-B
M-B
Z-N
Z
-
1
1
1
1
WIRE
NUMBER
WIRE
COLOUR
WIRE
SECTION
801
904
907
542
637
164
563
809
519
724
565
864
517
803
543
887
997
772
860 (ext. origin)
H-L
S-G
L-B
A-V
S
L-N
L-R
G-N
L-G
R
A-V
H-R
L-B
A
Z-B
R-N
A-G
R
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2.5
1
2.5
1
2.5
1
2.5
1
2.5
1.5
2.5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
C. A. EXTENSION CABLE RELAY BOX - CAB 24 - 19 WAYS

CONTACT
NUMBER
WIRE
SECTION
(CAB)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2.5
1
2.5
1
2.5
1
2.5
1
2.5
1
2.5
1
LAYOUT
FROM FUSE 11 SWITCH "ACC"
OPERATOR SAFETY RELAY
FROM FUSE 17 SWITCH "ST"
TO FUSE 24 FOR S.V.
FROM ALTERNATOR "I"
FROM DISCOUPLING DIODES PROX. OPER. SAF.
STEERING S. V. ST. CONTR. VALVE + 27
AIR CONDITIONER RELAY
STEERING CONTR. VALVE RH OUT S.V. 27
KEY SWITCH POWER
STEERING CONTR. VALVE LH OUT S.V. + 28
SERVICES UNDER "ACC"
STEERING CONTR. VALVE LH OUT S.V. 28
30 AIR CONDITIONER RELAY
STEERING CONT. VALVE SAF. S.V.
CAB SERVICES FROM RELAY 73
6W/BLADE
POWER TO SERVICES NOT UNDER KEY
COLD STARTING (NOT USED ON D350)

7 - 26
D350
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
D. 24-31WAY ENGINE CONTROLLER WIRING

CONTACT
NUMBER
WIRE
SECTION
(CAB)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
0.5
0.5
0.5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
1
-
LAYOUT
ENG. CONTROLLER - ACC. PEDAL OUTPUT
ENG. CONTROLLER - DEC. PED. CONTACT OFF
ENG. CONTROLLER - DEC. PED. CONTACT ON
ENG. CONTROLLER - COMM. GR. (DEC. PANEL)
ENG. CONTROLLER - COMM. GR. (DEC. PANEL)
ENG. CONTROLLER - COMM. POWER (FUSE A)
EMPTY
ENG. CONTROLLER - COMM. POWER (FUSE B)
ENG. CONTROLLER - KEY (FUSE C)
ENG. CONTROLLER - DIAGN. BUTTON
ENG. CONTROLLER - ENGINE STOP IND. LIGHT
ENG. CONTROLLER - ENGINE ALARM LIGHT
ENG. CONTROLLER - MAINTENANCE LIGHT
ENG. CONTROLLER - STARTER LIGHT
ENG. CONTROLLER - DAIGN. INCR. SWITCH
ENG. CONTROLLER - DIAGN. DECR. SWITCH
ENG. CONTROLLER - HOURMETER SIGNAL
ENG. CONTROLLER - ACC. LEV. ENG. BUTTON
ENG. CONTROLLER - ACC. LEV. ENG. BUTTON
ENG. CONTROLLER - ACC. LEVER (SIGN. POS.)
ENG. CONTROLLER - ACC. LEVER (RET. POS.)
ENG. CONTROLLER - POWER + 5 V
ENG. CONTROLLER - POWER + 24 V
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
WIRE
NUMBER
WIRE
COLOUR
WIRE
SECTION
47
3
13
9
10
R7
R8
R17
47
3
13
9
10
R7
R8
R17
0.5
0.5
0.5
1
1
1
1
1
R28
38
44
6
16
5
4
14
24
11
43
20
21
48
49
781
-
R28
38
44
6
16
5
4
14
24
11
43
20
21
48
49
?
-
1
1
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
1
COLOUR CODE
A
LIGHT BLUE
WHITE
ORANGE
YELLOW
GREY
BLUE
BROWN
BLACK
RED
PINK
GREEN
PURPLE
COPYRIGHT BY CNH Italia S.p.A.

Product Support
Viale delle Nazioni, 55 - 41100 Modena - Italy
Reproduction of text or illustration,

in whole or in part, is strictly prohibited.
Print No. 604.13.532.00 - English - II - 2005

Printed by Satiz - Turin (Italy)
Coordinamento Editoriale Satiz - Torino

New Holland - D350 - EN PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

New Holland - D350 - EN PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Copyright New Holland

THIS ALERT SYMBOL SIGNALS IMPORTANT MESSAGES INVOLVING YOUR SAFETY.

Copyright New Holland

Copyright New Holland

BRAKES AND STEERING DIFFERENTIAL

Copyright New Holland

Copyright New Holland

SAFETY RULES ................................................................................................................. III-X

Copyright New Holland

Copyright New Holland

- Check brakes, steering and attachment controls before

- Do not allow unauthorised personnel to operate service

- Be sure all protective guards or panels are in place, and

- Do not wear rings, wrist watches, jewellery, loose or

- Be sure exposed personnel in the area of operation are

- Fasten your seat belt (when provided).

- Do not jump on or off the machine. Keep two hands and

- Due to the presence on the machine of flammable fluids,

- Do not use controls or hoses as hand holds when

- REMEMBER THAT STARTING FLUID IS FLAMMABLE.

- Never attempt to operate the machine or its tools from

- Containers must be stored in fresh, well ventilated

- DO NOT PUNCTURE OR BURN CONTAINERS.

- Never use these products near open flames, smoking

- Be careful of slippery conditions on stepping points,

- Check the seat safety belt at least twice a year. If there

- Do not run the engine of this machine in closed areas

- Make sure the Operator's compartment is free of foreign

Copyright New Holland

- Avoid kinking chains or cables. Do not pull through a

- DO NOT CARRY RIDERS ON MACHINE

- Be sure chains and cables are anchored and the anchor

- Study and familiarise with escape routes alternate to

- DO NOT PULL UNLESS OPERATOR's COMPARTMENT OF MACHINES INVOLVED ARE PROPERLY

- For your personal protection, do not climb on or off

- Make sure that exposed persons in the area of operation

- In darkness, check area of operation carefully before

- NEVER COAST the machine down grades and slopes

- If engine has a tendency to stall for any reason under

Choose and shift into the most appropriate gear to keep

- On machines supplied with suction radiator fans, be sure

- Do not operate machine with brakes out of adjustment.

- Operate the machine at speeds slow enough to ensure

- Operators must know thoroughly the performances of

- Where noise exposure exceeds 90 dBA for 8 hours, wear

- Maintain a safe distance from other machines. Provide

- Maintain clear vision of areas of travel or work. Keep cab

- Operate the machine at a speed adequate to the working

- When pulling or towing through a cable or chain, do not

- Never use the machine as a work platform or scaffolding,

Inspect carefully for flaws or troubles before using.

Copyright New Holland

- When operating a machine, know in advance what

- Be alert to avoid changes in traction conditions that could

- When roading, find-out what conditions are likely to be

- Working in virgin and rough terrains is characterised by

- When crossing gullies or ditches, move at an angle with

- Whenever possible, avoid going over obstacles such as

- Always remember to position the transmission drive

- Avoid side hill travel, whenever possible. Drive up and

- NEVER LEAVE THE MACHINE UNATTENDED with the

- The grade of slope you should attempt will be limited by